Lasetec II-Service and Installation Guide-English-41195-0510 - CCv0001 PDF

Lasetec II Service and Installation
Guide
30-Watt and 60-Watt Models
Document 41195-0510
Industrial Dynamics Company, Ltd.
Document 41195-0510 Copyright 2010. All rights reserved.
No part of this publication may be reproduced or used in any form or by any means (graphic,
electronic, or mechanical including photocopying, recording, taping, or information storage
and retrieval system) without written permission of Industrial Dynamics Company, Ltd.
Filtec® and Industrial Dynamics® are registered trademarks of Industrial Dynamics Company,
Ltd. All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners.
Contact Information
Corporate Headquarters 3100 Fujita Street,

Torrance, California
90505-4007
U.S.A.
Telephone:(310) 325-5633
FAX: (310) 530-1000
Internet: www.filtec.com
Mailing Address P.O. Box 2945,

90509-2945
U.S.A.
Shipping Address 3100 Fujita Street,

90505-4007
U.S.A.
Customer Service (800) 733-5173

Table of Contents
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
Version of the Lasetec II System Software That This Guide Describes . . . . xxv
Topics That This Guide Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Audience of This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
Conventions That Appear in This Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxvi
1. Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Section Page
1.1 Safety Notices and Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.2 Safety Notices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.1.3 Safety Labels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-2
1.2 CDRH Class IV Laser Safety Regulations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.2 Lasetec II Safety Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-3
1.2.3 Electromagnetic Interference Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-6
1.2.4 Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
2. Lasetec II Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Section Page
2.1 Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.1 Definition: Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.2 Definition: Product Code Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.3 Definition: Product Code Field. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.1.4 Example: Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2
2.2 Product Code Items or Fields. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.1 Types of Product Code Items or Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.2 Definition: Text Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
Table of Contents iii

Document 41195-0510
2.2.3 Definition: Date and Time Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-3
2.2.4 Elements of a Date and Time Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-4
2.2.5 Definition: Serial Number Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.6 Example: Serial Number Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-9
2.2.7 Description of the Serial Number Product Code Item or Field Example . . . 2-9
2.2.8 Variables That Make Up a Serial Number Product Code Item or Field. . . . .2-10
2.2.9 Definition: User-Defined Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-10
2.2.10 Example: User-Defined Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
2.2.11 Definition: Bar Code Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
2.2.12 Example: Bar Code Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
2.2.13 Types of Bar Codes That You Can Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-12
2.3 Product Code File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.3.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.3.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.3.3 Syntax Rules for PCF Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
2.4 Lasetec II Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2.4.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2.4.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
2.5 Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5.1 Types of Tracking Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5.2 Definition: Dynamic Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5.3 Definition: Indexed Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5.4 Definition: Static Tracking Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5.5 When to Use Types of Tracking Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-16
2.5.6 Flow Chart: How Tracking Modes Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
2.6 Galvanometer Step . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
2.6.1 Definition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-18
2.7 Leading and Trailing Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
2.7.1 Definition: Leading Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
2.7.2 Definition: Trailing Edge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-19
3. Components of the Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Section Page
3.1 Lasetec II Laser. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.1.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2
3.2 Specifications of the Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.2.1 Facts About Speed, Power, and Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-3
3.3 External Components of the Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.3.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
3.4 Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.4.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
3.5 Switch Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
iv Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
3.5.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
3.6 Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.6.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
3.7 Components of the 30-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.7.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
3.8 Components of the 60-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.8.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
3.9 Descriptions of Lasetec II Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
3.9.1 Galvanometer Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
3.9.2 Marking Engine Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
3.9.3 Laser Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
3.9.4 TX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
3.9.5 PC/104 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
3.9.6 Marking Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
3.9.7 I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
3.9.8 Encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
3.9.9 Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-17
3.9.10 Laser Tube and Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
3.9.11 Galvanometers (Galvos) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-19
3.9.12 Focal Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
3.9.13 Fault and Laser Emission Beacons. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
3.10 Air Filtration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
3.10.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-23
3.11 Chiller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
3.11.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-24
4. Installing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Section Page
4.1 Installing Your Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.1.1 Flow Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2
4.2 Requirements That You Need to Meet as You Install Your Lasetec II . . . . . . 4-3
4.2.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-3
4.3 Installing the Encoder, Trigger, and Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.3.1 Decision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-4
4.4 Installing the Encoder, Trigger, and Print Head for Use With a Conveyor . . 4-5
4.4.1 Steps: Installing the Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4.2 Steps: Installing the Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.4.3 Steps: Mounting the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-5
4.5 Installing the Encoder, Trigger, and Print Head for Use With a Labeler . . . . 4-7
4.5.1 Steps: Installing the Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.5.2 Steps: Installing the Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
4.5.3 Steps: Mounting the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-7
Table of Contents v
Document 41195-0510
4.6 Installing the Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.6.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
4.7 Installing the Air Controls on the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
4.7.1 Requirements for Incoming Air From Your Facility to the Air Controls . . . .4-10
4.7.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-10
4.8 Installing the Switch Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
4.8.1 Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
4.8.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
4.9 Are You Installing a 30- or 60-Watt Lasetec II?. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
4.9.1 Decision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-14
4.10 Installing the 60-Watt Lasetec II Chiller and Chiller Interlock . . . . . . . . .4-15
4.10.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-15
4.11 Installing the Air Filtration System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
4.11.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-16
4.12 Opening the Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
4.12.1 Diagram: Back Panel of the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
4.12.2 Diagram: Back Panel of the 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-18
4.13 Opening the Back Panel of the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
4.13.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-19
4.14 Wiring Cables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
4.14.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-20
4.15 Wiring the Trigger to the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
4.15.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-21
4.16 Wiring the Encoder to the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
4.16.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-22
4.17 Wiring the Safety Interlocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
4.17.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-23
4.18 Wiring the Customer I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
4.18.1 Types of Customer Input/Outputs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
4.18.2 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-24
4.18.3 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-26
4.19 Wiring Another Lasetec II to Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
4.19.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-27
4.20 Connecting a Host Computer System to Your Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
4.20.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-28
4.21 Wiring the Operator Station to the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
4.21.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-29
4.22 Wiring the Switch Box to the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
4.22.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-31
4.23 Closing the Back Panel of the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
4.23.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-34
4.24 Wiring Your Facility’s Power to the Switch Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
4.24.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
vi Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
5. How the Lasetec II Communicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Section Page
5.1 Port Parameters That the Lasetec II Uses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.1.1 Chart . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5.2 Ways to Configure Communication on the Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
5.3 Command Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.1 Definition: Command Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.2 Examples: Command Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.3.3 Types of Command Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
5.4 What Happens When You Issue a Standard Command Message . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.4.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
5.5 Standard Command Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.1 List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.2 Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-6
5.5.3 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.5.4 Applications of Standard Command Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-7
5.6 What Happens When a Lasetec II Issues an Enhanced Command Message . .5-14
5.6.1 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-14
5.7 Enhanced Command Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
5.7.1 List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
5.7.2 Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-15
5.7.3 How the Lasetec II Represents Enhanced Command Messages Internally . .5-15
5.7.4 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16
5.8 Enhanced Command Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
5.8.1 Applications of Enhanced Command Codes. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-17
5.9 Lasetec II Host Port Application. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
5.9.1 Purpose. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
5.9.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
5.9.3 Selections on the Main Screen of the Host Port Application . . . . . . . . . .5-20
5.10 Installing and Starting the Lasetec II Host Port Application . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
5.10.1 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
5.10.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-22
5.11 Starting and Stopping Marking Containers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
5.11.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-23
5.12 Remotely Selecting and Using a PCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
5.12.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-24
6. Lasetec II System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Section Page
6.1 Lasetec II System Software Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
6.2 Using Lasetec II System Software Dialog Boxes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
Table of Contents vii

Document 41195-0510
6.2.1 Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-3
6.3 Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.1 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
6.3.2 Major Parts of the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-5
6.3.3 Selections on the Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-7
6.4 PC Display Zoom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.1 How to Display This Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
6.4.3 Keys That You Can Use in the PC Display Zoom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
6.4.4 Selections on the PC Display Zoom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-10
6.5 Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
6.5.1 How to Display This Screen . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
6.5.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
6.5.3 Selections on the Advanced Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-12
6.6 Product Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
6.6.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
6.6.3 Keys That You Can Use in the Product Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-14
6.6.4 Code and Trigger Fields on the Product Code Editor Dialog Box . . . . . . .6-15
6.6.5 Mark Item Parameters Fields on the Product Code Editor Dialog Box . . . .6-17
6.6.6 Insert and Barcode Fields on the Product Code Editor Dialog Box . . . . . .6-20
6.7 Standard Text Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
6.7.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
6.7.3 Fields on the Standard Text Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-24
6.8 Date/Time Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
6.8.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
6.8.3 Fields on the Date/Time Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-26
6.9 Serial Number Field Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
6.9.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
6.9.3 Fields on the Serial Number Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-29
6.10 User Defined Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
6.10.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
6.10.3 Fields on the User Defined Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-31
6.11 Bar Code Type Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
6.11.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
6.11.3 Fields on the Bar Code Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
6.12 Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
viii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
6.12.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
6.12.3 Selections on the Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-38
6.13 System Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
6.13.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
6.13.3 First Column of Fields on the Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . .6-40
6.13.4 Second Column of Fields on the Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box. . . . . . . .6-42
6.14 Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44
6.14.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44
6.14.3 Selections on the Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-45
6.15 Alignment Tests Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
6.15.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
6.15.3 Verifier Settings Fields on the Alignment Tests Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . .6-47
6.15.4 Align Settings Fields on the Alignment Tests Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-48
6.16 Profile Laser Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
6.16.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
6.16.3 Fields on the Profile Laser Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-51
6.17 Galvo Tests Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
6.17.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
6.17.3 Fields on the Galvo Tests Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-55
6.18 Load/Save System Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
6.18.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
6.18.3 Fields on the Load/Save System Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
6.19 Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59
6.19.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59
6.19.3 Selections on the Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-60
6.20 Installation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-61
6.20.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-61
6.20.3 Selections on the Installation Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-62
6.21 Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
6.21.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
6.21.3 Ways to Calibrate the Encoder. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
6.21.4 Fields on the Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-64
6.22 Tracking System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65
Table of Contents ix
Document 41195-0510
6.22.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65
6.22.3 Fields on the Tracking System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65
6.22.4 Diagram: How Direction and Orientation Interrelate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-67
6.23 Thermal System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
6.23.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
6.23.3 Fields on the Thermal System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
6.24 Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-71
6.24.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-71
6.24.3 Selections on the Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-72
6.25 Laser System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
6.25.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
6.25.3 Fields on the Laser System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
6.26 Delay System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
6.26.2 Definition: Segment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
6.26.3 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
6.26.4 Definition: Power Ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
6.26.5 How Power Ramping Works . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-76
6.26.6 Fields on the Delay System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-77
6.26.7 Guidelines: Setting Delays for Fast or Precise Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-81
6.27 Optical System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-82
6.27.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-82
6.27.3 Fields on the Optical System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-82
6.28 Verification Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-84
6.28.2 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-84
6.28.3 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-84
6.28.4 Fields on the Verification Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-85
6.29 Computer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-87
6.29.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-87
6.29.3 Selections on the Computer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-88
6.30 Communication Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-89
6.30.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-89
6.30.3 Fields on the Communication Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-89
6.31 Date & Time Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-92
6.31.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-92
x Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
6.31.3 Fields on the Date & Time Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-92
6.32 Languages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-94
6.32.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-94
6.32.3 Languages That You Can Select . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-94
6.33 About Lasetec II Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95
6.33.2 Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95
7. Configuring Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Section Page
7.1 Aligning the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.1.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-2
7.2 Configuring Your Lasetec II With the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.2.1 Flow Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
7.3 Calibrating the Encoder With the System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.1 Steps: Pitch Method. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
7.3.2 Steps: Width Method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-10
7.4 Calculating the Trigger Delay. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7.4.1 Steps: Calculating the Trigger Delay . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-13
7.5 Configuring the Tracking Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-15
7.5.1 Steps: Displaying the Tracking System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . .7-15
7.5.2 Steps: Configuring Direction, Mode, Resolution, Delay, and Orientation. . .7-16
7.5.3 Steps: Configuring Delay Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-17
7.6 Setting the Advanced Features Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
7.6.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-18
8. Creating and Editing Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Section Page
8.1 Creating and Editing Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.1.1 Flow Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2
8.2 Determining the Format of the Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.2.1 Product Code That You Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
8.3 Creating a New PCF and Product Code Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.3.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
8.4 Building the Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4.1 Steps: Clearing Fields in the Existing Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
8.4.2 Steps: Creating a Standard Text Field for a User-Defined Lot Number Field 8-9
8.4.3 Steps: Creating a User-Defined Lot Number Field . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-11
8.4.4 Steps: Creating an Expiration Date and Time Item. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-13
8.4.5 Steps: Creating a Serial Number Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-15
Table of Contents xi
Document 41195-0510
8.4.6 Steps: Saving Your New PCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-17
8.5 Adjusting Items and Fields . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
8.5.1 Steps: Adjusting the Size of the Print Area Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-18
8.6 Readjusting the Size of the Print Area Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
8.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
8.6.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-20
8.7 Rearranging Items in the Print Area Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
8.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
8.7.2 Steps: Moving the 0000000001 Serial Number Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
8.7.3 Steps: Moving the Exp: Expiration Date Item . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-22
8.7.4 Steps: Moving the Lot: 12345 Text and User-Defined Fields . . . . . . . . . .8-23
8.7.5 Steps: Correcting the Placement of the 0000000001 Serial Number Item .8-23
8.7.6 Steps: Correcting the Placement of the Exp: Expiration Date Item . . . . . .8-23
8.7.7 Steps: Correcting the Placement of the Lot: 12345 Fields . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
8.7.8 Diagram: Final Print Area Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-24
8.8 Adding a Two-Dimensional Data Matrix Bar Code to Your Product Code . . .8-25
8.8.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-25
8.8.2 Diagram: Final Print Area Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
8.8.3 Steps: Saving Your Updated PCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-28
8.9 Troubleshooting and Fixing Quality Problems With Product Codes . . . . . . .8-29
8.9.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-29
8.10 Backing Up a PCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
8.10.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-32
8.11 Loading the Backed Up Copy of a PCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
8.11.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .8-33
9. Executing Your First Test Run and Making Adjustments . . . . . 9-1
Section Page
9.1 Calibrating the Verifiers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.1 What the Lasetec II Does When You Calibrate the Verifiers . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.1.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-2
9.2 Focusing and Aligning Your Product Code on a Container . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.2.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
9.3 Executing a Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.3.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
9.4 Adjusting the Height of Your Product Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.4.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-9
9.5 Adjusting the Code Delay or X Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
9.5.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
xii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
9.5.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-11
9.6 Adjusting the Speed of the Galvanometers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
9.6.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
9.6.2 Steps: Getting Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-13
9.6.3 Steps: Adjusting the Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-14
9.7 Adjusting the Power of the Laser . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
9.7.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
9.7.2 Steps: Getting Set Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-16
9.7.3 Steps: Adjusting the Wattage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-17
9.8 Adjusting the Trigger Blanking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
9.8.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
9.8.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .9-19
10. Performing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
Section Page
10.1 When to Perform Maintenance Tasks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
10.1.1 Decision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-2
10.2 Maintenance Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
10.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
10.2.2 Steps: Inspecting the Print Head and Safety Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
10.2.3 Steps: Cleaning the Focal Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-3
10.2.4 Steps: Cleaning Air Filtration System Filters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
10.2.5 Steps: Cleaning Trigger Beam Emitter and Receiver Lenses . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
10.2.6 Steps: Inspecting the Beacon Lamps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-4
10.2.7 Steps: Inspecting External Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
10.2.8 Steps: Cleaning the Print Head Housing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-5
10.2.9 Steps: Inspecting the Warning and Instruction Labels and Plates . . . . . . .10-5
11. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
Section Page
11.1 Troubleshooting Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
11.1.1 Flow Chart. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-2
11.2 Diagnostic and Alarm Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
11.2.1 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-3
11.3 Clearing Error Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.3.1 What Happens When the Lasetec II Encounters an Error . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.3.2 Before You Clear an Error Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.3.3 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-12
11.4 Troubleshooting Problems . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
11.4.1 Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-14
Table of Contents xiii

Document 41195-0510
12. Servicing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1
Section Page
12.1 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
12.1.1 Safeguards to Observe . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-2
12.2 Accessing the Inside of the Print Head and Laser Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
12.2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
12.2.2 Removing the Print Head Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-3
12.2.3 Removing the Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4
12.2.4 Closing the Back Panel and the Print Head Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
12.2.5 Removing the Laser Enclosure Cover on a 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . .12-6
12.2.6 Closing the Laser Enclosure Cover on a 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
12.3 Updating Lasetec II System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.3.1 Utilities That You Use to Update System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-10
12.3.2 Diagram: LLINK.EXE Utility Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
12.3.3 Elements on the LLINK.EXE Utility Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-12
12.3.4 Keys That You Can Use on the LLINK.EXE Utility Main Menu . . . . . . . . 12-13
12.3.5 Ways to Update the Lasetec II System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-13
12.4 Updating System Software by Using the Serial Port Method . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.1 Steps: Establishing Communication. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
12.4.2 Steps: Transferring and Installing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-16
12.5 Updating System Software by Using the Compact Flash Card Method . . . 12-19
12.5.1 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.5.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
12.6 Updating System Software by Using the Universal Serial Bus Method. . . . 12-21
12.6.1 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.6.2 Steps: Connecting the Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
12.6.3 Steps: Transferring and Installing Files . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-23
12.7 Removing the Advanced Features Password . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.7.1 Before You Begin. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.7.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
12.7.3 Steps: Editing the LASETEC.CFG Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
12.8 Removing and Replacing the Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
12.8.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-28
12.9 Removing and Replacing the 30-Watt Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.9.1 Steps: Removing the Laser Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
12.9.2 Steps: Replacing the Laser Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
12.10 Removing and Replacing the 60-Watt Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
12.10.1 Steps: Draining Water From the Chiller Hoses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
12.10.2 Steps: Removing the Laser Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-40
12.10.3 Steps: Replacing the Laser Assembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-46
12.11 Removing the PC/104 and TX Cards From a 30-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . 12-50
12.11.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
xiv Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
12.12 Removing the PC/104 and TX Cards From a 60-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . 12-53
12.12.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
12.13 Removing the Marking Engine From a 30-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56
12.13.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-56
12.14 Removing the Marking Engine From a 60-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . 12-60
12.14.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-60
12.15 Removing the Marking Engine Power Supply From a 30-Watt Lasetec II . . 12-63
12.15.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-63
12.16 Removing Both Marking Engine Power Supplies From a 60-Watt Lasetec II 12-65
12.16.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-65
12.17 Replacing the Marking Engine Power Supply in the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . 12-68
12.17.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-68
12.18 Replacing Both Marking Engine Power Supplies in the 60-Watt Lasetec II . 12-70
12.18.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-70
12.19 Removing the Laser Power Supply From a 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . 12-73
12.19.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-73
12.20 Removing Both Laser Power Supplies From a 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . 12-75
12.20.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-75
12.21 Replacing the Laser Power Supply on a 30-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . 12-77
12.21.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-77
12.22 Replacing Both Laser Power Supplies on a 60-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . 12-79
12.22.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-79
12.23 Removing the Galvanometers Power Supply From a 30-Watt Lasetec II . . 12-81
12.23.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-81
12.24 Removing Both Galvanometers Power Supplies From a 60-Watt Lasetec II 12-84
12.24.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-84
12.25 Replacing the Galvanometers Power Supply in the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . 12-86
12.25.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-86
12.26 Replacing Both Galvanometers Power Supplies in the 60-Watt Lasetec II . 12-89
12.26.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-89
12.27 Replacing the Marking Engine in the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-92
12.27.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-92
12.28 Replacing the Marking Engine in the 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-95
12.28.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-95
12.29 Replacing the PC/104 and TX Cards in the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . 12-99
12.29.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99
12.30 Replacing the PC/104 and TX Cards in the 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . 12-102
12.30.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102
12.31 Removing the Galvanometer Controller Cards From a 30-Watt Lasetec II 12-105
12.31.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-105
12.32 Removing the Galvanometer Controller Cards From a 60-Watt Lasetec II 12-109
12.32.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-109
12.33 Replacing the Galvanometers Controller Cards in the 30-Watt Lasetec II 12-113
Table of Contents xv
Document 41195-0510
12.33.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-113
12.34 Replacing the Galvanometers Controller Cards in the 60-Watt Lasetec II 12-116
12.34.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-116
12.35 Removing the Galvanometers Assembly From a 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . 12-120
12.35.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-120
12.36 Removing the Galvanometers Assembly From a 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . 12-123
12.36.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-123
12.37 Replacing the Galvanometers Assembly in the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . 12-125
12.37.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-125
12.38 Replacing the Galvanometers Assembly in the 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . 12-127
12.38.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-127
12.39 Removing the Vortex Compressed Air Cooler From a 30-Watt Lasetec II . 12-130
12.39.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-130
12.40 Replacing the Vortex Compressed Air Cooler in the 30-Watt Lasetec II . 12-134
12.40.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-134
12.41 Removing, Replacing Focal Length LEDs in the 30-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . 12-137
12.41.1 Decision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-137
12.41.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-138
12.42 Removing, Replacing Focal Length LEDs in the 60-Watt Lasetec II. . . . . 12-139
12.42.1 Decision Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-139
12.42.2 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-139
12.43 Replacing the Alignment LED in the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-141
12.43.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-141
12.44 Replacing the Alignment LED in the 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-144
12.44.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-144
12.45 Replacing the Beacon LED. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-147
12.45.1 Steps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-147
A. Software Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Index-1
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Feedback-1
Help Us Improve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback-1

Ways to Submit Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback-1
Documentation Feedback Form . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback-2
xvi Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
List of Figures
Preface. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . xxv
1. Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
Figure 1-1. Lasetec II Warning Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

Figure 1-2. Compliance Mark of the European Community . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-7
Figure 1-3. Lasetec II Declaration of Conformity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-8
2. Lasetec II Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1
Figure 2-1. Product Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

Figure 2-2. Example of a Serial Number Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . 2-9
Figure 2-3. Examples of a Bar Code Product Code Item or Field . . . . . . . . . . .2-11
Figure 2-4. Sample Contents of a PCF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-13
Figure 2-5. Sample Contents of a Configuration File . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-15
Figure 2-6. How Dynamic and Indexed Modes Work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .2-17
3. Components of the Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
Figure 3-1. Beam-Steering Mechanics of the Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

Figure 3-2. External Components of the Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-4
Figure 3-3. Lasetec II 30-Watt and 60-Watt Print Heads. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-5
Figure 3-4. Switch Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-6
Figure 3-5. Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-7
Figure 3-6. Integration of 30-Watt Lasetec II Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-8
Figure 3-7. Integration of 60-Watt Lasetec II Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-9
Figure 3-8. Galvanometer Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-10
Figure 3-9. Marking Engine Power Supply . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-11
Figure 3-10. Laser Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-12
Figure 3-11. Transmit (TX) Card in 30-Watt, 60-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . .3-13
Figure 3-12. PC/104 Card (Model FB-2612) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-14
Figure 3-13. Marking Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-15
List of Figures xvii

Document 41195-0510
Figure 3-14. I/O Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Figure 3-15. High-Resolution Encoder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-16
Figure 3-16. Marking Trigger . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-18
Figure 3-17. 30-Watt and PET (Top) and 60-Watt (Bottom) Laser Assemblies . . . .3-19
Figure 3-18. Galvanometer (Galvo) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-20
Figure 3-19. Focal Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-21
Figure 3-20. Laser Emission and Fault Beacons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-22
Figure 3-21. Panels of Air Filtration Systems Offered by Industrial Dynamics . . .3-23
Figure 3-22. Front Panel of a Chiller Offered by Industrial Dynamics . . . . . . . . .3-24
4. Installing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Figure 4-1. Installing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

Figure 4-2. Installing the Operator Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-9
Figure 4-3. Parts of the Air Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-11
Figure 4-4. Parts of the Switch Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-13
Figure 4-5. Back Panel of the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-17
Figure 4-7. Opened Back Panel of a Lasetec II, Showing the I/O Card . . . . . . .4-19
Figure 4-8. Connector J3 on the TX Card for the Operator Station Cable . . . . .4-29
Figure 4-9. Operator Station Ground Wire Connected to the Marker Engine . . .4-30
Figure 4-10. Pulling off the AC1 Terminal Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4-32
Figure 4-11. Attaching Your Facility’s Power to the Switch Box. . . . . . . . . . . . .4-35
5. How the Lasetec II Communicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
Figure 5-1. Enhanced Command Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

Figure 5-2. Main Screen of the Lasetec II Host Port Application . . . . . . . . . . .5-19
6. Lasetec II System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
Figure 6-1. Lasetec II System Software Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

Figure 6-2. Lasetec II Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-4
Figure 6-3. PC Display Zoom Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-9
Figure 6-4. Advanced Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-11
Figure 6-5. Product Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-13
Figure 6-6. Standard Text Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-23
Figure 6-7. Date/Time Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-25
Figure 6-8. Serial Number Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-28
Figure 6-9. User Defined Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-30
Figure 6-10. Bar Code Field Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-33
Figure 6-11. Maintenance Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-37
xviii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
Figure 6-12. System Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-40
Figure 6-13. Test Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-44
Figure 6-14. Alignment Tests Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-46
Figure 6-15. Profile Laser Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-50
Figure 6-16. Galvo Test Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-54
Figure 6-17. Load/Save System Settings Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-57
Figure 6-18. Setup Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-59
Figure 6-19. Installation Menu. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-61
Figure 6-20. Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-63
Figure 6-21. Tracking System Parameters Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-65
Figure 6-22. How Direction and Orientation Interrelate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-68
Figure 6-23. Thermal System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-69
Figure 6-24. Configuration Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-71
Figure 6-25. Laser System Parameters Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-73
Figure 6-26. Delay System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-75
Figure 6-27. Concepts of Power Ramping . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-76
Figure 6-28. Optical System Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-82
Figure 6-29. Verification Parameters Dialog Box. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-84
Figure 6-30. Computer Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-87
Figure 6-31. Communication Parameters Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-89
Figure 6-32. Date & Time Settings Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-92
Figure 6-33. Languages Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-94
Figure 6-34. About Lasetec II Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .6-95
7. Configuring Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1
Figure 7-1. System Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

Figure 7-2. Configuring Your Lasetec II With the System Software . . . . . . . . . . 7-7
Figure 7-3. Measuring the Pitch Distance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
Figure 7-4. Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box Showing Pitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
Figure 7-5. Measure the Width of the Container at the Trigger Point . . . . . . . .7-11
Figure 7-6. Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box Showing Width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-12
Figure 7-7. Determining the Direction and Orientation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .7-16
8. Creating and Editing Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
Figure 8-1. Creating and Editing a Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

Figure 8-2. Product Code and Label That You Build . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
Figure 8-3. DEFAULT PCF Loaded in the Product Code Editor . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
Figure 8-4. Difference Between Product Code File and Product Code Description 8-5
List of Figures xix

Document 41195-0510
9. Executing Your First Test Run and Making Adjustments . . . . . 9-1
Figure 9-1. How to Verify the Laser Focus and Alignment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
10. Performing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1
11. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1
12. Servicing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Figure 12-3. Pulling Away the Back Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Figure 12-4. Print Head Cover Interlock Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-5
Figure 12-5. Unscrewing the Latch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-6
Figure 12-6. Lifting the Print Head . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Figure 12-7. Locking the Print Head in Place . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-7
Figure 12-8. Pulling Out the Plug . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-8
Figure 12-9. Screwing the Latch Into Place. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-9
Figure 12-10. LLINK.EXE Main Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-11
Figure 12-11. COM 1 DB9 RS-232 Cable Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-15
Figure 12-12. Removing the Compact Flash Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-19
Figure 12-13. 10-Pin USB-to-Motherboard Header Cable . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-21
Figure 12-14. Connecting a USB Cable to the Header Pins on the PC/104 Card . . 12-22
Figure 12-15. Female Connector on the USB-to-Motherboard Header Cable . . . . 12-22
Figure 12-16. Removing the Compact Flash Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-25
Figure 12-17. MS-DOS Editor Window Showing LASETEC.CFG . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-26
Figure 12-18. MS-DOS Editor Window Showing Removed Password . . . . . . . . . . 12-27
Figure 12-19. Operator Station Ground Wire Connected to the Marker Engine . . 12-28
Figure 12-20. Connector J3 on the TX Card for the Operator Station Cable . . . . 12-29
Figure 12-21. Operator Station Ground Wire Connected to the Marker Engine . . 12-30
Figure 12-22. Removing the Metal Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 12-31
Figure 12-23. Disconnecting Cables to Remove the Laser Assembly. . . . . . . . . . 12-32
Figure 12-24. Sliding the Cooling Air Hose From the Retaining Block . . . . . . . . . 12-32
Figure 12-25. Removing the Supplied Laser Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-33
Figure 12-26. Removing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
Figure 12-27. Screw the Wrenches Into the Base Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-34
Figure 12-28. Removing the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-35
Figure 12-29. Screwing the Wrenches Into the Base Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
Figure 12-30. Lowering the Laser Assembly Into the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-36
Figure 12-31. Replacing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-37
Figure 12-32. Removing the Supplied Laser Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-38
xx Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
Figure 12-33. Sliding the Cooling Air Hose Under the Retaining Block . . . . . . . . 12-38
Figure 12-34. Connecting Cables to Replace the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
Figure 12-35. Replacing the Metal Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 12-39
Figure 12-36. Removing the Metal Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41
Figure 12-37. Chiller Hose Couplings. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-41
Figure 12-38. Disconnecting Cables to Remove the Laser Assembly. . . . . . . . . . 12-42
Figure 12-39. Lasetec II Laser Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-42
Figure 12-40. Removing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-43
Figure 12-42. Grasping Both T-Handle Wrenches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-44
Figure 12-43. Removing the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
Figure 12-44. Resting the Assembly on the Laser Enclosure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-45
Figure 12-46. Lowering the Laser Assembly Into the Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-47
Figure 12-47. Replacing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-48
Figure 12-48. Connecting Cables to Replace the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49
Figure 12-49. Replacing the Metal Shroud . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-49
Figure 12-50. Disconnecting the Cables From the TX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-50
Figure 12-51. Removing the TX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51
Figure 12-52. Disconnecting the Cables From the PC/104 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-51
Figure 12-53. Disconnecting the Cables From the TX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-53
Figure 12-54. Removing the TX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54
Figure 12-55. Disconnecting the Cables From the PC/104 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-54
Figure 12-56. Disconnecting Cables From the Marking Engine Card . . . . . . . . . . 12-56
Figure 12-57. Removing the Plexiglas Crossbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-57
Figure 12-58. Releasing the Front of the Marking Engine Card by Pulling Up . . . . 12-58
Figure 12-59. Removing the Marking Engine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-59
Figure 12-60. Disconnecting Cables From the Marking Engine Card . . . . . . . . . . 12-60
Figure 12-61. Removing the Marking Engine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-61
Figure 12-62. Sliding Out the Marking Engine Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-62
Figure 12-63. Cables From the Marking Engine Power Supply Card . . . . . . . . . . 12-63
Figure 12-64. Rubber Grommets on the Marking Engine Power Supply Card . . . . 12-64
Figure 12-65. Cables From the First Marking Engine Power Supply Card . . . . . . . 12-65
Figure 12-66. Rubber Grommets on the First Marking Engine Power Supply Card . 12-66
Figure 12-67. Cable From the Second Marking Engine Power Supply Card. . . . . . 12-66
Figure 12-68. Rubber Grommets on the Second Marking Engine Power Supply. . . 12-67
Figure 12-69. Rubber Grommets on the Marking Engine Power Supply Card . . . . 12-68
Figure 12-70. Cables to the Marking Engine Power Supply Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-69
Figure 12-71. Rubber Grommets on the First Marking Engine Power Supply Card . 12-70
Figure 12-72. Cables to the Marking Engine Power Supply Card . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-71
Figure 12-73. Rubber Grommets on the Second Marking Engine Power Supply. . . 12-71
Figure 12-74. Cable to the Second Marking Engine Power Supply Card. . . . . . . . 12-72
Figure 12-75. Disconnecting Cables From the Laser Power Supply Card . . . . . . . 12-73
List of Figures xxi

Document 41195-0510
Figure 12-76. Loosening the Slide Plate. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-74
Figure 12-77. Disconnecting Cables From the Laser Power Supply Cards . . . . . . 12-75
Figure 12-78. Loosening Nuts From the Slide Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-76
Figure 12-79. Notches in the Laser Power Supply Card Mounting Brackets . . . . . 12-78
Figure 12-80. Connecting Cables From the Laser Power Supply Card . . . . . . . . . 12-78
Figure 12-81. Notches in the Laser Power Supply Cards Mounting Brackets. . . . . 12-79
Figure 12-82. Connecting Cables to Both Laser Power Supply Cards . . . . . . . . . 12-80
Figure 12-83. Disconnecting Cables From the Galvanometers Power Supply . . . . 12-82
Figure 12-84. Loosening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and Sliding Plate . . . . . . 12-82
Figure 12-85. Removing the Galvanometers Power Supply. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-83
Figure 12-86. Disconnecting Cables From the Galvanometers Power Supplies . . . 12-84
Figure 12-87. Loosening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and Sliding Plates . . . . . 12-85
Figure 12-88. Aligning the Notch When Replacing a Galvanometers Power Supply 12-87
Figure 12-89. Tightening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and Sliding Plate . . . . . 12-87
Figure 12-90. Connecting Cables to the Galvanometers Power Supply . . . . . . . . 12-88
Figure 12-91. Aligning the Notch When Replacing a Galvanometers Power Supply 12-89
Figure 12-92. Tightening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and Sliding Plates . . . . . 12-90
Figure 12-93. Connecting Cables to the Galvanometers Power Supplies . . . . . . . 12-91
Figure 12-94. Snapping the Mounting Carriage Onto the Mounting Supports . . . . 12-93
Figure 12-95. Replacing the Plexiglas Crossbar . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-93
Figure 12-96. Connecting Cables to the Marking Engine Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-94
Figure 12-97. Sliding the Marking Engine Card Into Its Carriage . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-96
Figure 12-98. Lowering the Marking Engine Card Into the Enclosure . . . . . . . . . 12-97
Figure 12-99. Snapping the Mounting Carriage Onto the Mounting Supports . . . . 12-98
Figure 12-100. Connecting Cables to the Marking Engine Card. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-98
Figure 12-101. Connecting the PC/104 and TX Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-99
Figure 12-102. Connecting the Cables to the PC/104 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-100
Figure 12-103. Replacing the TX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-100
Figure 12-104. Lining Up Pins on the J1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-101
Figure 12-105. Connecting the PC/104 and TX Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-102
Figure 12-106. Connecting the Cables to the PC/104 Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-103
Figure 12-107. Replacing the TX Card . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-103
Figure 12-108. Lining Up Pins on the J1 Connector . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-104
Figure 12-109. Removing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-105
Figure 12-110. Removing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw . . . . . . . . . . . 12-106
Figure 12-111. Disconnecting Signal, Power Cables From the Controller Cards . . 12-107
Figure 12-112. Loosening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-108
Figure 12-113. Removing the Galvanometers Controller Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-108
Figure 12-114. Removing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-109
Figure 12-115. Removing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw . . . . . . . . . . . 12-110
Figure 12-116. Loosening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-110
Figure 12-117. Removing the Galvanometers Controller Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-111
Figure 12-118. X- and Y-Galvanometer Adapter and Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . 12-112
xxii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
Figure 12-119. Replacing the Galvanometers Controller Cards. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-114
Figure 12-120. Tightening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-114
Figure 12-121. Replacing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw . . . . . . . . . . . 12-115
Figure 12-122. Replacing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-115
Figure 12-123. X- and Y-Galvanometer Adapter and Signal Cables . . . . . . . . . . 12-117
Figure 12-124. Lowering the Galvanometers Controller Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-118
Figure 12-125. Tightening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-118
Figure 12-126. Replacing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw . . . . . . . . . . . 12-119
Figure 12-127. Replacing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-119
Figure 12-128. Disconnecting Cables From the Galvanometers Assembly . . . . . . 12-121
Figure 12-129. Removing the Galvanometers Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-122
Figure 12-131. Aligning the Galvanometers Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-125
Figure 12-133. Aligning the Galvanometers Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-128
Figure 12-135. Removing the Vortex Air Ring and Air Manifold. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-130
Figure 12-136. Removing the Three Bolts From the Retaining Ring . . . . . . . . . . 12-131
Figure 12-137. Removing the Securing Screw, Disconnecting Hose and Cable . . . 12-132
Figure 12-138. Removing the Bolts That Secure the Air Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-133
Figure 12-139. Attaching the Bolts That Secure the Air Valve . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-134
Figure 12-140. Connecting the Hose, Cable and Replacing the Retaining Screw . 12-135
Figure 12-141. Replacing the Three Bolts in the Retaining Ring . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-135
Figure 12-142. Replacing the Vortex Air Ring and Air Manifold. . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-136
Figure 12-143. Focal Length LED on the Right and the Left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-138
Figure 12-144. Focal Length LED on the Right and the Left. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-140
Figure 12-145. Removing the Metal Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 12-141
Figure 12-146. Removing the Alignment LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-142
Figure 12-147. Replacing the Alignment LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-143
Figure 12-148. Replacing the Metal Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 12-143
Figure 12-149. Removing the Metal Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 12-144
Figure 12-150. Removing the Alignment LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-145
Figure 12-151. Replacing the Alignment LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-146
Figure 12-152. Replacing the Metal Shroud on the Laser Assembly . . . . . . . . . . 12-146
Figure 12-153. Removing the Beacon Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-147
Figure 12-154. Removing the LED . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-148
A. Software Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Feedback-1
List of Figures xxiii

Document 41195-0510
xxiv Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide
Document 41195-0510
Preface
Introduction
The Lasetec II documentation provides operators, technicians,

and service personnel with complete information about the
Lasetec II. Other documents that describe the Lasetec II that you
can consult include:
• Lasetec II Operation Guide tells line operators how to use and

maintain the Lasetec II.
• Lasetec II Drawing Pack contains system drawings and
schematics that you might need to complete procedures.
• Lasetec II Parts Catalog contains a pictorial parts catalog of
spare and service parts that you might need to maintain and
service your Lasetec II.
Version of the Lasetec II System Software That This Guide

Describes
This guide describes the two versions of the Lasetec II system

software that customers can currently obtain:
• Standard Lasetec II system software, version 2.63.xx.

• Lasetec II system software, version 2.53.xx, which includes
additional bar code feature.
This guide describes features that are available only in these

versions of the Lasetec II system software.
This guide describes:
• New features that might not be available in previous versions.

• Existing features that now work differently than in previous
versions of the Lasetec II system software.
Preface xxv
Document 41195-0510
Software Change History contains the software change history for
the Lasetec II system software.
Topics That This Guide Covers
Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide describes how to install

the 30-watt and 60-watt Lasetec II, associated equipment, and
install and configure the Lasetec II system software.
This guide also tells you how to create and modify product codes
and provides maintenance procedures, troubleshooting sugges-
tions, and service procedures.
Audience of This Guide
This guide is intended for use by Industrial Dynamics/filtec

service personnel or service personnel who have received training
from Industrial Dynamics/filtec who need to install and configure
the Lasetec II.
Conventions That Appear in This Guide
Use the following chart to learn about the typographic conven-

tions that appear in this guide.
This typeface or symbol... Indicates... Example...
abcd1234 A link to another document Lasetec II Operation Guide

or page in the current
document, which, when you
click on it, displays the other
document or the other page.
Important: Important information that

you might find helpful or Important: Repeated laser fault
useful and best practice warnings might indicate that the
suggestions. laser tube is failing and needs
replacement.
Caution: That there is a potential for

damage to the equipment. Caution: Stop the Lasetec II from
Depending on the particular marking containers before you
damage that can result, harm load a backup PCF.
to a person can also occur.
You must stop the Lasetec II to
load a new PCF.
xxvi Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
This typeface or symbol... Indicates... Example...
Warning: That there is a potential for

harm to an individual. As Warning: To avoid serious injury,
harm can be mild or severe, check the focus LEDs only when
strictly observe the the laser is turned off.
information that is provided.
Although the LEDs are low power,
they can still harm your eyes. Do
not look directly into the LEDs.
abcd1234 Emphasis, a definition of a The system always displays the code editing
new concept, or a variable window with all menus and dialog boxes.
for which you provide actual
text. A text product code field is a set of
alphanumeric characters in a product code that
do not change.
+x or -x
abcd1234 Text, including titles, menus, This key toggles between Start Coding and Stop
commands, and other Coding, depending on whether the Lasetec II is
information that you see or idle or marking.
type on a screen.
abcd1234 A best practice to follow, a Best Practice:

note, an example, a range of
values that you can type in a Note:
field on a screen, and a
document to which to refer. Example:
Range:
See Also:
abcd1234 A file name or directory path. The system encrypts and internally stores the
encrypted password that you provide in the
Lasetec II configuration file lasetec.cfg.
Preface xxvii
Document 41195-0510
xxviii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide
Document 41195-0510
1. Safety Information
This chapter describes the safety mechanisms that are supplied

with your equipment and the safe operating procedures when you
use your Industrial Dynamics/filtec equipment.
This chapter also contains safety disclosure information and certi-

fications that are required by the government, or other governing
organizations, and voluntarily provided by Industrial
Dynamics/filtec.
Safety Information 1-1

Document 41195-0510
1.1 Safety Notices and Safety Labels
1.1.1 Introduction
To ensure your safety, Industrial Dynamics/filtec has included

many safety notices and labels within the product documentation
and also within the equipment. Always observe these safety
instructions.
1.1.2 Safety Notices
This documentation contains two types of safety notices: cautions

and warnings. Always observe the safety notices. Cautions and
warnings indicate safety issues as follows:
Warning: A warning indicates that there is a potential for harm

to an individual. As harm can be mild or severe, strictly observe
the information that is provided.
Caution: A caution indicates that there is a potential for

damage to the equipment. Depending on the particular damage
that can result, harm to a person can also occur.
1.1.3 Safety Labels
Industrial Dynamics/filtec equipment contains various safety

labels. These labels are placed at strategic locations to help
ensure your safety. Never remove safety labels from the
equipment.
1-2 Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
1.2 CDRH Class IV Laser Safety Regulations
1.2.1 Description
The Lasetec II is a Class IV Laser System and conforms to all

current Class IV Laser Safety Regulations as described below. You
can upgrade the Lasetec II to an ANSI Class 1 Laser System, once
installed. Reference ANSI Z136-1.
The Lasetec II Laser Code Printer complies with all requirements

of the Radiation Control for Health and Safety Act of 1968. Under
this act, the Food and Drug Administration issued performance
standard (21 CFR 1040.10) for laser products.
This performance standard was developed to protect public

health and safety by requiring laser product manufacturers to
provide the following information to users of the product.
• An indication that the product generates laser

radiation.
• A means to control their exposure to the radiation.
• Adequate warnings of the potential hazard, through
use of product labels and instructions.
For more information, see Lasetec II Safety Features.
Federal regulations require that all laser products manufactured

on or after August 2, 1976 be certified as complying with this
performance standard.
The manufacturer must demonstrate the product's compliance

with the standard prior to certification or introduction into
commerce by furnishing to the Center for Devices and Radio-
logical Health (CDRH) reports pertaining to the radiation safety of
the product and the associated quality control program.
Failure to provide the required reports or product certification is

a violation of Section 360B of the Radiation Control and Health
and Safety Act of 1968.
1.2.2 Lasetec II Safety Features
The Lasetec II Laser Code Printer’s safety features comply with

all CDRH safety regulations and are integrated into the design and
function of the unit.

Document 41195-0510
To prevent exposure to direct or scattered laser radiation,
exercise safe operating practices while using the Lasetec II and
follow all safety precautions that are specified in this guide.
Caution: Do not misuse or modify the Lasetec II or deviate from

the operating procedures that are specified in this guide or you
could be exposed to hazardous, invisible laser radiation or
damage the Lasetec II.
System Enable Key Switch
The key switch enables and disables the main power to the power
supply of the laser. You cannot operate the laser unless the key is
inserted and turned to the on position. You cannot remove the
key when the laser is turned on.
Laser Power Button
You must activate the laser power button to operate the laser. If
input power is disrupted, after a power failure for example, and
then regained while the key switch is turned on or the remote
interlock is engaged, the laser remains disabled. The operator
must press the system enable button to reset the safety
mechanism and restore normal operation.
Remote Interlock Circuit
The remote interlock allows the operator to disable the laser

from a location other than the switch box. This is also used for
door and safety shield interlocks. To reactivate the laser, you
must press the laser power button.
5-Second Safety Delay
There is a 5-second safety delay from the moment you press the
laser power button to the moment the laser safety shutter opens.
No beam is emitted during this time.

Document 41195-0510
Laser Indicator Beacon
This yellow beacon indicates that the laser has power. When you
turn the key switch to the on position and press the laser power
button, the LED illuminates five seconds before laser beam is
enabled.
Warning Labels
Warning labels are placed at appropriate locations to warn the

operator and service personnel of potential hazards. To insure
your safety, understand and comply with all warning labels.
Warning: If you believe your Lasetec II is not working correctly

or any safety features are compromised, do not operate the
unit. Have the unit inspected by qualified service personnel
before operating the unit.
2 2
2
3
1
No. Description
1 Caution hot surface. Do not touch.
2 Danger labels contain various warnings.
3 Product serial number.
Figure 1-1. Lasetec II Warning Labels

Document 41195-0510
1.2.3 Electromagnetic Interference Compliance
The Lasetec II Laser Code Printer complies with Federal Commu-

nications Commission (FCC) and European Union (EU) product
performance requirements that relate to electromagnetic
compatibility (EMC) and product safety characteristics for indus-
trial, scientific, and medical (ISM) equipment. The associated
directives and specific provisions to which compliance is
mandatory for the Lasetec II are identified and described below.
FCC Requirements
The United States Communication Act of 1934 has vested the

Federal Communications Commission (FCC) with the authority to
regulate industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM) equipment that
emit electromagnetic radiation in the radio frequency spectrum.
The purpose of this regulation is to prevent harmful electromag-
netic interference from affecting authorized radio
communication services in the frequency range from 30 MHz to l
GHz.
The FCC regulations which govern ISM equipment are fully

described in Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) 47, Part 18,
Subpart C. The Lasetec II Lasers have demonstrated performance
characteristics that have met or exceeded the requirements of
CFR 47, Part 18, Subpart C.
EU Requirements
The European Union's electromagnetic compliance (EMC)

directive 89/336/EEC is the sole directive that was developed to
address EMI issues in electronic equipment. In particular, the
directive calls out European Norm (EN) documents, which define
the emission and immunity standards for specific product
categories.
The standard EN55011 defines the radiated RF emissions limit for

the lasers that are used in the Lasetec II. The generic standard
EN50082-1 defines immunity requirements that are published by
the International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC). A summary
of EU performance requirements that pertain to the Lasetec II is
included in the following table.

Document 41195-0510
Directive Provision Scope
EN55011 Emitted RF Radiation shall not exceed limits Defines limits and methods for measurement of
described in document CISPRI 12. radio frequency disturbance characteristics for
industrial, scientific, and medical (ISM)
equipment.
EN50082 Immunity to ESD levels that are defined in Generic standard that governs ISM performance
document IEC801, Part 2. Equipment shall as it relates to radiated emissions and ESD
operate normally when exposed to RF emissions sensitivity and immunity to transient bursts.
at levels that are described in document IEC801,
Part 3. Immunity to electrical fast transient
bursts at levels that are defined in document
IEC801, Part 4.
European Compliance (CE) Mark
When a product meets the requirements of all pertinent EU direc-

tives, the product can bear the official compliance mark of the
European Union shown below.
Figure 1-2. Compliance Mark of the European Community
The Lasetec II Laser Code Printer has demonstrated performance

characteristics that have met or exceeded the requirements of
the EMC directive 89/336/EEC.

Document 41195-0510
1.2.4 Declaration of Conformity
The following table contains a sample of the Declaration of

Conformity to certify that EMC performance levels of the Lasetec
II comply with applicable EU directives and standards.
DECLARATION OF CONFORMITY
Applicable EU Directive(s): 89/336/EEC EN60825-1 (EMC Directive) Laser Safety

and Machinery Safety
89/392/EEC
Applicable Standards/Norms EN55011 Radiated, Class A, Group 1
EN50082-1 Generic Immunity:
IEC801-2 Electrostatic Discharge
IEC801-3 RF Radiated
IEC801-4 Fast Transients
Manufacturer Industrial Dynamics

3100 Fujita Street.
Torrance, CA, USA
90505-4007
Product/Model Number Lasetec/Models 10, 25, 30, 50, 60
Serial Number(s) All Numbers
Date of Compliance (mfg.) September 4, 1998
Manufacturing Location Torrance, California, USA
Signature
Full Name Fred L. Calhoun
Date:
Title: President
Industrial Dynamics hereby declares that the equipment specified above conforms to the above
Directive(s) and Standard(s)
Document 37991200
Figure 1-3. Lasetec II Declaration of Conformity

Document 41195-0510
2. Lasetec II Concepts
This chapter explains the basic concepts that you need to under-
stand before you use the Lasetec II.
Lasetec II Concepts 2-1

Document 41195-0510
2.1 Product Code
2.1.1 Definition: Product Code
A product code is a set of alphanumeric or graphical characters

that identifies a manufactured good.
A product code is composed of one or more items, which are

composed of one or more fields.
2.1.2 Definition: Product Code Item
An product code item is a line of alphanumeric or graphical

characters in a product code.
Range: You can specify from one to eight items in a product

code.
2.1.3 Definition: Product Code Field
A product code field is a discrete set of alphanumeric or

graphical characters within an item.
Range: You can specify from one to four fields in an item.
2.1.4 Example: Product Code
Here is an example of a product code.

1
2
No. Description
3
1 Product code, which is
composed of three items
2 Item, which is composed
of two fields
3 Item
Figure 2-1. Product Code

Document 41195-0510
2.2 Product Code Items or Fields
2.2.1 Types of Product Code Items or Fields
At present, there are five types of product code items or fields

that you can create and use.
• Text
• Date and time
• Serial number
• User-defined
• Bar code
2.2.2 Definition: Text Product Code Item or Field
A text product code item or text product code field is a set of

alphanumeric characters in a product code that do not change.
You use the Standard Text Field Dialog Box to create and
modify a text product code item or field.
Range: You can specify from 1 to 40 characters in a text product

code item or field.
2.2.3 Definition: Date and Time Product Code Item or Field
A date and time product code item or date and time product
code field is the date and time that you mark on a container,
typically a manufacturing date, an expiration date, or a time
stamp.
You use the Date/Time Field Dialog Box to create and modify a
date and time product code item or field.
Range: A date and time product code item or field can contain
from 1 to 40 characters.

Document 41195-0510
2.2.4 Elements of a Date and Time Product Code Item or
Field
This chart shows you the possible elements that you can combine
to construct a date and time product code item or field.
To print... Use this Lasetec II Which appears in the mark as...

format...
An ASCII The standard ASCII The actual ASCII character.

character character that you
want Example: To create a date that
includes a dash (-), for example,
08-31-2009, insert the dash where
you want (but outside the square
brackets): [MM]-[DD]-[YYYY].
The same double [DDW-x] A double digit day of the month for
digit day of the the particular day of the current
month for an week (x) that you specify.
entire week
To print the day of Specify...
the month for a...
Monday [DDW-1]
Tuesday [DDW-2]
Wednesday [DDW-3]
Thursday [DDW-4]
Friday [DDW-5]
Saturday [DDW-6]
Sunday [DDW-7]
Example: To mark all containers

that the Lasetec II marks during the
week Sunday, 30 August 2009 to
Saturday, 5 September 2009 with
the double digit day of the month
for Monday of that week, specify
[DDW-1] [MMM] [YYYY].
The Lasetec II subsequently marks

31 Aug 2009 on all containers that it
marks during that week.
A time offset +x or -x The number of numerical time units

(x) from the current time unit that
the Lasetec II calculates
automatically.
Example: To create an offset date

and time product code that marks
the date 90 days in the future,
specify [MM][DD+90][YY].
Best Practice: Use this time offset

format to calculate and mark
expiration dates on containers.

Document 41195-0510
format...
A time offset to [Ox] A time offset to which the Lasetec II

which the has applied an additional time offset
Lasetec II has (x).
applied an
additional Example: To create an expiration
non-printing, date that is 30 days from 6 hours
calculation ago, specify [DD+30][M][YY][OHH-6].
format
The mark does not show the hour,
but the date 30 days ([DD+30]) from
6 hours ago ([OHH-6]).
Best Practice: Use this time offset

format to calculate and mark
expiration dates on containers.
Note: The Lasetec II software scans

for offsets first and then adds the
offset to the date before building
the final mark.
The year [YYYY] All four digits of the current year.
Example: 2009
[YY] The last two digits of the current

year.
Note: In this case, the Lasetec II

pads single digit years with a leading
zero.
Example: 09
[Y] The last digit of the current year.
Example: 9 (for 2009), 0 (for 2010)
The month [MC] A two-letter abbreviation of the

current month, in French Canadian,
according to this chart.
Letters Month
JA Janvier
FE Février
MR Mars
AL Avril
MA Mai
JN Juin
JL Juillet
AU Août
SE Septembre
OC Octobre
NO Novembre
DE Décembre
[MMMM] The complete name of the current

month.
Example: August

Document 41195-0510
format...
[MMM] A three letter abbreviation of the

current month.
Example: Aug
[MM] The double digit current month of

the year.
Example: 08 (for August), 12 (for

December)
[M] The single digit current month of the

year.
Note: The Lasetec II shows two

digits for October, November, and
December.
Example: 5 (for May, 12 (for

December)
[m] A single letter, from A to L

(excluding the letter I, the ninth
letter of the alphabet), that
represents the current month of the
year, according to this chart.
Letter Month
A January
B February
C March
D April
E May
F June
G July
H August
J September
K October
L November
M December
Example: H (for August)
Note: The Lasetec II does not use

the letter I because it is easily
confused with the number one (1).
The week [WW] The double digit current week of the

year.
Example: 03 (for the third week of

the year), 36 (for the 36th week of
the year)

Document 41195-0510
format...
[W] The single digit current week of the

year.

digits for this format after the 9th
week of the year.
Example: 3 (for the third week of

the year), 36 (for the 36th week of
the year)
The day [dddd] The complete name of the current

day of the week.
Example: Monday
[ddd] A three letter abbreviation of the

current day of the week.
Example: Mon
[dd] A single letter, from A to G, that

represents the current day of the
week, according to this chart.
Letter Day
A Sunday
B Monday
C Tuesday
D Wednesday
E Thursday
F Friday
G Saturday
Example: B (for Monday)
[d] The single digit current day of the

week.
Example: 2 (for Monday)
[DD] The double digit current day of the

month.
Example: 08 (for the 8th day of the
month), 15 (for the 15th day of the
month)
[D] The single digit current day of the

month.

digits for this format after the 9th
day of the month.
Example: 8 (for the 8th day of the

month), 15 (for the 15th day of the
month)

Document 41195-0510
format...
[JJJ] The current day of the year,

according to the Julian calendar.
Example: 243 (for the 243rd day of

the year)
Hours [HH] The current hour, in 24 hour format.
Example: 16:38 (for 4:38 pm)
[hh] The current hour, in 12 hour format.
Example: 04:38 (for 4:38 am or 4:38

pm, depending on whether it is early
morning or evening)
[QQ] The current quarter hour, starting

from 12 midnight.
Example: 69 (for the quarter hour

between 5:00 pm and 5:15 pm)
[X] A single letter, from A to Z

(excluding the letters I, the ninth
letter of the alphabet and O, the
fifteenth letter of the alphabet),
that represents the current hour of
the day, according to this chart.
Letter Hour
A 12 midnight
B 1 am
C 2 am
D 3 am
E 4 am
F 5 am
G 6 am
H 7 am
J 8 am
K 9 am
L 10 am
M 11 am
N 12 noon
P 1 pm
Q 2 pm
R 3 pm
S 4 pm
T 5 pm
U 6 pm
V 7 pm
W 8 pm
X 9 pm
Y 10 pm
Z 11 pm
Note: The Lasetec II does not use

the letters I and O because they are
easily confused with the numbers
one (1) and zero (0).

Document 41195-0510
format...
Minutes [mm] The current number of minutes past

the current hour.
Example: 08 (for 8 minutes), 15 (for

15 minutes)
Seconds [s] The current number of seconds past

the current minute.
Example: 08 (for 8 seconds), 15 (for

15 seconds)
2.2.5 Definition: Serial Number Product Code Item or Field
A serial number product code item or serial number product code

field is a series of digits that the Lasetec II marks on a particular
container to uniquely identify it.
You use the Serial Number Field Dialog Box to create and
modify a serial number product code item or field.
2.2.6 Example: Serial Number Product Code Item or Field
Here is an example of a serial number product code item or field.
D7S1V1F1E9999999
Figure 2-2. Example of a Serial Number Product Code Item or

Field
2.2.7 Description of the Serial Number Product Code Item

or Field Example
The serial number product code field that is shown in Figure 2-2
specifies that the Lasetec II is to:
• Mark a 7-digit serial number on containers, starting with serial

number 0000001.
• Increase the serial number that it marks on each container by
1, and
• After it marks the 9,999,999th container, reset the serial
number back to 0000001, and start all over again.

Document 41195-0510
2.2.8 Variables That Make Up a Serial Number Product
Code Item or Field
This chart shows you the possible variables that you can combine
to construct a serial number product code item or field.
Use this variable... To specify the... If you do not specify the variable,
by default, the Lasetec II...
Dn Length, or number of digits (n) that you want to Automatically increases the value of
include in the serial number product code field. the Dn variable to accommodate the
length of the serial number, up to
the value that you specify for the
ending value (En).
Sn Number at which you want the Lasetec II to start Uses the value 0.
incrementing the serial number.
Vn Number by which you want the Lasetec II to Uses the value 1.

increment the serial number.
Note: For the first serial number, the Lasetec II

adds this value (Vn) to the number at which you
want the Lasetec II to start counting (Sn).
You cannot specify a value for Vn that is greater

than the difference between the staring (Sn) and
the ending values (En).
Fn Number of containers that the Lasetec II is to mark Uses the value 1.

with the same serial number before incrementing
the serial number to the next value.
En Number at which you want the Lasetec II to stop Uses either 1 billion or the
incrementing the serial number, roll over to the maximum number of digits that fits
starting value (Sn), and start again. in Dn, whichever comes first.
Important: You do not need to order variables as shown in

Figure 2-2.
Best Practice: Even if you choose not to include a value for one
or more variables, always include values for Sn, Vn, and En.
2.2.9 Definition: User-Defined Product Code Item or Field
A user-defined product code item or user-defined product code

field is a set of alphanumeric characters that you want a Lasetec
II operator to provide, usually on a daily or a regular basis.
You use the User Defined Field Dialog Box to create and modify
a user-defined product code item or field.

Document 41195-0510
Range: You can specify from 1 to 64 characters in a user-defined
product code item or field.
2.2.10 Example: User-Defined Product Code Item or Field
According to company policy, at the beginning of each day,

Lasetec II operators are to provide a new lot number for that
day’s run.
At the beginning of her shift, the Lasetec II operator, using the

Lasetec II system software, specifies the new lot number for that
day’s run.
2.2.11 Definition: Bar Code Product Code Item or Field
A bar code product code item or bar code product code field is an
array of linear, one dimensional parallel vertical bars and spaces
of varying widths or a matrix of two dimensional squares, dots,
hexagons, or other geometric patterns that the Lasetec II marks
on a container.
You use the Barcode field in the Product Code Editor to convert a
text, date and time, serial number, and user-defined product
code item or field to a bar code product code item or field.
Once you convert an item or field to a bar code product code

item or field, you use the Bar Code Type Field Dialog Box to
modify the bar code product code item or field.
A bar code product code item or field represents letters,

numbers, and other common symbols that identify a manufac-
turer and product.
A laser-based machine subsequently scans and interprets a bar

code product code item or field for pricing and inventory.
2.2.12 Example: Bar Code Product Code Item or Field
Here are some examples of a bar code product code item or field.
Figure 2-3. Examples of a Bar Code Product Code Item or Field

Document 41195-0510
2.2.13 Types of Bar Codes That You Can Use
At present, the Lasetec II supports the following symbologies.
• 2D Data Matrix
• Code 128 (all 128 characters)
• Code 128 (subset A)
• Code 128 (subset B)
• Code 128 (subset C)
• Code 39
• EAN 128 digit
• EAN 8 digit
• EAN 13 digit
• EAN 14 digit
• Interleaved 2 of 5
• UPC-A 11 digit
• UPC-E 11 digit

Document 41195-0510
2.3 Product Code File
2.3.1 Definition
A product code file (PCF) is an ASCII text file that the Lasetec II
system uses to store information, settings, and parameters that
define a product code.
The Lasetec II system stores PCFs internally in the main directory

on the Lasetec II system.
2.3.2 Diagram
Here is a sample of the contents of a PCF.
Important: Click on any line in the diagram to display the

complete contents of the PCF.
[header]
version=2.61.15
description=Basic Product Code
pc_width=40
pc_height=11
delay=40
zoom_factor=1000
x_pan=75
y_pan=125
trig_blanking=10
total_count=0
ser_num_count=0
Figure 2-4. Sample Contents of a PCF
2.3.3 Syntax Rules for PCF Names
Follow these naming syntax rules when you save a PCF.
• Ensure that the name you specify for a PCF when you save it
contains only letters, digits, a dash (-), and an underline
character (_), and does not contain spaces.

Document 41195-0510
• Ensure that you specify a unique PCF name. If you specify the
same name for a PCF that already exists on disk, the Lasetec
II system overwrites the PCF on disk without warning.
Important: Only one backup copy is created for each PCF. The
system overwrites this same backup copy every time you save a
PCF.

Document 41195-0510
2.4 Lasetec II Configuration File
2.4.1 Definition
A Lasetec II configuration file is an ASCII text file named

lasetec.cfg that the Lasetec II system uses internally to store
configuration settings, parameters, and other information. You
do not access or edit this file directly.
The Lasetec II system automatically loads the contents of the

configuration file when you start the Lasetec II system.
2.4.2 Diagram
Here is a sample of the contents of a configuration file.
Important: Click on any line in the diagram to display the

complete contents of the configuration file.
Version=2.52.00
[Text]
Password=
PCF_file=ACME
[Laser]
Language=0
LaserType=0
LaserPower=300
LaserFreq=15000
[Delay]
BeginSegment=10
EndSegment=325
InterSegment=75
XSlope=2000
YSlope=2000
XOffset=450
YOffset=450
PwrRampOnOS=100
PwrRampOn=200
PwrRampOffOS=125
PwrRampOff=50
Figure 2-5. Sample Contents of a Configuration File

Document 41195-0510
2.5 Tracking Mode
2.5.1 Types of Tracking Modes
There are three types of tracking modes.
• Dynamic
• Indexed
• Static
2.5.2 Definition: Dynamic Tracking Mode
Dynamic tracking mode is a production processing method in

which the Lasetec II marks each container continuously as each
container passes on a conveyor without stopping.
2.5.3 Definition: Indexed Tracking Mode
Indexed tracking mode is a production processing method in

which the Lasetec II marks each container intermittently as each
container stops at the Lasetec II for a specific period of time.
2.5.4 Definition: Static Tracking Mode
Static tracking mode is a testing environment processing method

in which you manually fire the Lasetec II to mark a sample
container that is stationary on the conveyor.
2.5.5 When to Use Types of Tracking Modes
To configure tracking settings, you need to determine the

tracking mode to use. Use the following chart to learn more
about the tracking modes that you can use.
If you want to mark a container... And you want to mark a... Use this tracking mode... And encoder?
Continuously, without stopping as it Polyethylene terephthalate Dynamic Yes

passes by the Lasetec II. (PET) bottle, carton case,
or bottle label in a labeler
Intermittently, as each container Container in a jog labeler Indexed No

stops at the Lasetec II for a specific
period of time.

Document 41195-0510
If you want to mark a container... And you want to mark a... Use this tracking mode... And encoder?
In a test environment, when you Sample container Static No

want to manually fire the Lasetec II
to mark a sample or when creating
a new product code to see how well
the Lasetec II marks a container.
2.5.6 Flow Chart: How Tracking Modes Work
The following flow chart shows you how dynamic and indexed
modes work from the point at which you turn on the Lasetec II to
the point at which the Lasetec II marks the container with the
product code.
Dynamic Mode Indexed Mode

You turn on the Lasetec II You turn on the Lasetec II
You select the Product Code File (PCF) You select the Product Code File (PCF)
You align the code using alignment and focal dots You align the code using alignment and focal dots
You start coding You start coding
You enable the Lasetec II laser You enable the Lasetec II laser
Lasetec II blocks, ignores trigger using blanking Lasetec II blocks trigger
Verifier verifies the laser output Verifier verifies the laser output
Trigger delay and encoder track the container System tracks container based on number
Code delay offsets when Lasetec II begins marking Lasetec II marks the PCF on the container
Lasetec II marks the PCF on the container
Figure 2-6. How Dynamic and Indexed Modes Work

Document 41195-0510
2.6 Galvanometer Step
2.6.1 Definition
A galvanometer step is the unit of measurement that the Lasetec

II uses to define the position of the laser beam.
If you are using the standard focal lens with a 3.9 inch focal
length that comes with the Lasetec II and the lens is set to the
correct focal length, one galvanometer step equals approxi-
mately 0.0332 millimeters.

Document 41195-0510
2.7 Leading and Trailing Edge
2.7.1 Definition: Leading Edge
A leading edge is, in product flow direction, the beginning of the

surface or first edge on a container that blocks the trigger sensor.
2.7.2 Definition: Trailing Edge
A trailing edge is, in product flow direction, the end of the

surface or final edge on a container that blocks the trigger
sensor.

Document 41195-0510
Document 41195-0510
3. Components of the Lasetec II
This chapter describes the internal and external components that

make up the Lasetec II system.
Components of the Lasetec II 3-1

Document 41195-0510
3.1 Lasetec II Laser
3.1.1 Diagram
The Lasetec II uses a carbon dioxide (CO2) gas-filled laser to

create a single laser beam. The Lasetec II directs this laser beam
at a package or container by using two mirrors that are moved by
high-speed galvanometers.
A high-resolution encoder tracks, and a trigger detects, the

package or container as it passes and the laser beam marks a
code on it by permanently etching its surface.
No. Description 2 3
1 Y-xxis galvanometer
2 X-axis galvanometer
3 Laser
4 Flat-field lens assembly
5 Y-axis
1
6 X-axis
7 Image plane
6 5
Figure 3-1. Beam-Steering Mechanics of the Lasetec II

Document 41195-0510
3.2 Specifications of the Lasetec II
3.2.1 Facts About Speed, Power, and Air
Specifications for the 30-watt and 60-watt Lasetec II are shown in

the following table.
Specification Description
Marking speed The Lasetec II does not have a measurable container rate
due to the variety of package materials, code size, and
number of characters that it can handle.
Power (30 watt) Computer grade 110 VAC (6 amps. 10 max) or 220 VAC (4
amps. 5 max).
Air (30 watt) Clean, dry, compressed air between 60 and 80 pounds per
square inch (p.s.i.) (input) with 18 standard cubic feet
per minute (s.c.f.m.) peak flow rate and 4 to 8 s.c.f.m.
nominal.
Power (60 watt) Computer grade 230 VAC (6 amps. 10 max).
Air (60 watt) Clean, dry, compressed air between 40 and 60 pounds per
square inch (p.s.i.) (input) with 10 standard cubic feet
per minute (s.c.f.m.) peak flow rate and 2 to 6 s.c.f.m.
nominal.
Table 3-1. Facts About Speed, Power, and Air of the Lasetec II

Document 41195-0510
3.3 External Components of the Lasetec II
3.3.1 Diagram
The Lasetec II includes a 30- or 60-watt print head, switch box,

and operator station.
1 2 3
No. Description
1 30-watt print head, which you can mount vertically, horizontally, or at an
angle with a fixed or X-Y adjustable stand (vertical, adjustable stand shown)
3 Switch box
4 Operator station
Figure 3-2. External Components of the Lasetec II

Document 41195-0510
3.4 Print Head
3.4.1 Diagram
The Lasetec II print head includes a 30- or 60-watt laser assembly

and numerous components that are described in detail later in
this chapter.
1 2
No. Description
Figure 3-3. Lasetec II 30-Watt and 60-Watt Print Heads

Document 41195-0510
3.5 Switch Box
3.5.1 Diagram
The Lasetec II switch box is usually located near the print head.
You use the switch box to turn on the Lasetec II system, activate
the laser, and lockout the system.
The switch box has three controls.
1 2
No. Description Purpose

1 Laser power button Activate the laser.
Note: You must turn on the system power

switch and system enable key switch before
you press this button. When you press this
button, the laser emission beacon lights for
five seconds before the laser emits a beam.
2 System enable key switch Enable power to the laser by turning the
key clockwise.
Note: The laser does not operate while the

system enable key switch is turned to the
off position, as shown.
3 Power switch Turn on or turn off the entire Lasetec II
system.
To turn on the Lasetec II system, turn this

switch clockwise. To turn off or lock out the
entire Lasetec II system, turn this switch
counterclockwise, as shown.
Figure 3-4. Switch Box

Document 41195-0510
3.6 Operator Station
3.6.1 Diagram
The operator station has a keypad and a liquid crystal display

(LCD) screen. You use the operator station to monitor and control
how the Lasetec II operates.
6
2
3
7
No. Description
1 Liquid crystal display (LCD) monitor, showing the Lasetec II
Main Menu
2 Escape key and function keys F1 through F12
3 Main keypad, including the keys caps lock, shift, tab, skip1,
skip2, insert, home, page up, ctrl, alt, space, delete, end,
and page down
4 Alternate function key, which, when pressed and held, types
the characters that are shown in yellow above some keys
5 Laser and fault status light emitting diodes (LEDs), which
mimic the laser emission and fault beacons on the print head
6 Back space key
7 Numerical keypad, including the ENTER key
Figure 3-5. Operator Station

Document 41195-0510
3.7 Components of the 30-Watt Lasetec II
3.7.1 Diagram
The 30-watt Lasetec II includes 13 subsystems or components, as

shown in the following diagram.
No. Description No. Description

1 Switch box 7 Marking engine
2 Marking engine power supply 8 30-watt laser assembly
3 Galvanometer power supply 9 Operator station (external)
4 Laser power supply 10 I/O card
5 TX card 11 Encoder (external)
6 PC/104 card 12 Marking trigger (external)
13 Galvanometer
9
2
6
10 11
12
7
1
3
13
8
Figure 3-6. Integration of 30-Watt Lasetec II Components

Document 41195-0510
3.8 Components of the 60-Watt Lasetec II
3.8.1 Diagram
The 60-watt Lasetec II includes 13 subsystems or components, as

shown in the following diagram.
No. Description No. Description

1 1 Switch box 7 Marking engine
2 Marking engine power supply (two in unit) 8 60-watt laser assembly
3 Galvanometer power supply (two in unit) 9 Operator station (external)
4 Laser power supply (two in unit) 10 I/O card
5 TX card 11 Encoder (external)
6 PC/104 card 12 Marking trigger (external)
13 Galvanometer
9
2 2
6
10 11
12
7
3 3
4 4
13
8
Figure 3-7. Integration of 60-Watt Lasetec II Components

Document 41195-0510
3.9 Descriptions of Lasetec II Components
3.9.1 Galvanometer Power Supply
Description
The galvanometer (galvo) power supply is a switching power

supply that converts the AC input voltage into +/-28 VDC for the
galvanometers. An additional AC/DC converter also provides +300
VDC for the laser power supply.
Diagram
Figure 3-8. Galvanometer Power Supply

Document 41195-0510
3.9.2 Marking Engine Power Supply
Description
The marking engine power supply provides +5, +/-15, and +12
VDC to the marking engine. The input voltage from the galva-
nometer power supply to the marking engine power supply is +/-
28VDC.
Diagram
Figure 3-9. Marking Engine Power Supply

Document 41195-0510
3.9.3 Laser Power Supply
Description
The laser power supply provides the power for the laser tube. The
input from the galvanometer power supply is +300 VDC and is
converted to +48VDC for input to the laser.
Diagram
Figure 3-10. Laser Power Supply
3.9.4 TX Card
Description
The transmit (TX) card sits on top of the PC/104 CPU card and
drives the operator station. The TX card is one of the main test
points on the Lasetec II. This card contains 11 test points, as
shown in the diagram, from which you can verify various signals.

Document 41195-0510
Diagram
No. Description
1 30-watt transmit (TX) card
2 60-watt transmit (TX) card
Use this test To verify signals

point... from the...
TP1 Trigger
TP2 Encoder input
TP3 Encoder output
TP4 Pw M out
TP5 Focus diodes
TP6 Watch dog T/O
TP7 Watch dog CLK
TP8 Align diode
TP9 Shutter
TP10 Fault lamp
TP11 Interlock
Figure 3-11. Transmit (TX) Card in 30-Watt, 60-Watt Lasetec II

Document 41195-0510
3.9.5 PC/104 Card
Description
The PC/104 card uses a compact flash card as a permanent

memory device. The CPU, which uses from 32 to 128 Mbytes of
RAM, depending on the Lasetec II model, is cooled by a passive
heat sink and a vortex cooling system.
Diagram
No. Description
1 Top view
2 Bottom view
3 Compact flash card that
contains the Lasetec II system
software
Figure 3-12. PC/104 Card (Model FB-2612)

Document 41195-0510
3.9.6 Marking Engine
Description
The marking engine receives the signal from the trigger and
tracks the product to be marked with the encoder. The marking
engine controls the galvanometer movement and turns the laser
on and off to make the various characters.
Diagram
No. Description
1 Labeled erasable programmable
read-only memory (EPROM),
EMPC1PCB, U6 on which Lasetec
II firmware is loaded
Figure 3-13. Marking Engine

Document 41195-0510
3.9.7 I/O Card
Description
The input/output card supplies input and output terminal blocks

for customer I/O applications.
Diagram
Figure 3-14. I/O Card
3.9.8 Encoder
Description
The high-resolution encoder emits 5000 pulses per revolution and

allows the Lasetec II to track a package or container as it travels
along a conveyor. A minimum of 200 pulses per centimeter of
travel is required for high code quality.
Diagram
Figure 3-15. High-Resolution Encoder

Document 41195-0510
3.9.9 Trigger
Types of Triggers
The Lasetec II uses three types of standard triggers:

through-beam, retro-reflective, and diffuse-reflective.
This type of trigger... Is...
Through-beam A trigger that uses two fiber optic cables and a

photo-amplifier to detect the presence of an object.
This trigger is mounted inside a labeler and detects

the shaft that holds the tulip in place when a bottle
is present.
Retro-reflective A trigger that uses a polarizing reflector to detect

clear, plastic bottles, usually polyethylene
terephthalate (PET) bottles, that are carried on a
straight conveyor.
Diffuse-reflective Mounted directly on the front of the print head.
This trigger has a small spot size. You need to place

it close to the item that you are marking. This
trigger is usually used in soft drink carton and
labeler applications.
Note: You can use other types of triggers, but they are not
standard. For additional information about other types of
triggers, contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec Customer Support.

Document 41195-0510
Diagram
No. Description
1 Through-beam trigger, which attaches to a labeler carousel
2 Retro-reflective trigger with a standard conveyor mount
3 Diffuse-reflective trigger with a labeler turret mount
Figure 3-16. Marking Trigger
3.9.10 Laser Tube and Assembly
Description
A laser tube, which is filled with carbon-dioxide (CO2), emits an

invisible laser beam. The galvanometers, which control the
mirrors, steer this laser beam to etch characters on the product.
Both the 30- and 60-watt laser have a 25,000 hour life. A
compressed-air cooler inside the print head supplies cold, dry air
to a 48-VDC fan, which cools the 30-watt laser. An external
chiller supplies water to cool the 60-watt laser.
A safety shutter at the front of the laser tube opens only when
you activate the Lasetec II.
Types of Laser Tubes
Three types of laser tubes are available.

Document 41195-0510
• Standard 30-watt
• Standard 60-watt
• PET, which is specifically intended for marking a polyethylene
terephthalate (PET) and other containers
Caution: Do not disassemble or modify the laser assembly, as

Industrial Dynamics/filtec aligns it before shipment.
Diagram
Figure 3-17. 30-Watt and PET (Top) and 60-Watt (Bottom) Laser
Assemblies
3.9.11 Galvanometers (Galvos)
Description
The two galvanometers that control the mirrors that reflect and
steer the laser beam onto the product surface are referred to as
the X Galvanometer and Y Galvanometer.

Document 41195-0510
The galvanometer assembly contains two laser verifier cards that
are mounted on top. These laser verifier cards detect laser
energy during the verification process.
Caution: Do not disassemble or modify the galvanometer

assembly, as Industrial Dynamics/filtec aligns it before
shipment.
Diagram
No. Description
2
1 Verifier Card 1
2 Verifier Card 2
Figure 3-18. Galvanometer (Galvo)
3.9.12 Focal Lens
Description
The focal lens, or focal lens, focuses the light beam from the
Lasetec II laser on an area on a container. At present, you can
obtain a 3.9 inch or a 5.9 inch diameter focal lens from Industrial
Dynamics/filtec.
Best Practice: To ensure that you mark containers correctly,

ensure that you set the focal lens to the correct focal length. The
section Configuring Your Lasetec II describes how to focus the
laser.
Note: In some cases, you might need to purposefully misalign

the focus of the focal lens to mark a container effectively, for
example, to mark a carton or a container that uses
laser-sensitive ink (also called magic ink).

Document 41195-0510
Diagram
1
No. Description
1 Focal lens
Figure 3-19. Focal Lens
3.9.13 Fault and Laser Emission Beacons
Description
The red and amber beacons on the top of the Lasetec II print
head provide information about the status of the Lasetec II.
The... Which is... Indicates that...
Laser emission beacon Amber The Lasetec II is ready to fire the

laser.
Notes: You must turn on the power

switch and enable the key switch for
this beacon to light.
When you turn on the Lasetec II, this

beacon lights for five seconds before
the Lasetec II starts.
Fault beacon Red A fault or error has occurred in the

Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
Diagram
No. Description
1 Laser emission beacon
2 Fault beacon
Figure 3-20. Laser Emission and Fault Beacons

Document 41195-0510
3.10 Air Filtration System
3.10.1 Diagram
he air filtration system scrubs and cleans the printing fumes and
airborne materials that the Lasetec II laser produces. An internal
filter within the air filtration system filters the air before it
releases it.
Industrial Dynamics/filtec offers various types and brands of air

filtration units to customers.
Consult the documentation for your air filtration system for

details about how to use your air filtration system with the
Lasetec II.
3 4 5
No. Description
2
1 Air filtration system
2 Alternate air filtration system
3 Change (dirty) filter light
4 Power on light/gauge
5 On/off switch
6 Manual filter clean button
Figure 3-21. Panels of Air Filtration Systems Offered by

Industrial Dynamics

Document 41195-0510
3.11 Chiller
3.11.1 Description
The 60-watt Lasetec II requires a chiller cooling system. The

30-watt Lasetec II uses air cooling only.
Industrial Dynamics/filtec offers various types and brands of

chiller cooling systems to customers.
The chiller, which is provided by a third party, provides precise

temperature control around the laser in the print head. Water or
coolant is chilled and then circulated through the cooling
element that surrounds the laser.
Consult the documentation for your chiller cooling system for

details about how to use your cooler with the Lasetec II.
1
No. Description
1 Chiller cooling system
2 LED display
3 Button that displays temperature
of coolant, icing, internal and
external condenser, and room,
or when pressed with down
button (↓), sets parameters
4 Reset button
5 Button that displays the version
of software or deletes saved
errors, or when pressed with up
button (↑), sets parameters
3
2 4
5
Figure 3-22. Front Panel of a Chiller Offered by Industrial

Dynamics

Document 41195-0510
4. Installing Your Lasetec II
This chapter tells you how to install your Lasetec II. Drawings and
schematics that you might need are available in the Lasetec II
Drawing Pack.
Installing Your Lasetec II 4-1

Document 41195-0510
4.1 Installing Your Lasetec II
4.1.1 Flow Chart
The following flow chart shows you the general steps that you
need to complete to install your Lasetec II.
Determine your type of installation: conveyor or labeler
Install the encoder
Install the trigger
Install the print head
Install the operator station
Install the air controls
Install the switch box
Installing a 60-watt Lasetec II? If yes, install the chiller
Installing a 60-watt Lasetec II? If yes, install the chiller interlock
Wire the trigger signal cable to the print head
Wire the encoder signal cable to the print head
Wire safety interlocks, I/O, and your computer
Wire the operator station to the print head
Wire the switch box to the print head
Wire the facility’s power cable to the switch box
Figure 4-1. Installing Your Lasetec II

Document 41195-0510
4.2 Requirements That You Need to Meet as
You Install Your Lasetec II
4.2.1 Requirements
As you install your Lasetec II, ensure that you:
T Place the print head exactly perpendicular to the conveyor.

Best Practice: Measure the distance from the right and left
front corners of the print head to the conveyor and ensure
that the two distances match.
T Keep the Lasetec II isolated and free from excessive
vibration.
Best Practice: Attach the print head to anything other than
directly to the conveyor or other moving parts, as vibrations
can adversely affect its performance.
T Mount the stand of the print head securely to, and level with,
the floor.
T Attach the conveyor guide rails that are located nearest the
print head so that they guide the surface of each container
that you intend to mark past the Lasetec II at the ideal focal
point distance.
To achieve the ideal focal point, position the print head at
4.25 inches, or 108 millimeters, from the container.
T If you intend to mark various-width containers, use an
adjustable guide rail on the side farthest from the Lasetec II
(always place the Lasetec II on the fixed guide rail side). If
you intend to mark other types of containers, use a fixed
guide rail on both sides.
T Position the far-side guide rail so that each container is
positioned against the near-side guide rail with enough
clearance so that each container can pass by the laser at the
ideal focal point.
Focal point drift tolerance is less than 0.25 inch, or 6
millimeters.
T Keep the ambient temperature of the location in which you
install and use the Lasetec II at or below 113 degrees
Fahrenheit, or 45 degrees Celsius.
T Keep the compressed air that you deliver to the Lasetec II
free from moisture and oil.

Document 41195-0510
4.3 Installing the Encoder, Trigger, and Print
Head
4.3.1 Decision Table
The way that you intend to mark containers at your site deter-
mines the procedures that you follow to install the Lasetec II.
Use the following table to determine the procedures to follow to

successfully install the Lasetec II encoder, trigger, and print
head.
If you intend to mark containers... Go to section...
That travel on a conveyor Installing the Encoder, Trigger, and

Print Head for Use With a Conveyor
Within the labeler unit Installing the Encoder, Trigger, and

Print Head for Use With a Labeler

Document 41195-0510
Head for Use With a Conveyor
4.4.1 Steps: Installing the Encoder
To see how to install the encoder for use with a conveyor, refer
to installation drawing I00484.
Best Practice: Install the encoder so that it is driven by the

sprocket shaft that drives the conveyor chain section where the
Lasetec II is installed. Doing so ensures that the encoder and the
conveyor drive shaft are rotating at the same rate.
4.4.2 Steps: Installing the Trigger
The particular item that you intend to mark determines the

procedures that you follow to install the trigger.

successfully install the trigger.
If you intend to mark... Refer to drawing...
Bottles D37302
Best Practice: Mount the trigger at least 0.039

inches, or 60 millimeters, upstream from the
center line of the focal lens.
Mounting the trigger closer to the center line of

the focal lens prevents the Lasetec II from
completing the laser verification process.
Best Practice: Ensure that the trigger is aligned

with the bottle cap.
Cartons or cases D41250

Best Practice: Mount the trigger to the front of
the print head.
Ensure that the trigger is mounted perpendicularly

to the container, as the container receives the
highest amount of reflection in this position.
4.4.3 Steps: Mounting the Print Head
The particular wattage of the print head that you intend to use
determines the procedures that you follow to install the print
head.

Document 41195-0510
successfully install the print head.
If you intend to install the... Refer to drawing...
30-watt Lasetec II I00768
Best Practices: Follow these best practices when mounting either

the 30- or 60-watt print head:
• Assemble the stand as shown in the drawing, but refrain from

bolting it to the floor until after you align the Lasetec II.
Aligning the Lasetec II is covered later in these procedures.
• Mount the print head precisely. Once you mount the print
head, you can make only limited re-adjustments.
• Ensure that the focal point of the laser is 4.25 inches, or 108
millimeters, from the lens side of the enclosure.

Document 41195-0510
Head for Use With a Labeler
4.5.1 Steps: Installing the Encoder
To see how to install the encoder for use with a labeler, refer to
drawing M40765.
Best Practice: Install the encoder so that it is driven by the shaft

or motor that directly drives the labeler turret. This shaft or
motor is usually located under the turret and inside the base
cabinet of the labeler.
Important: You need a special mounting assembly to install the

encoder.
4.5.2 Steps: Installing the Trigger
To see how to install the trigger for use with a labeler, refer to
drawing D41250.
Best Practice: If you use the through-beam trigger in this config-

uration, position it to trigger off of the labeler piston that
captures the container.
4.5.3 Steps: Mounting the Print Head
The particular wattage of the print head that you intend to use
determines the procedures that you follow to install the print
head.

successfully install the print head.
If you intend to install the... Refer to drawing...

Document 41195-0510
Best Practice: Follow these best practices when mounting either
the 30- or 60-watt print head:
• Use a short mount to mount the Lasetec II on top of the

labeler face plate.
• Assemble the stand as shown in the drawing, but refrain from
bolting it to the floor until after you align the Lasetec II.
Aligning the Lasetec II is covered later in these procedures.
• Mount the print head precisely. Once you mount the print
head, you can make only limited re-adjustments.

Document 41195-0510
4.6 Installing the Operator Station
4.6.1 Steps
Follow these steps to install the operator station.
1. Using the supplied hardware, attach the operator station

mounting bracket to the support pipe or to a location that
you want.
Best Practice: Mount the operator station where the

operator can quickly and easily access it, ideally below the
print head on the support pipe.
2. Slide the operator station onto the operator station

mounting bracket.
No. Description
1 Operator station mounting bracket
attached to the vertical support pipe
2 Operator station that is slid onto the
operator station mounting bracket
Figure 4-2. Installing the Operator Station

Document 41195-0510
4.7 Installing the Air Controls on the
30-Watt Lasetec II
4.7.1 Requirements for Incoming Air From Your Facility to

the Air Controls
When you install the air controls, ensure that incoming air from
your facility’s air supply:
• Is free of contaminants and moisture.

• Is between 60 and 80 pounds per square inch (psi).
• Provides a flow rate that is ideally between 4 and 8 standard
cubic feet per minute (scfm), but is not greater than 18 scfm.
Important: Your actual flow rate might vary slightly according

to ambient temperature and coding speed.
4.7.2 Steps
Follow these steps to install the air controls.
1. Using the supplied hardware, fasten the air controls to the

support pipe or to a location that you want.

Document 41195-0510
Best Practice: Mount the air controls where the operator
can quickly and easily access it, ideally below the switch box
on the support pipe, and near the print head.
No. Description
1 Support pipe
2 Pressure adjustment knob
3 Emergency shut off button
4 Air inlet, 1/4 inch normal
temperature and pressure (NTP)
connector, which you provide
5 Pressure gauge 1
6 Drain (automatic)
2
7 Change/replace indicator
8 Air outlet hose (which connects to
the Lasetec II)
7
3
Figure 4-3. Parts of the Air Controls
2. Attach a hose from your facility’s air supply to the air inlet
by using a 0.25 inch normal temperature and pressure (NTP)
connector.
3. To prevent leaks, cover all fitting threads with fitting

compound.
Caution: Do not use Teflon tape to cover fitting threads.

Document 41195-0510
4. Turn on your facility’s air supply.
5. Set the pressure adjustment to 80 psi, as read on the

pressure gauge.
6. Verify that the air hoses and hose connectors do not leak.

Document 41195-0510
4.8 Installing the Switch Box
4.8.1 Requirements
You must mount the switch box within 6.5 feet, or 2 meters, of
the print head, as required by safety regulations.
4.8.2 Steps
Follow these steps to install the switch box.
1. Using the supplied hardware, attach the switch box to the

support pipe or to a location that you want.
Best Practice: Mount the switch box where the operator can
quickly and easily access it, ideally between the print head
and air controls on the support pipe.
If you choose to mount the switch box in a different

location, mount it far away from the Lasetec II focal lens.
No. Description
1 Support pipe
2 Port for the input power cable from your
facility’s power supply
3 Port for the output power cable that connects
to the print head
2
3
Figure 4-4. Parts of the Switch Box

Document 41195-0510
4.9 Are You Installing a 30- or 60-Watt
Lasetec II?
What you do next depends on whether you are installing a 30- or

a 60-watt Lasetec II.
Use the following table to determine what to do next.
If you are installing a... Go to section...
30-watt Lasetec II Opening the Back Panel
60-watt Lasetec II Installing the 60-Watt Lasetec II

Chiller and Chiller Interlock

Document 41195-0510
4.10 Installing the 60-Watt Lasetec II Chiller
and Chiller Interlock
4.10.1 Steps
hat you do next depends on the model of the chiller that you are
installing for use with your 60-watt Lasetec II.
Use the following table to determine what to do next.
If you are installing the chiller Refer to drawing...

model with part number...
44380 D44382
37400 D39892, D39893, and D40816

Document 41195-0510
4.11 Installing the Air Filtration System
4.11.1 Steps
To install the air filtration system for the Lasetec II, follow these
steps.
1. Ensure that you have the correct fume extract system kit
(D41254 for 120 V and D41255 for 240 V).
2. Mount the shroud to the Lasetec II air vortex manifold

according to drawings M41249 and M44749.
3. Attach the rubber hose (part number 40868) with the clamps
(part number 22135) that are included in the kit to the inlet
tube of the shroud.
4. Route the rubber hose along the Lasetec II enclosure to the

air filtration system.
5. Refer to the air filtration system documentation to complete

setting up and installing your air filtration system.

Document 41195-0510
4.12 Opening the Back Panel
4.12.1 Diagram: Back Panel of the 30-Watt Lasetec II
The back panel of the 30-watt Lasetec II print head contains

many liquid-resistant squeeze fittings through which you route
the various cables from external components.
When connecting cables to the 30-watt Lasetec II, refer to this

illustration to select the correct port.
1
No. Description
1 Fitting for the bulkhead connection from 2
the air controls
2 Fitting for the input cable from the 3
switch box
3 Fitting for the signal cable from the
operator station 4
4 Fitting for the serial communication
cable
5 Fitting for the customer I/O
5
interlocks
encoder
trigger
6 7 8
Figure 4-5. Back Panel of the 30-Watt Lasetec II

Document 41195-0510
4.12.2 Diagram: Back Panel of the 60-Watt Lasetec II
The back panel of the 60-watt Lasetec II print head contains

many liquid-resistant squeeze fittings through which you route
the various cables from external components.
When connecting cables to the 60-watt Lasetec II, refer to this

illustration to select the correct port.
No. Description
1
1 Fitting for the output to the chiller
2 Fitting for the cable from the switch
2
box
3
operator station
4 Fitting for the serial communication 4
cable or customer I/O
5 Fitting for the cable to the chiller 5
interlocks 6
7 Fitting for the bulkhead connection
from the air controls
7
8 Fitting for the cable from the chiller
9 Conduit 8
10 Fitting for the output from the
chiller 9
encoder
trigger
13 Conduit
10 11 12 13

Document 41195-0510
4.13 Opening the Back Panel of the Print
Head
4.13.1 Steps
Follow these steps to open the back panel of your Lasetec II.
1. WIth a flat-head screwdriver, unlock the screws on the top

cover of the print head.
2. Remove the cover.
3. With a flat-head screwdriver, unscrew the screws on the

back panel.
4. Pull the back panel from the print head, as shown below.
No. Description
1 I/O card on the
30-watt and 60-watt
Lasetec II
2 30-watt Lasetec II
back panel
back panel (top)
4
4 TB1 on the I/O card
for the trigger
connection
(obscured in the 1
picture of the
60-watt back
panel) 2 3
Figure 4-7. Opened Back Panel of a Lasetec II, Showing the I/O
Card
Caution: Do not connect AC power to the TB1 terminal on the

I/O card.
Use the TB1 terminal that is located on the I/O card for trigger
connections only.

Document 41195-0510
4.14 Wiring Cables
4.14.1 Steps
You generally follow the same set of steps to wire cables from
each external component to the print head. These steps show you
how.
1. Ensure that the back panel of your Lasetec II is open and

accessible.
1. Remove the squeeze fitting retaining nut from the squeeze

fitting for the particular external component that you want.
2. Route the signal cable from the external component through

the squeeze fitting on the back panel to the inside area of
the print head.
Best Practice: Route the cable so that it does not create a

tripping or snagging hazard.
3. Slide the squeeze fitting retaining nut back into place on the
back panel.
Best Practice: For now, leave the squeeze fitting loose so

that the cable moves freely. When you later finish wiring,
you can tighten the squeeze fitting to seal out moisture and
secure the cable.
4. Determine the length of cable that you need.
Best Practice: After you determine the correct length that

you need, leave an additional six inches for stripping both
the outer sheath and the inside wires.
5. Trim any excess cable, but leave enough so that you can
satisfactorily replace the back panel and adjust the height
of the print head, if necessary.
6. Strip six inches from the outer sheath of the cable and 0.25
inches from the sheath of each wire inside.
7. Connect the cable as described in the procedures that are

presented later in this chapter.

Document 41195-0510
4.15 Wiring the Trigger to the Print Head
4.15.1 Steps
All types of triggers use the same terminal connection points.

Follow these steps to wire the trigger to the print head.
1. Follow the steps that are presented in Wiring Cables for the
trigger.

I/O card.
In some earlier models of the Lasetec II, two TB1 terminals are
available inside the print head: one on the I/O card and another
on the galvanometer power supply.
connections only.
2. Connect the trigger signal wires to the I/O card according to

the following chart.
Wire Terminal
+12V TB1-1
Signal TB1-2
Common TB1-3
To see how to wire the trigger to the print head in more

detail, refer to sheet two of drawing D40916.

Document 41195-0510
4.16 Wiring the Encoder to the Print Head
4.16.1 Steps
Follow these steps to wire the encoder signal cable to the print
head.
encoder.
2. Connect the encoder signal wires to the I/O card according

to the following chart.
Wire Terminal
+12V (brown) TB2-1
Enc. 1 (black) TB2-2
Enc. 2 (white) TB2-3
Shield/GND (blue) TB2-4
To see how to wire the encoder to the print head in more

detail, refer to sheet two of drawing D40916 and I00484.

Document 41195-0510
4.17 Wiring the Safety Interlocks
4.17.1 Steps
Ensure the safety of your facility’s personnel who work in or near

the area where the laser is located by connecting the safety
interlocks (see CDRH Class IV Laser Safety Regulations).
interlocks.
2. To wire the safety interlocks, connect the TB3-1 and TB3-2

terminals on the I/O card to your facility’s interlocks.
Best Practice: Ensure that the connections are dry contacts.

Also ensure that the connections satisfactorily enable your
facility’s interlocks to disable the Lasetec II.
To see how to wire the safety interlocks in more detail,

refer to sheet one of drawing D40916.

Document 41195-0510
4.18 Wiring the Customer I/O
4.18.1 Types of Customer Input/Outputs
The Lasetec II generates the following customer inputs and

outputs:
• LASER READY
• FAULT (FAULT NOT) or REJECT (REJECT NOT)
• GOOD MK
4.18.2 Description
The LASER READY, FAULT (NOT FAULT), and GOOD MK signals are
open collector outputs (that is, they must be pulled high with a
500 ohm to 1 kiloohm resistor, from 5 to 24 VDC, and a maximum
of 1 amp current) and active on/conducting.

Document 41195-0510
The types of customer I/O are described in the following table.
Lasetec II generates When...

this signal...
LASER READY The output circuit is closed, the Lasetec II is ready to mark containers, and no
high-priority faults exist.
FAULT (FAULT NOT) The REJECT NOT signal deactivates and one of the following conditions occurs.
REJECT (REJECT NOT)
This condition... Occurs when...
Verifier failure The Lasetec II executes an internal systems function test
before marking a container and the sensor fails to return a
signal.
The test that the Lasetec II performs before each marking

steers the laser to a verifier sensor and then fires the laser
at the sensor. This test verifies the functionality of several
components and detects most internal failures.
No time to complete a The line speed increases beyond the speed at which the
mark system is calibrated and the Lasetec II has insufficient
time to complete the marking of a container.
Test fire You use the test fire function to troubleshoot a problem
and the function interferes with the marking of a
container.
This condition occurs only under unique circumstances.

In master/slave operation, Two Lasetec II products are configured as master and slave
a time code communication and are synchronized to mark identical time codes on
failure multiple products or at more than one location on the
same product, and the slave Lasetec II fails to receive the
time code from the master Lasetec II.
The laser shutter closes for An operator presses the power button on the Lasetec II
five seconds and it turns on.
The five second delay is required by
Notes: This signal is an inverted state (NOT). This signal is on when no code failure exists
and off when any code failure conditions occur during an amount of time that you specify,
at a distance from the center of the focal lens that you specify.
FAULT/REJECT and GOOD MK are mutually exclusive, that is, neither occur together and
one or the other occur for all triggered containers.
GOOD MK The Lasetec II successfully completed the marking (MK) of a container by turning on at a
designated distance from the lens and then turning off at the end of the reject delay.
This signal typically serves as a counter signal.
Note: FAULT/REJECT and GOOD MK are mutually exclusive, that is, neither occur together
and one or the other occur for all triggered containers.
Important: To detect all faults, monitor both the LASER READY

and FAULT (FAULT NOT) signals.

Document 41195-0510
4.18.3 Steps
Follow these steps to wire the customer I/O.
customer I/O.
2. To see how to wire the customer I/O, refer to sheets one

and two of drawing D40916.

Document 41195-0510
4.19 Wiring Another Lasetec II to Your
Lasetec II
4.19.1 Steps
To use another Lasetec II with your Lasetec II in a master and

slave configuration, you connect a standard RS-232 cable to the
COM2 port at the TB6 terminal on the I/O card.
serial cable to your computer.
2. On both Lasetec II systems, connect the ends of the RS-232

cable wires to the I/O card according to the following chart.
Signal Terminal
RX TB6-1
TX TB6-2
GND TB6-3
See Also: To learn how to wire a computer to your Lasetec II

in more detail, refer to drawing D40916.

Document 41195-0510
4.20 Connecting a Host Computer System to
Your Lasetec II
4.20.1 Steps
To connect a host computer system to your Lasetec II, you

connect an RS-232 DB9 cable to the Lasetec II system’s DB9 COM1
connector, which is connected to the I/O card.
Best Practice: To prevent noise, use the highest quality cabling

that you can obtain between your host system and the Lasetec
II.

Document 41195-0510
4.21 Wiring the Operator Station to the Print
Head
4.21.1 Steps
Follow these instructions to wire the operator station to the print

head.
1. Ensure that the operator station is hanging on its mounting

bracket.
operator station.
3. Connect the operator station signal cable to connector J3 on

the TX card.
1 No. Description 2
1 Connector J3 for operator station
signal cable on the 30-watt Lasetec II
signal cable on the 60-watt Lasetec II
Figure 4-8. Connector J3 on the TX Card for the Operator

Station Cable
4. Remove the ground wire from the marker engine.

Document 41195-0510
5. Connect the ground wire to the double connector on the
operator station signal cable ground wire.
6. Connect the operator station signal cable ground wire to the

marker engine, as shown below.
3
No. Description
1 Marker engine 2
2 Removed and connected ground
wire
3 Ground wire from the signal cable
connected to the marker engine
1
Figure 4-9. Operator Station Ground Wire Connected to the

Marker Engine

Document 41195-0510
4.22 Wiring the Switch Box to the Print Head
4.22.1 Steps
Follow these steps to wire the switch box to the print head.
switch box.
2. On the galvanometer power supply card, find and pull off

the AC1 terminal plug.

I/O card.
In some earlier models of the Lasetec II, two TB1 terminals are
available inside the print head: one on the I/O card and another
on the galvanometer power supply.
connections only.

Document 41195-0510
Pulling off the AC1 terminal plug enables you to connect the
wires more easily.
Figure 4-10. Pulling off the AC1 Terminal Plug
3. On the galvanometer power supply, connect wires to the

AC1 terminal plug, according to the following chart.
Wire Terminal
Line (brown) (110V or 220V) TB1-1 (galvanometer power

supply)
Neutral (blue) TB1-2 (galvanometer power

supply)
Ground (green and yellow) TB1-3 (galvanometer power

supply)
To see how to connect the wires in more detail, refer to

drawing D40916.
4. Are you installing a 60-watt Lasetec II?

Document 41195-0510
If yes, for the second galvanometer power supply card,
repeat step 2 and step 3.
If no, go to the next step.
5. On the I/O card, connect the remaining wires to the TB4

terminal, according to the following chart.
Wire: Connection:
+12V (red) TB4-1 (I/O Card)
Key Switch (orange) TB4-2 (I/O Card)
Enable Button (yellow) TB4-3 (I/O Card)

Document 41195-0510
4.23 Closing the Back Panel of the Print Head
4.23.1 Steps
Once you’ve connected all cables and you’re satisfied with the
length of all cables, you are ready to close and lock the back
panel.
1. Verify that all connections are correct and secure.
2. Replace the back panel and, with a flat-head screwdriver,

securely tighten all screws.
3. To seal out moisture and secure all cables, tighten all

squeeze fittings.
4. Did you remove any plugs from any fittings that you did not
use?
If yes, replace the plugs.

5. Replace the print head cover and securely tighten the

screws.

Document 41195-0510
4.24 Wiring Your Facility’s Power to the
Switch Box
4.24.1 Steps
Follow these steps to wire your facility’s power to the switch box.
1. Verify that the main power switch on the switch box is

turned off.
2. Verify that the power cable that you intend to use to deliver
power to the Lasetec II is unplugged.
Warning: Failure to take proper electrical safety precautions

and turn off all power can result in serious injury or death from
electrocution.
3. Route your facility’s main power cable into the switch box
through one of the squeeze fittings at the bottom.
4. Connect the power cable wires to the connections according

to the wiring diagram that is located inside the switch box.
1
2
No. Description 3
1 Wiring diagram
2 Available squeeze fitting
3 PE ground to ground screw
4 Line 120/240 VAC, 50/60 Hz to
Point 6
5 Neutral to point N
4
Figure 4-11. Attaching Your Facility’s Power to the Switch Box

Document 41195-0510
5. Verify that all connections are correct and secure.
6. To seal out moisture and secure the power cable, tighten

the squeeze fitting for the power cable.
7. Ensure that power is turned on at the outlet to which you

intend to plug in the Lasetec II.
Caution: Failure to turn on power before you turn on the main

power switch of the Lasetec II can damage the equipment.
8. Plug in the Lasetec II power cable.
9. Turn on the power switch that is located on the switch box.
10. Did your Lasetec II turn on?
If yes, go to the next section Aligning the Print Head.

If no, repeat the steps in this section starting at step 1.
If, after trying to turn on your Lasetec II a second time, it

refuses to turn on, go to Troubleshooting.

Document 41195-0510
5. How the Lasetec II
Communicates
This chapter describes how two or more Lasetec II systems that

you have set up in a master and slave configuration communicate
with one another and how the Lasetec II communicates as a client
with a host computer system.
This chapter also provides information about a remote-control

user interface program that Industrial Dynamics/filtec can
provide that enables you to control the Lasetec II from a host
computer system.
How the Lasetec II Communicates 5-1

Document 41195-0510
5.1 Port Parameters That the Lasetec II
Uses
5.1.1 Chart
Use this chart to determine the port parameters that the Lasetec
II uses when you select a particular baud rate.
If you select this baud rate... The Lasetec II uses this...
Parity Data bits Stop bits
9600 Even 8 1
19,200 Even 8 1
38,400 Even 8 1
57,600 Even 8 1
115,200 Even 8 1

Document 41195-0510
5.2 Ways to Configure Communication on
the Lasetec II
You can set up and configure communication on the Lasetec II in

the following ways.
If you want to use your Lasetec II as a... Then set up and configure the Lasetec II as a...
Stand-alone system Single system to which a human operator provides all coding
information.
Master system that controls another Master system, which:

Lasetec II
• Uses the Lasetec II system software to control the slave Lasetec
II system
• Marks the same product code on the same type of containers as

the slave Lasetec II system
• Uses the same product code file (PCF) as the slave Lasetec II
system
• Uses the same serial port configuration as the slave Lasetec II
system
Slave system that is controlled by Slave system, which:

another Lasetec II system
the master Lasetec II system
• Uses the same product code file (PCF) as the master Lasetec II
system
• Uses the same serial port configuration as the master Lasetec II

system
System that is controlled by a remote Host Port system, which receives selected commands and
computer information from an external host computer system through the host
port.
Both a master system and a Lasetec II Master/w Host system, which receives selected commands and
system that is controlled by a remote information from an external host computer system through the host
computer or another Lasetec II port, and:
• Uses the Lasetec II system software to control a slave Lasetec II

system

the slave Lasetec II system
• Uses the same product code file (PCF) as the slave Lasetec II
system
• Uses the same serial port configuration as the slave Lasetec II

system
Note: In this type of configuration, the communication path is host

to master, master to slave.

Document 41195-0510
5.3 Command Messages
5.3.1 Definition: Command Message
A command message is a series of ASCII characters that a master

Lasetec II or a host system transmits to one or more Lasetec II
systems to instruct that Lasetec II system to complete a
particular task.
5.3.2 Examples: Command Message
A command message is issued when:
• You enter a command from a host system that instructs the

Lasetec II to start marking containers.
• A master Lasetec II instructs a slave Lasetec II to select and
use a particular PCF.
5.3.3 Types of Command Messages
Use this chart to learn more about the types of command

messages that you can use.
When you use the... The Lasetec II uses...
Master/Slave port on a Enhanced Command Messages to coordinate

Lasetec II the transmission and execution of commands
and thus the marking of containers among one
or more Lasetec II systems that you have set
up as a master and a slave.
Host port on a Lasetec II Either Standard Command Messages or

Enhanced Command Messages to coordinate
the execution of commands that are received
from a host system.
Best Practice: If signal integrity to or from

your Lasetec II is suspect, use enhanced
command messages, as they incorporate a
checksum error checking capability.
If signal integrity is not an issue and the speed

of communications is important, for example,
if you need to update data on every container
that the Lasetec II marks, use standard
command messages.

Document 41195-0510
5.4 What Happens When You Issue a
Standard Command Message
5.4.1 Description
When the Lasetec II successfully receives a standard command

message, the Lasetec II transmits an ASCII acknowledge character
(ACK) to the host system. This ASCII acknowledge character
indicates that the Lasetec II successfully received the message.
If the Lasetec II receives a corrupted or unrecognizable command

message from the host system, the Lasetec II transmits a negative
acknowledge character to the host system. This ASCII negative
acknowledge character (NAK) indicates that an error occurred
during transmission.
If the host system receives a negative acknowledge character,

under normal conditions, it retransmits the command message.
Best Practice: Ideally, the host system needs to retransmit the

command message only once or twice.
Important: In some cases, the Lasetec II might fail to detect

transmission errors.
For example, if the user-defined product code field text
becomes corrupted, the Lasetec II cannot detect it using
standard command messages. If you are concerned about
corruption, use enhanced command messages instead.

Document 41195-0510
5.5 Standard Command Messages
5.5.1 List
You use standard command messages to:
• Start marking containers

• Stop marking containers
• Specify text to be used in a user-defined product code field
• Select and use a PCF to mark containers
• Clear all error conditions
• Get the current status of a Lasetec II system
5.5.2 Purpose
A standard command message is more efficient than an enhanced

command message. The Lasetec II system software checks for
errors in an enhanced command message.
The Lasetec II does not check for errors in a standard command

message but uses fewer than half the number of characters that
the issuing system transmits in each message.
Use standard command messages when you don’t need error

checking.

Document 41195-0510
5.5.3 Diagram
Here is a diagram of a standard command message that shows and

describes its major components.
^b x command-info CR
This component... Is...

^b An actual ASCII control code character, STX (ctrl-b),
which appears at, and indicates, the beginning of all
standard command messages.
x A variable that represents one of the following actual
ASCII characters, each of which specifies the command
to be executed:
• | (pipe or vertical bar)

• @ (ampersand)
• [ (left angle bracket)
• ! (exclamation point)
• ? (question mark)
command-info A variable that represents additional information that
the Lasetec II needs to execute the particular standard
command (x).
Not all commands require command-info.

CR An actual ASCII control code character, CR, or carriage
return, which appears at, and indicates, the end of all
standard command messages.
5.5.4 Applications of Standard Command Messages
Use this table to learn purpose of a standard command message.
Command... Tells the... And is formatted as follows...
ACK Host that the

receiving
Lasetec II ACK ASCII character format
received a valid
command
message 6 Decimal format
6 Hexadecimal format
ASCII Decimal Hexadecimal Description

ACK 6 6 Acknowledge character

Document 41195-0510
NAK Host that the

receiving
Lasetec II NAK ASCII character format
received an
invalid or
unrecognized
command
21 Decimal format
message
15 Hexadecimal format

NAK 21 15 Negative acknowledge
character
|+ Receiving
Lasetec II to
start marking ^b | + CR ASCII character format
containers
2 124 43 13 Decimal format
02 7c 2b 0d Hexadecimal format

^b (ctrl-b) 2 02 Start-of-message identifier
| (pipe, vertical bar) 124 7c Command identifier code
+ (plus sign) 43 2b Start marking command
CR (carriage return) 13 0d End-of-message identifier
^b Receiving
Lasetec II to
start marking ^b ^b CR ASCII character format
containers
(alternative to
preceding
command)
2 2 13 Decimal format
02 02 0d Hexadecimal format

^b (ctrl-b) 2 02 Start marking command

Document 41195-0510
|- Receiving
Lasetec II to
stop marking ^b | - CR ASCII character format
containers
2 124 45 13 Decimal format
02 7c 2d 0d Hexadecimal format

| (pipe, vertical bar) 124 7c Command identifier code
- (minus sign) 45 2d Stop marking command
^c Receiving
Lasetec II to
stop marking ^b ^c CR ASCII character format
containers
(alternative to
preceding
command)

^c (ctrl-c) 2 02 Stop marking command

Document 41195-0510
@#... Receiving
Lasetec II the
text that it is to ^b @ # text CR ASCII character format
use in a user-
defined product
code field 2 64 # 116101120116 13 Decimal format
(numbered
user-defined
field syntax)
02 40 # 74657874 0d Hexadecimal format

^b (ctrl-b) 2 02 Start-of-messag
e identifier
@ (ampersand) 64 40 Command
identifier code
#, which #, which #, which represents Number of the
represents a represents a a hexadecimal first to ninth
number from 1 decimal number number from user-defined
through 9 from decimal 49 hexadecimal 31 field in the
through 57 through 39 product code in
which you want
to insert text, in
the order that
each field was
created
text 116101120116, 74657874, which Actual text that
which represents represents the you want the
the actual text, in actual text, in Lasetec II to
decimal format hexadecimal insert in the
format user-defined
product code
field
CR (carriage 13 0d End-of-message
return) identifier
Important: If you provide text for a user-defined product

code field that does not conform to the format that the field
requires, the Lasetec II ignores the text that you provide.
For example, if you provide a six-digit serial number for a
serial number field that requires five digits, the Lasetec II
ignores the six-digit serial number that you provide.

Document 41195-0510
@[...]... Receiving
Lasetec II the
text that it is to ^b @ [ udf ] text CR ASCII character
format
use in a user-
defined product
code field 2 64 91117100102 93 116101120116 13 Decimal format
(named
user-defined
field syntax)
02 40 5b 756466 5d 74657874 0d Hexadecimal form

^b (ctrl-b) 2 02 Start-of-message
identifier
@ (ampersand) 64 40 Command
identifier code
[ (left square 91 5b Named user-
bracket) defined field
start identifier
udf, which 117100102, which 756466, which Name that is
represents a represents the represents the assigned to the
name that is actual text, in actual text, in user-defined
assigned to a decimal format hexadecimal field in the
user-defined field format product code in
which you want
to insert text
] (right square 93 5d Named user-
bracket) defined field
finish identifier
text 116101120116, 74657874, which Actual text that
which represents represents the you want the
the actual text, in actual text, in Lasetec II to
decimal format hexadecimal insert in the
format user-defined
product code
field
CR (carriage 13 0d End-of-message
return) identifier
Important: If you provide text for a user-defined product code

field that does not conform to the format that the field
requires, the Lasetec II ignores the text that you provide.
For example, if you provide a six-digit serial number for a
serial number field that requires five digits, the Lasetec II
ignores the six-digit serial number that you provide.

Document 41195-0510
[... Receiving
Lasetec II the
name of the ^b [ filename CR ASCII character forma
PCF to use to
mark containers
2 91 10210510810111097109101 13 Decimal format
02 5b 66696c656e616d65 0d Hexadecimal format

^b (ctrl-b) 2 02 Start-of-
message
identifier
[ (left 91 5b Command
square identifier
bracket) code
filename 10210510810111097109101, 66696c656e616d65, Actual name
which represents the actual which represents of the PCF
name of the PCF that you the actual name of that you
want to use, which includes the PCF that you want to
up to eight characters and want to use, which select, which
excludes the period and includes up to is located in
extension, as the Lasetec II eight characters the Lasetec II
system software appends and excludes the system’s
the period and extension period and home
automatically. extension, as the directory
Lasetec II system with the
software appends other PCFs
the period and
extension
automatically.
CR (carriage 13 0d End-of-
return) message
identifier
Important: Alternatively, instead of left bracket ([), you can

specify ^a (ctrl-a), which is 1 in decimal and 01 in hexadecima

Document 41195-0510
! Receiving
Lasetec II to
clear all error ^b ! CR ASCII character format
conditions

identifier
! (exclamation 33 21 Command identifier
point) code
CR (carriage return) 13 0d End-of-message
identifier
? Receiving
Lasetec II to get
and return its ^b ? CR ASCII character format
current status
02 3f 0d Hexadecimal format

identifier
? (question mark) 63 3f Command
identifier code
CR (carriage return) 13 0d End-of-message
identifier
Important: If the Lasetec II is ready to mark containers, it

responds by returning an ASCII acknowledge character (ACK).
If the Lasetec II is not ready to mark containers, it responds by
returning an ASCII negative acknowledge character (NAK).

Document 41195-0510
5.6 What Happens When a Lasetec II Issues
an Enhanced Command Message
5.6.1 Description
Important: A master and a slave Lasetec II system always use

only enhanced command messages to communicate. A Lasetec
II and a host system can also use enhanced command messages
to communicate.
This section describes the transmission of enhanced command
messages between a master and slave Lasetec II as well as
between a Lasetec II and host system.
A sender begins communication by transmitting a command

message to a Lasetec II.
The Lasetec II aborts all active message processing and receives

and processes the new command message upon receiving the
start of message character (a colon, or :).
When the Lasetec II receives a complete transmission that does

not require the transfer of data, it transmits an acknowledge
command response to the sender. When the Lasetec II receives a
complete transmission that requires the transfer of data, it
responds with the received command followed by the data that
the sender requested.
If the Lasetec II receives a corrupted or unrecognizable command

message from the sender, for example if checksum values do not
match, the Lasetec II transmits a negative acknowledge command
to the sender. This negative acknowledge response indicates that
an error occurred during transmission.
The sender then resends the command message.

Document 41195-0510
5.7 Enhanced Command Messages
5.7.1 List
The Lasetec II uses enhanced command messages to:
• Determine the cause of a negative acknowledgement (NAK)

• Synchronize the time between two or more Lasetec II systems
• Select and use a PCF
• Start marking containers or packages
• Stop marking containers or packages
• Specify text to be used in a user-defined product code field
• Clear all error conditions
• Obtain the current status of a Lasetec II system
5.7.2 Purpose
The Lasetec II system software checks for errors in an enhanced

command message.
The Lasetec II system does not check for errors in a standard

command message but uses fewer than half the number of
characters that the issuing system transmits in each message. Use
enhanced command messages when you need error checking.
5.7.3 How the Lasetec II Represents Enhanced Command

Messages Internally
To represent data in ASCII hexadecimal format, the Lasetec II

converts individual byte values into their equivalent ASCII
hexadecimal characters. The two resulting ASCII hexadecimal
characters thus represent the upper nibble and lower nibble of
the original byte of data.
For example, the Lasetec II converts the byte value 2a into two
bytes 32 + 41 in hexadecimal format, which translates into ASCII
characters 2 + A or 2A.
Important: The maximum capacity of the data portion of an

enhanced command message is 408 bytes.

Document 41195-0510
5.7.4 Diagram
Here is a diagram of an enhanced command message that shows

and describes its major components.
Important: When sending the byte count and checksum values,

the Lasetec II sends the most significant byte first and least
significant byte second.
: 01 0008 05 5b534e5d313233 01fd

Figure 5-1. Enhanced Command Message
This component... Is...

: An actual colon (:), which appears at, and indicates, the beginning of all enhanced
command messages.
01 A destination address, in ASCII hexadecimal format, that identifies the Lasetec II system
that is to receive the message, or, if the Lasetec II is responding, the Lasetec II that is
sending the response. At present, the Lasetec II system ignores this address value.
0008 The number of bytes that make up the command and data components of the command
message (05 and 5b534e5d313233).
Important: This byte count represents the raw, or unconverted, number

of bytes and not the number of ASCII hexadecimal bytes. This value is
half the number of ASCII bytes in the command and data components of
the command message (05 and 5b534e5d313233).
The value in this component represents a 16-bit value.
When sending the byte count and checksum values, the Lasetec II sends
the most significant byte first and least significant byte second.
05 A byte that represents the command that the slave Lasetec II is to execute, in this case, (05)
insert user-defined product code text in the named user-defined field in a product code.
See Also: Enhanced Command Codes.

5b534e5d313233 Additional data that the slave Lasetec II needs to execute the command that precedes the
data.
This component varies in length. If a command doesn’t require additional data, the Lasetec
II omits this component and appends the checksum component immediately after the
command component.
01fd A checksum value, which ensures that the Lasetec II transmits an enhanced command
message correctly.
The Lasetec II system computes the checksum by adding the binary byte values of the
destination, byte count, command, and data portions in a command.

Document 41195-0510
5.8 Enhanced Command Codes
5.8.1 Applications of Enhanced Command Codes
Use this table to determine the purpose of each command code

that the Lasetec II includes in an enhanced command message.
Important: The command code bytes appear in the command

component of an enhanced command message.
Command... Tells the... Example...

E1 or 42 Master Lasetec II or host whether the slave Lasetec II
successfully receives a command message. : 01 0001 e1 00e4
If a slave Lasetec II successfully receives a command The slave Lasetec II transmits this
message from the master, the slave places the command positive acknowledge command to
code E1 in the command component of the response. The the sender to indicate that the
E1 command code represents the positive acknowledge command message that the sender
response for enhanced command messages. previously transmitted contained a
valid command code.
If the slave Lasetec II does not successfully receive a
command message from the master, the slave places the
command code 42 in the command component, which : 01 0002 42 49 008e
represents a negative acknowledge command.
The slave Lasetec II transmits this
The slave Lasetec II then places a single byte of data after negative acknowledge command to
the command code 42 that indicates the possible cause of the sender to indicate that the
the error, according to the following chart. command message that the sender
previously transmitted contained an
C C B B I I R R invalid command code.
If bytes... Are... Then...

CC 10 The computed checksum does
not match the checksum that the
Lasetec II or host system
transmits in the data block.
01 The computed checksum
matches the checksum that the
Lasetec II or host system
transmits in the data block.
BB 10 The device is busy and the
Lasetec II ignores the command.
01 The Lasetec II processes the
command.
II 10 The command message contains
an invalid command code.
01 The command message contains
a valid command code.
RR 01 In either case, the Lasetec II
ignores these bytes, as they are
10 reserved for future use.

Document 41195-0510
Command... Tells the... Example...
00 Slave Lasetec II to synchronize the clock on the slave
Lasetec II with the clock on the master Lasetec II so that : 01 0005 00 4a9bad30 01c8
together, they mark exactly the same date and time on
containers. The master Lasetec II transmits this
command message to a slave Lasetec
The four bytes of data that follow this command contain II to synchronize the time on both
the total time, in seconds, excluding leap seconds, since 1 systems to 4a9bad30, or 11:00:00
January 1970, in hexadecimal format. am, Monday, 31 August 2009.
The first character that the Lasetec II sends after the

command characters is the most significant nibble of the
most significant byte. The second character is the least
significant nibble of the most significant byte. The next
character is the most significant nibble of the
next-to-the-most significant byte, and so on until the
Lasetec II sends the last character of the time value. The
last character of the time value represents the least
significant nibble of the least significant byte.
01 Slave Lasetec II the actual name of a PCF that the slave is
to use to mark containers. : 01 0003 01 4143 0088
The name includes up to eight characters and excludes the The master Lasetec II transmits this
period and extension, as the Lasetec II system software command message to a slave Lasetec
appends the period and extension automatically. II to instruct the slave to use the PCF
named 4143, or AC.
02 Slave Lasetec II to start marking containers.
: 01 0001 02 0004
The master Lasetec II transmits this

II to command the slave to start
marking containers.
03 Slave Lasetec II to stop marking containers.
: 01 0001 03 0005
The master Lasetec II transmits this

II to command the slave to stop
marking containers.
05 Slave Lasetec II to insert user-defined product code text in
the named user-defined field in a product code. : 01 0008 05 5b534e5d313233 01fd
Note: The first part of the command data contains the The master Lasetec II transmits this
name of the user-defined field enclosed within square command message to a slave Lasetec
brackets ([ and ]) in which the slave Lasetec II is to insert II to instruct the slave to insert the
the text. serial number 123 (5b534e5d313233)
in the user-defined field named SN.
06 Slave Lasetec II to clear all error conditions that it is
experiencing. : 01 0001 06 0008
Note: If, after clearing errors, the slave Lasetec II continues The master Lasetec II transmits this
to run in an error state, it reasserts the error. command message to a slave Lasetec
II to tell the slave to clear all errors.
3f Slave Lasetec II to transmit its current status back to the
master Lasetec II. : 01 0001 3 f 0041
If the slave Lasetec II is ready to mark, the slave Lasetec II : 01 0002 3 f 01 0043
responds by sending a 01 data value response with the
original 3f command back to the sender. : 01 0002 3 f 00 0042
If the slave Lasetec II is not ready to mark, the slave The master Lasetec II transmits the
Lasetec II responds by sending a 00 data value response top command message to the slave
with the original 3f command back to the sender. Lasetec II to instruct the slave to
transmit one of the bottom command
messages back to the master.

Document 41195-0510
5.9 Lasetec II Host Port Application
5.9.1 Purpose
You use the Lasetec II Host Port application to start and stop
marking containers or packages, select a product code, query a
Lasetec II system about its status, specify communication
settings, specify user-defined field text, and specify the type of
message that you want to send.
The Lasetec II Host Port application provides a basic interface for

Lasetec II system communications, as described previously in this
chapter. Industrial Dynamics/filtec provides the Lasetec II Host
Port application to customers on request.
5.9.2 Diagram
Here is the main screen of the Lasetec II Host Port application.
Figure 5-2. Main Screen of the Lasetec II Host Port Application

Document 41195-0510
5.9.3 Selections on the Main Screen of the Host Port
Application
Use this table to learn the purpose of each selection on the main
screen of the Host Port application.
Use this selection... To...
Start Coding Start marking containers.
Stop Coding Stop marking containers.
Select Product Code Display the Product Code dialog box, which you
use to specify a product code.
Query Display the ? Query dialog box, which you use to

send a query to a Lasetec II system to determine
its status.
The Host Port application displays the response

from the Lasetec II system in the Target
Response window.

Document 41195-0510
Communications Display the Communication Settings dialog box,

Settings which you use to specify the port, baud rate,
parity, data bits, and stop bits when you
communicate with the Lasetec II.
Note: The Lasetec II uses even parity, eight data

bits, and one stop bit only.
User Defined Field Text Display the User Defined Text dialog box, which
you use to specify the name or number (from 1
to 9) of the user-defined text field for which you
want to provide new text.
Message Specification Display the Message Structure dialog box, which

you use to specify the number of characters that
are allowed in the user-defined field and
whether you want to use standard or enhanced
message commands.
Exit Exit the Host Port application.

Document 41195-0510
5.10 Installing and Starting the Lasetec II
Host Port Application
5.10.1 Before You Begin
You must have installed, connected, and configured the wiring,

cabling, and system software between the Lasetec II and the host
computer system before you perform these steps.
Installing Your Lasetec II describes how to install and configure

your Lasetec II and a host system.
5.10.2 Steps
Follow these steps to install the Lasetec II Host Port application.
1. Obtain the Lasetec II Host Port application software from

Industrial Dynamics/filtec and save it on a removable media
device.
2. Attach the removable media device to the host computer

that is connected to the Lasetec II with which you intend to
use Host Port.
3. Copy the Host Port application software file to the host

computer.
4. Locate the HostPort.exe application on your host computer

and double click it.
Result: Host Port starts and displays the main screen.

Document 41195-0510
5.11 Starting and Stopping Marking
Containers
5.11.1 Steps
Follow these steps to start and stop marking containers with the
Host Port application.
1. On the host computer that is connected to the Lasetec II,

start the Host Port application.
2. Click Start Coding.
Result: The Lasetec II system starts marking containers.
3. To stop marking containers, click Stop Coding.
Result: The Lasetec II system stops marking containers.

Document 41195-0510
5.12 Remotely Selecting and Using a PCF
5.12.1 Steps
Follow these steps to select and use a Product Code File (PCF)
with the Host Port application.
1. On the host computer that is connected to the Lasetec II,

start the Host Port application.
2. Click Select Product Code.
Result: The Host Port application displays the Product Code

dialog box.
3. In the Product Code field, type the name of the PCF,

excluding the period and extension, that you want.
Note: Do not type the period and extension as the Lasetec II

inserts the period and extension automatically.
4. Click Select.
Result: The Lasetec II system starts using the product code

that is defined in the PCF (acme.pcf) that you specified.
Note: The PCF that you specify must already exist on the
Lasetec II system. If you specify a PCF that does not exist on
the Lasetec II, the Lasetec II ignores this command.

Document 41195-0510
6. Lasetec II System Software
This chapter describes how to use the Lasetec II system software

menus, functions, commands, and parameters.
This chapter is organized according to the structure of menus in

the Lasetec II system software.
Lasetec II System Software 6-1

Document 41195-0510
6.1
Diagnostic History Log
6-2
F1 - Stop Coding
System Inputs and Outputs
Product Code Files Test Menu Alignment Tests

Main Menu
F1 - Static Laser Align
F1 - Start Coding Enter Text Alignment Tests
F1 - Stop Coding F2 - Dynamic Laser Align
F2 - Select Product Code
Reset Serial Fields F3 - Laser Profiler Profile Laser
F3 - Enter User Fields Product Code Files
F4 - Misc. Galvo Tests
F4 - Reset Serial Fields
PC Display Zoom Menu Enter Text F10 - Start Coding Galvo Tests
F5 - Display Zoom F1 - Zoom In Display
F9 - Advanced Features Enter new password
F2 - Zoom Out Display Reset Serial Fields
F3 - Restore Default Zoom Load/Save System Settings
Product Code Editor
Figure 6-1.
Advanced Menu
Maintenance Menu Installation Menu Calibrate Encoder
F1 - Start Coding F2 - Calibrate Encoder
F1 - Diagnostic History
F2 - Select Product Code F4 - Tracking Settings Tracking System
F2 - System I/O Display Parameters
F3 - Enter User Fields F5 - Thermal Settings
F4 - Test Menu
F4 - Reset Serial Fields F6 - Password F8 - Save Inst. Defaults Thermal System
Parameters
F7 - Product Code Editor F8 - Load/Save Settings F10 - Start Coding
F8 - Maintence Menu F10 - Start Coding

Configuration Menu Laser System Parameters
F9 - Setup Menu
Setup Menu F1 - Laser Settings
F11 - Test Fire Delay System Parameters
F1 - Installation Menu F2 - Delay Settings
F3 - Configuration Menu F3 - Optics Settings

Optical System Parameters
F4 - Verifier Settings
F4 - Computer Menu
F9 - Exit to DOS Verification Parameters
F9 - Exit to DOS
F10 - Start Coding F10 - Start Coding
Communication
Computer Menu Parameters
Lasetec II System Software Menu Structure

F1 - Comm. Settings
Date & Time Settings
F2 - Time Settings
F3 - Languages
English, French, German,
F7 - Help, About Spanish, Danish, Portu-
guese, Russian, Polish
F9 - Exit to DOS
Lasetec II System Software Menu Structure
Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
F10 - Start Coding About Lasetec II
6.2 Using Lasetec II System Software Dialog
Boxes
6.2.1 Keys
Use the following keys on your Lasetec II operator station

keyboard to navigate within dialog boxes that the Lasetec II
system software displays.
Use this key... To...
TAB, left arrow (←), right arrow Move between, and highlight, fields.
(→), up arrow (↑), or down arrow (↓)
ENTER Do one of the following, depending

on the context:
• Change a value in a field.
• Highlight a value in a field so
that you can change that value.
• Select a value from a pop-up
menu that is displayed for a
field.
When the system software
displays a pop-up menu, use the
up and down arrow keys to
select the menu option that you
want.
ESC Close the currently open menu,

dialog box, or pop-up menu without
applying your changes or saving your
selection or cancel the command
that you are running.

Document 41195-0510
6.3 Main Menu
6.3.1 Diagram
The Lasetec II Main Menu is the first menu that the system
displays after you turn on the Lasetec II.
1 2
No. Description
5 4 3
1 Menu area
2 Lasetec II error message area
3 Code editing window
4 Print area box
5 Status area
Figure 6-2. Lasetec II Main Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.3.2 Major Parts of the Main Menu
The Lasetec II Main Menu is composed of three major parts, or

areas, as described in the following table.
Use the... To...
Menu area Display menus, select and issue commands, and

generally tell the Lasetec II system software what
you want to do.
Note: In some cases, the menu area spills into the

status area to accommodate a long menu or a
utility that includes more commands than can fit in
the menu area.
Lasetec II error Determine if a problem has occurred in the Lasetec

message area II software or hardware.
Code editing window Create, edit, and build the product code that you
want to mark on a container. The code editing
window contains the print area box.
This window also contains, at top center, the

current magnification and position of the print area
box.
Default: By default, the system displays the print

area box at position 0 along both the x and y axes
(that is, in the lower left corner) and at 100
percent zoom (that is, 100 millimeters by 100
millimeters, or 1000 millimeters).
See Also: The chapter Creating and Editing Product

Codes, which appears later in this guide, describes
in detail how to create and edit product codes.
Note: The system always displays the code editing

window with all menus and dialog boxes.
Print area box See what your product code will look like on your
container.
The print area box represents the area on your

container where the Lasetec II will mark your
product code.
Range: By default, the print area box is 1 inch, or

25 millimeters, high and 2 inches, or 50
millimeters, wide.

Document 41195-0510
Use the... To...
Status area Determine the status of your Lasetec II, containers,

the current date and time, and other similar
information, as described in the following table.
This field... Indicates...
Mark Mode Whether the Lasetec II is presently

marking containers or idle.
Tracking The tracking mode that the

Lasetec II is presently using:
dynamic, indexed, or static.
Mark Period The amount of time that it takes

the Lasetec II to perform a verifier
test and finish printing a
container.
The Lasetec II performs the

verifier test before it marks a
container.
Mark Count The total number of containers

that the Lasetec II has marked.
Field Used The percentage of the optical

field of the focal lens that the
Lasetec II uses.
Date Present date or the date that the

Lasetec II is programmed to mark.
Time Present system time or the time

that the Lasetec II is programmed
to mark.
Comm How the Lasetec II system is

configured: a standalone system,
master, slave, host, or master
with host.
Path The directory path to the product

code file (PCF).
Filename The name of the selected PCF.
System The current temperature inside

Temp the Lasetec II enclosure.
Note: If the temperature exceeds

the ideal range, the Lasetec II
generates a warning message.
Note: The system always displays the status area

with all menus except when the menu area cannot
accommodate all commands or menu selections.

Document 41195-0510
6.3.3 Selections on the Main Menu
Use this table to learn the purpose of each selection on the Main
Menu.
F1 - Start Coding Initiate the coding process or terminate the

coding process.
Note: This key toggles between Start Coding and

Stop Coding, depending on whether the Lasetec
II is currently idle or marking.
F2 - Select Product Code Display a list of available files that contain

product codes from which you select the product
code that you want to mark on a container.
Important: The first time that you

select a product code file, if the
Align on new PCF field on the
Verification Parameters dialog
box is set to On, the Lasetec II
activates the focus LED, shines
two red dots, and displays a dialog
box that prompts you to verify the
focus.
At this point, if you press any key

on the operator station keyboard,
the Lasetec II activates the
alignment LED, which is steered
by the galvanometers, and
projects the product code onto
the container. Press any key
again, and the Lasetec II
reactivates the focus LED.
To stop, you press the ESC key.
In this way, you can toggle

between verifying the focus and
verifying the alignment.
The chapter Creating and Editing Product Codes,

which appears later in this guide, describes how
to create and edit product codes.
F3 - Enter User Fields Provide the actual text for each field in a
product code that a Lasetec II operator selects.
If a product code requires that the operator

provide additional input, the system displays
each field sequentially.
Range: You can specify a maximum of 72

characters in a user field.
F4 - Reset Serial Fields If you have allowed the Lasetec II to assign serial
numbers rather than assigning them yourself,
reset the current serial number back to 0 or to a
value that you specify.

Document 41195-0510
F5 - Display Zoom Display the PC Display Zoom Menu, which you

use to zoom into, zoom out of, or restore the
default magnification of the product code area.
F9 - Advanced Features Display the Advanced Menu, which you use to

run the Product Code Editor and display the
Maintenance Menu, which you use to run tests,
display diagnostic history, and display system
inputs and outputs.
You also use the Advanced Menu to display the

Setup Menu, which you use to install and
configure your Lasetec II, set computer
parameters, and exit to DOS.
Important: If you or someone else

enabled password protection with
the Lasetec II system software, you
must enter a password to access
the Advanced Menu.

Document 41195-0510
6.4 PC Display Zoom Menu
6.4.1 How to Display This Screen
Main Menu > F5
6.4.2 Diagram
You use the PC Display Zoom Menu to zoom into, zoom out of, or
restore the default magnification of the product code area.
Figure 6-3. PC Display Zoom Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.4.3 Keys That You Can Use in the PC Display Zoom Menu
Use the following keys while using the PC Display Zoom Menu.
Use key or keys... To...
Right arrow (→) Once you display the PC Display Zoom Menu, pan
Left arrow (←) around the code editing window, that is, move the
Up arrow (↑) location of the print area box within the code editing
Down arrow (↓) window.
6.4.4 Selections on the PC Display Zoom Menu
Use this table to learn the purpose of each selection on the PC

Display Zoom Menu.
F1 - Zoom In Display Zoom into the product code area.
F2 - Zoom Out Display Zoom out of the product code area.
F5 - Restore Default Reset the magnification of the product code area

Zoom to the default settings.
By default, the Lasetec II system displays the

print area box at position 0 along both the x and
y axes (that is, in the lower left corner) and at a
zoom value of 1000, as shown below.

Document 41195-0510
6.5 Advanced Menu
Main Menu > F9
6.5.2 Diagram
You use the Advanced Menu to run the Product Code Editor and
display the Maintenance Menu, which you use to run tests, carry
out maintenance, and display diagnostic history and change
system inputs and outputs.
You also use this menu to display the Setup Menu, which you use
to configure your Lasetec II and set computer parameters.
Figure 6-4. Advanced Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.5.3 Selections on the Advanced Menu
Use this table to learn the purpose of each selection on the

Advanced Menu.

coding process.
This key toggles between Start Coding and Stop

Coding, depending on whether the Lasetec II is
idle or marking.
F2 - Select Product Code Display a list of available files that contain

product codes from which you select the product
code that you want to mark on a container.

F3 - Enter User Fields Add or change the actual text for each field in a
product code that you previously selected.
If a product code requires that you to provide

additional input, the system displays each field
sequentially.
Range: You can specify a maximum of 72

characters in a user field.
F4 - Reset Serial Fields If you have allowed the Lasetec II to assign serial
numbers rather than assigning them yourself,
reset the current serial number back to 0 or to a
value that you specify.
F7 - Product Code Editor Display the Product Code Editor, which you use

F8 - Maintenance Menu Display the Maintenance Menu, which you use to

run tests, display diagnostic history, and display
and modify system inputs and outputs.
F9 - Setup Menu Display the Setup Menu, which you use to

display the Installation Menu, Configuration
Menu, and the Computer Menu, which you use
to install and configure your Lasetec II, set
computer parameters, and exit to DOS.
You also use this menu and associated menus

when you install new equipment, repair
equipment, and make significant changes to your
equipment.

Document 41195-0510
6.6 Product Code Editor
Main Menu > F9 > F7
6.6.2 Diagram
You use the Product Code Editor to create, edit, load, backup,
and test product codes.
Figure 6-5. Product Code Editor

Document 41195-0510
6.6.3 Keys That You Can Use in the Product Code Editor
In addition to the keys that are described in Using Lasetec II

System Software Dialog Boxes, use the following keys to navigate
menus, windows, dialog boxes, and pop-up menus when you use
the Product Code Editor.
Use key or keys... To...
ALT C Clear, or more precisely, completely erase the

currently displayed product code and print area box
from the code editing window.
ALT D Delete the currently displayed product code file (PCF)

from disk.
ALT E Edit the content of the highlighted field in the print

area box.
The system displays the appropriate editing dialog box

for the highlighted field that you intend to edit.
ALT F Insert a new product code field in the print area box.
ALT H Display a help page that lists and briefly describes the
keys that you can use in the Product Code Editor.
ALT I Insert a new item in the print area box.
ALT L Display the Product Codes Files dialog box, which you
use to load the contents of a PCF into the Product
Code Editor.
ALT R Refresh the Product Code Editor screen.
ALT S Display the Save Product Code File dialog box, which
you use to name and save a PCF.
ALT Z Display the PC Display Zoom Menu, which you use to

zoom in, zoom out, and restore the default
magnification of your product code, as it appears in
the print area box.
The current magnification is stored in the PCF when

you save your settings and retained when you reopen
the PCF.
DEL Delete the currently highlighted product code field.
F8 Display a list of fonts that the currently loaded PCF

uses.
INS Insert text into fields rather than overwrite text in

fields, which is the default setting.
Right arrow (→) Once you display the PC Display Zoom Menu, pan
Left arrow (←) around the code editing window, that is, move the
Up arrow (↑) location of the print area box within the code editing
Down arrow (↓) window.
PG UP Move to, and highlight, an item in the print area box.

PG DN

Document 41195-0510
6.6.4 Code and Trigger Fields on the Product Code Editor
Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Product
Code Editor dialog box.
Note: The values in this section that you specify apply to all
items and fields in the entire PCF.
Use this field... To...
Product code description Attach a description to the current PCF that you
(shown as Lasetec can later use to recognize the product code.
Default PCF in Diagram)
Code Width Define, in indexed mode, the width of the total

horizontal area in which the Lasetec II can mark
the product code.
Range: You can specify a value between 0 and

1000 millimeters inclusive in this field.
However, the maximum code width that you can

specify is approximately 2 inches or 50
millimeters, as the X field limit of the Lasetec
II’s standard lens is 2 inches or 50 millimeters.
In dynamic mode, you can specify a value that is

greater than 2 inches (that is, the code width
that you specify can exceed the X field limit)
because the container moves through the field.
Code Height Define, in either indexed or dynamic mode, the

total vertical area in which the Lasetec II can
mark the product code.

However, the maximum product code height that

you can specify is 1 inch or 25 millimeters, as the
Y field limit of the Lasetec II’s standard lens is 1
inch or 25 millimeters.
Notes: Other lens sizes are optional and might

have different product code height limits.
The system centers the height of the product

code to the focal lens. If you place the product
code in the lower part of the print area box and
you reduce the height of the product code, the
system realigns the product code with the center
of the lens and marks the product code higher on
the container.

Document 41195-0510
Code Delay Specify, in millimeters or milliseconds, the

distance from the leading edge of the container
to the beginning of the code.
If you are using dynamic mode, you specify this

value in millimeters, as shown in the following
diagram.
1
No. Description
1 Code delay distance
If you are using indexed mode, you specify this

value in milliseconds (even though the system
displays mm after the field).
1000 millimeters or milliseconds inclusive in this
field.
Note: The Lasetec II system software adds the

values that you specify for Code Delay and
Trigger Delay to ensure that it marks the
product code at precisely the correct location.
Trig Blank Tell the Lasetec II to ignore the trigger signal for
a specified distance, in millimeters.

Best Practice: Use this field when you use a

through-beam trigger to detect clear bottles.
The light from the sensor can pass through the
container, and thus create double triggers and
false alarms.
Best Practice: Specify a value that is slightly

larger than the width of the container at the
trigger height when the trigger is aimed at the
cap or neck area of the container, but is less
than the widest part of the container.

Document 41195-0510
6.6.5 Mark Item Parameters Fields on the Product Code
Editor Dialog Box
Mark item parameters control all aspects of a product code, such

as the size of the characters, position, and font.
Note: The values in this section that you specify apply only to
an individual item or field in the PCF.
Important: Before you start marking containers, verify that all

items have identical power and velocity settings.
Item Font Specify the font to be used in the product code.
Note: The system uses the font that you select in

all fields within the same item.
Fonts that Industrial Dynamics/filtec currently

includes with all new Lasetec II systems are:
• BLOCK
• COMPLEX
• LOGO
• MODERN
• OCRB3X
• OCRSEAGT
• OUTLINE
• SCRIPT
• SIMPLEX
• SIMPLEX NO-TOUCH
• STANDARD
• STANDARD NO-TOUCH
X Position Move the highlighted item in the print area box

from the origin towards the right or towards the
left along the x-axis, the distance, in
millimeters, that you specify.
In other words, use this field to move the
highlighted item horizontally back and forth
within the print area box.
Any change that you specify affects all product

code fields within the same item only.

Best Practice: Specify a value that keeps the

item within the print area box.

Document 41195-0510
Y Position Move the highlighted item in the print area box

from the origin upwards along the y-axis the
distance, in millimeters, that you specify.
In other words, use this field to move the

highlighted item up and down within the print
area box.
Any change that you specify affects all product

code fields within the same item only.

Best Practice: Specify a value that keeps the

item within the print area box.
Size Specify the size, in millimeters, of the

characters that make up the highlighted item in
the print area box.
Range: You can specify a value between 0.1 and

Best Practice: The smaller your characters, the

faster the Lasetec II can mark each container.
Specify the smallest size possible.
Aspect Specify, in percent, the width of each character

that makes up the highlighted item in the print
area box.

1000 percent inclusive in this field.
Default: The system sets the aspect ratio of each

character to 100 percent by default.
Best Practice: Specify an aspect ratio that keeps

the item within the print area box.
Angle Specify, in degrees, the angle at which to

position the highlighted item in the print area
box, as illustrated by the following diagram.
This text is angled 0 degrees.

360.0 degrees inclusive in this field.
Default: The system angles items at 0 degrees by

default.

Document 41195-0510
Tilt Tilt or italicize the highlighted item the number

of degrees (from the y-axis) that you specify.
Range: You can specify a value between -3600

and 3600 degrees inclusive in this field. The
system sets the tilt to 0 degrees by default.
Best Practice: To italicize characters to the

right, specify a negative value, for example -45.
To italicize characters to the left, specify a
positive value, for example 45.
Note: Not all fonts support tilt.
Power Set the wattage that the Lasetec II system uses

to mark a container.
Note: The material that you are marking and the

total number of characters and items that make
up the product code determine the overall speed
of the Lasetec II.

100.0 watts inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Set the wattage so that it is

strong enough to mark the container correctly,
but not so strong that it damages the container
or the Lasetec II. Specify lower wattages on thin
material or material that the laser can easily
penetrate, higher wattages on sturdier material.
See Also: The section Adjusting the Power of the

Laser contains details.
The section Laser System Parameters Dialog

Box describes the dialog box that you use to set
laser system parameters.
Caution: Change and save Power

and Velocity during production
only if you are trained by
Industrial Dynamics/filtec.
You can potentially mark
containers incorrectly if you
change these fields incorrectly.

Document 41195-0510
Velocity Set the speed, in millimeters per second, of the

galvanometers.
The value that you specify in this field directly

affects the laser power density as the Lasetec II
laser scans over the material that you are
marking.

20000 millimeters per second inclusive in this
field.
The section Delay System Parameters Dialog

Box describes the dialog box that you change the
velocity with which the Lasetec II marks product
codes.
See Also: The section Adjusting the Speed of the

Galvanometers contains details.
Caution: Change and save Power

and Velocity during production
only if you are trained by
You can potentially mark
containers incorrectly if you
change these fields incorrectly.
6.6.6 Insert and Barcode Fields on the Product Code

Editor Dialog Box
You use the insert and barcode fields and commands to define
and edit product code fields and items.
Insertion Mode Specify whether you want to insert a new

product code field or item before or after the
highlighted product code field or item in the
print area box.
To insert a product code field or item before the

highlighted field or item, select Before.
To insert a product code field or item after the

highlighted field or item, select After.
Note: Numbering of the field or item changes

automatically when you add a new field to
reflect the field order.

Document 41195-0510
Insert Specify whether you want to insert a new field or

a new item into the highlighted product code in
the print area box.
You can insert the following types of product

code fields:
• Text Field
• Date & Time
• Serial Number
• User Defined
The order in which the system inserts the new

product code field or item depends on the value
that you select for Insertion Mode.
Best Practice: At any time, on your operator

station keyboard, you can also press ALT F to
insert a field and ALT I to insert an item.
Barcode Specify whether you want to convert the

highlighted item in the print area box to a bar
code.
To edit the bar code that you create, use the

Barcode Edit field, which displays the Bar Code
Type Field dialog box. You use this dialog box to
build a bar code from an existing product code
field.
Edit Current Field Edit the highlighted product code field in the
print area box.
Best Practice: At any time, on your operator

station keyboard, you can also press ALT E to
edit a field.
Load PCF Display the Product Code Files dialog box, which
you use to select and load the contents of a
product code file (PCF) into the Product Code
Editor.
Caution: Stop the Lasetec II from

marking containers before you
load a new PCF.
load a new PCF.

Document 41195-0510
Load Bkup Revert to the original version of the current PCF

by loading a backup copy into the Product Code
Editor.
Note: When you use this command, the system,
without warning, overwrites the currently loaded
PCF with the backup version. Any changes that
you have made to the currently loaded PCF are
lost forever.
Best Practice: Use this command when
troubleshooting a PCF.
Caution: Stop the Lasetec II from

marking containers before you
load a backup PCF.
load a new PCF.
Backup PCF Make a backup copy of the currently loaded PCF.
Note: Only one backup copy is created for each

PCF. The system overwrites this same backup
copy every time you use this command.
Best Practice: Always back up every PCF that

you create to ensure minimal interruption if
problems occur with your currently loaded PCF.
Item Determine the number of the item that is

highlighted in the print area box.
Field Determine the number of the field that is

highlighted in the print area box.
Type Determine the type of the highlighted item and

product code field in the print area box.
Ok [F2] Display the Save Product Code File dialog box,

which you use to name and save the currently
loaded PCF to disk.
Best Practice: Ensure that the file name that

you specify contains only letters, digits, a dash
(-), and an underline character (_), and does not
contain spaces.
Caution: Ensure that you specify a

unique PCF name.
If you specify the same name for a
PCF that already exists on disk,
the system overwrites it without
warning.

Document 41195-0510
6.7 Standard Text Field Dialog Box
Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Edit Current Field

Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Field > Text Field
Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Item > Text Field
6.7.2 Diagram
You use the Standard Text Field dialog box to create and modify
a text product code field.
Figure 6-6. Standard Text Field Dialog Box
Important: When you display this dialog box by selecting Insert:

Item, the system also includes mark item parameters with the
Field Text field.
See Also: Definition: Text Product Code Item or Field defines

what a text product code is.

Document 41195-0510
6.7.3 Fields on the Standard Text Field Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Standard
Text Field dialog box.
Clear Data Clear all content in the Field Text field.
Important: You must save your changes by

selecting Accept [F2] to permanently clear all
content in fields on this dialog box.
Cancel [ESC] Cancel the current operation and exit without

saving your additions or changes that you have
made in the Field Text field.
Note: You can also press the ESC key on your

operator station keyboard to cancel the current
operation and exit.
Accept [F2] Save the additions and changes that you have
Note: You can also press the F2 key on your

operator station keyboard to save the additions
and changes that you have made.
Field Text Specify the characters or content that you want

to include in the text product code field.
If the field already exists, when you open the

Standard Text Field dialog box, its contents are
displayed in this field. If you are creating the
field, the Field Text field is blank.

Document 41195-0510
6.8 Date/Time Field Dialog Box

Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Field > Date/Time
Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Item > Date/Time
6.8.2 Diagram
You use the Date/Time Field dialog box to create and modify a
date and time product code field.
Figure 6-7. Date/Time Field Dialog Box

Field Text field.
See Also: Definition: Date and Time Product Code Item or Field
defines what a date and time product code is.

Document 41195-0510
6.8.3 Fields on the Date/Time Field Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the

Date/Time Field dialog box.
Important: You can also manually insert formats and characters

in the Field Text field other than the ones that are listed in the
month, day, year, hour, minutes, and seconds fields on this
dialog box.
Month Code Select the particular Lasetec II month format

that you want to insert in the Field Text field.
The section Definition: Date and Time Product

Code Item or Field lists and describes the
Lasetec II month formats that you can select in
this field.
Day Code Select the particular Lasetec II day format that

you want to insert in the Field Text field.

Lasetec II day formats that you can select in this
field.
Year Code Select the particular Lasetec II year format that


Lasetec II year formats that you can select in this
field.
Hour Code Select the particular Lasetec II hour format that


Lasetec II hour formats that you can select in this
field.
Min. Code Select the particular Lasetec II minutes format


Lasetec II minutes formats that you can select in
this field.
Sec. Code Select the particular Lasetec II seconds format


Lasetec II seconds formats that you can select in
this field.

Document 41195-0510

to include in the date and time product code
field.

Date/Time Field dialog box, its contents are



operation and exit.


Document 41195-0510
6.9 Serial Number Field Dialog Box

Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Field > Serial Number
Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Item > Serial Number
6.9.2 Diagram
You use the Serial Number Field dialog box to create and modify
a serial number product code field.
Figure 6-8. Serial Number Field Dialog Box

Serial Format field.
See Also: Definition: Serial Number Product Code Item or Field

defines what a serial number product code is.

Document 41195-0510
6.9.3 Fields on the Serial Number Field Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Serial
Number Field dialog box.
Clear Data Clear all content in the Serial Format field.


made in the Serial Format field.

operation and exit.
made in the Serial Format field.

Serial Count Specify the value at which all serial numbers are
to start.
The system adds the value that you specify in

this field to the value that you specify with the S
serial number product code field variable.
The section Variables That Make Up a Serial

Number Product Code Item or Field lists and
describes the serial number product code
variables that you can use in this field.
Serial Format Insert the serial number product code field

variables and values that define your serial code
field.
The section Variables That Make Up a Serial

Number Product Code Item or Field lists and
describes the serial number product code
variables that you can use in this field.

Document 41195-0510
6.10 User Defined Field Dialog Box

Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Field > User Defined
Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Insert: Item > User Defined
6.10.2 Diagram
You use the User Defined Field dialog box to create and modify a
user-defined product code field.
Figure 6-9. User Defined Field Dialog Box

Field Text field.
See Also: Definition: User-Defined Product Code Item or Field

defines what a user-defined product code is.

Document 41195-0510
6.10.3 Fields on the User Defined Field Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the User
Defined Field dialog box.



operation and exit.

Field Name Specify the text of the message that an operator

or system sees in the prompt that the Lasetec II
subsequently displays to get the user-defined
information.
Note: The Lasetec II automatically displays the

word Enter followed by the text that you specify
in this field.
Fixed Text Specify a set of alphanumeric characters that

you want to include after the text that you
specify in the Field Name field.
Note: This text does not change and

automatically adjusts to the text that you
specify in the Field Name field.
User Data Specify a sample of the user-defined information

that the operator or system is to provide.
Example: If the operator is to type a 5-digit lot
number at the prompt, specify 12345 in this
field.

Document 41195-0510
User Entry is ... Do the following:

characters
• Display a pop-up menu that enables you to
select the allowed range of the user-defined
information that the operator or system can
provide.
You can select at most, exactly, or at least
on this pop-up menu.
• Specify the number of characters that the
operator or system is allowed to enter.
Range: You can specify from 0 to 64
characters, inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify a value between 1
and 64 inclusive in this field.
Input Source Display a pop-up window that enables you to

select the allowed source or sources that can
provide the user-defined information.
You can select Both, Operator, or External in

this field.

to include in the user-defined product code
field.

User Defined Field dialog box, its contents are
field, the User Defined Field field is blank.

Document 41195-0510
6.11 Bar Code Type Field Dialog Box
Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Barcode: Yes

Main Menu > F9 > F7 > Barcode: Yes Edit
6.11.2 Diagram
You use the Bar Code Field dialog box to create a bar code
product code field from an existing text, date and time, serial
number, or user-defined product code field. You also use this
dialog box to modify a bar code product code field.
Figure 6-10. Bar Code Field Dialog Box
See Also: Definition: Bar Code Product Code Item or Field defines
what a bar code product code is.
6.11.3 Fields on the Bar Code Field Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Bar Code
Field dialog box.


Document 41195-0510


operation and exit.

Bar Code Format Display the Bar Code Format pop-up menu, from
which you select the bar code symbology that
you want to use.
Range: At present, you can select one of the

following symbologies:
• 2D Data Matrix
• Code 128 (all 128 characters)
• Code 128 (subset A)
• Code 128 (subset B)
• Code 128 (subset C)
• Code 39
• EAN 128 digit
• EAN 8 digit
• EAN 13 digit
• EAN 14 digit
• Interleaved 2 of 5
• UPC-A 11 digit
• UPC-E 11 digit
Inverted Mark Display the Inverted Mark pop-up menu, from

which you select whether you want to create:
• A typical bar code in which the bars are

coded.
The Lasetec II creates this type of bar code
by default.
• An inverted, negative image of the bar code
in which the spaces between the bars are
coded.
Range: You can select either Mark Bars or Mark
Spaces on the Inverted Mark pop-up menu.
Best Practice: When marking a bar code on dark

material, select Mark Spaces to ensure
maximum readability.
Stripe Density Specify the pixel depth or resolution of bars in

the bar code, that is, the number of lines that
the Lasetec II is to use to draw each individual
bar or square.
Range: You can specify a value between 1 and 8

pixels inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify 2 pixels in this field.

Document 41195-0510
Bars/Font Char Specify the number of characters in the

character set for the symbology that you
selected.

128 characters inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify 7 characters in this field.
Stripe X Scale Specify the width of the bar code, in pixels, that
is, the spacing between each vertical line in each
square or bar.

1000 pixels inclusive in this field.
Stripe Y Scale Specify the height of the bar code, in pixels, that
is, the spacing between each horizontal line in
each square or bar.

1000 pixels inclusive in this field.
X Trim Specify the number of pixels to which the

Lasetec II software is to shorten the bottom
horizontal border at the end of 2D bar codes.

Y Trim Specify the number of pixels to which the

Lasetec II software is to shorten the columns and
left hand border at the end of 2D bar codes.

X Offset Specify the number of pixels that the Lasetec II

software is to offset each column from the
left-hand edge of the matrix in 2D bar codes.

Y Offset Specify the number of pixels that the Lasetec II

software is to vertically offset each column from
the bottom border in 2D bar codes.


Document 41195-0510
2D Matrix Size Display the 2D Matrix Size pop-up menu, which

you use to select the size of your square 2D
matrix, in pixels.
Range: You can select one of the following

matrices on the 2D Matrix Size pop-up menu:
Size Data Capacity
Numeric Alphanumeric Byte
Automatic 6 3 1
10 x 10 6 3 1
12 x 12 10 6 3
14 x 14 16 10 6
16 x 16 24 16 10
18 x 18 36 25 16
20 x 20 44 31 20
22 x 22 60 43 28
24 x 24 72 52 34
26 x 26 88 64 42
32 x 32 124 91 60
Note: If you select the automatic size, the

Lasetec II system automatically adjusts the size
of the matrix according to the number of
characters in the item or field.

to include in the bar code product code field.
If the field already exists, when you open the Bar

Code Type Field dialog box, its contents are

Document 41195-0510
6.12 Maintenance Menu
Main Menu > F9 > F8
6.12.2 Diagram
You use the Maintenance Menu to run tests, display diagnostic

history, and display and modify system inputs and outputs, as
well as carry out other maintenance procedures.
Figure 6-11. Maintenance Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.12.3 Selections on the Maintenance Menu

Maintenance Menu.
F1 - Diagnostic History Display the diagnostic history log, including

system errors, status messages, and diagnostic
messages.
On your operator station keyboard, use these

keys to navigate the diagnostic history log.

Right arrow (→), Scroll right or left one
Left arrow (←) character in the log (if a
record spans beyond the
border of the window).
Up arrow (↑), Scroll up or down one record
Down arrow (↓) in the log file.
PG UP Scroll up one screen (16
records) at a time.
PG DN Scroll down one screen (16
records) at a time.
HOME Scroll to the top of the log,
or most recent activity.
END Scroll to the bottom of the
log, or oldest activity.
ESC Close and exit the log.
Note: The Lasetec II displays a maximum of 4096

most recent entries in the diagnostic history log
at a time.
F2 - System I/O Display View information about the Lasetec II system’s

inputs and outputs and, optionally, turn on, turn
off, and set to automatic or manual particular
outputs.

Document 41195-0510
F4 - Test Menu Display the Test Menu, which you use to test,
verify, and calibrate the operation of verifiers,
the alignment of the laser and optics, and the
operation of the galvanometers.
F6 - Password Display the Enter New Password dialog box,

which you use to specify a password that
operators must provide to gain access to the
advanced features of the Lasetec II.
Note: The system encrypts and internally stores

the encrypted password that you provide in the
Lasetec II configuration file lasetec.cfg.
Important: If you forget or lose

your password, contact Industrial
Dynamics/filtec Customer Support
for help.
Or, alternatively, you can use the
MS-DOS edit command to reset the
password in the lasetec.cfg
configuration file, as described in
Removing the Advanced Features
Password.
F8 - Load/Save Settings Display the Load/Save System Settings dialog

box, which you use to save, erase, and load
Lasetec II system software configurations.

coding process.

currently idle or marking.

Document 41195-0510
6.13 System Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box
Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F2
6.13.2 Diagram
You use the System Inputs and Outputs dialog box to view infor-
mation about the Lasetec II system’s inputs and outputs and,
optionally, change particular settings.
Figure 6-12. System Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box
6.13.3 First Column of Fields on the Inputs and Outputs

Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field in the first
column on the Inputs and Outputs dialog box.
Primary Trigger Determine the state of the current primary

trigger that the Lasetec II is receiving, which is
either Open or Shut, depending on the
application.
The normal setting is Shut.
Note: When the trigger beam is blocked and

unblocked, this field toggles between Open and
Shut.

Document 41195-0510
Secondary Trigger Determine the state of the current secondary

trigger that the Lasetec II is receiving, which is
either Open or Shut, depending on the
application.
The normal setting is Shut.
Note: When the trigger beam is blocked and

unblocked, this field toggles between Open and
Shut.
Interlock Status Determine the status of the interlock signal that

enables power to the Lasetec II and the laser
shutter.
Note: The Lasetec II can ignore the interlock

error message, but if the interlock is not closing
the signal, the shutter refuses to open.
Shutter (Delayed) Determine the status of the signal from the

solenoid driver, which indicates the status of the
laser shutter.
The Lasetec II system software controls the

shutter and opens it only when necessary.
If the shutter refuses to open, verify that the

print head cover is closed and that the Interlock
Status field indicates Hi.
DC Power Status Determine the status of the laser’s DC power.

The DC Power Status is valid only when the
Interlock Status indicates Hi.
Thermal Shutdown Determine the status of the signal from the laser
temperature sensor.
When the laser temperature reaches the

maximum temperature allowed, feedback from
the laser temperature sensor triggers a thermal
shutdown and the laser shuts down until the
temperature cools.
The Thermal Shutdown status is valid only when

DC Power Status indicates Hi.
Laser Fault Determine if a problem with the laser tube

exists.
Important: Repeated laser fault

warnings might indicate that the
laser tube is failing and needs
replacement.
Laser Status Determine the status of power to the laser.

Document 41195-0510
6.13.4 Second Column of Fields on the Inputs and Outputs
Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field in the second
column on the Inputs and Outputs dialog box.
Important: You can toggle the values of the output fields back
forth between On and Off for testing.
You can also toggle the values for these fields back and forth
between A (for automatic operation) and M (for manual
operation). The Lasetec II system software sets these fields to A
by default.
Focus LED’s Activate and deactivate the focus LEDs, which

you use to align the print head.
Warning: To avoid serious injury,

check the focus LEDs only when
the laser is turned off.
Alignment LED Activate and deactivate the alignment LED,

which you use to align the print head.

check the focus LEDs only when
the laser is turned off.
Air Valve Determine the state of the air valve.
The Lasetec II system software automatically

controls the air valve. The system software turns
on air when either a container passes by and is
marked or when the laser tube temperature
becomes higher than the thermal setting.
Shutter Control Test the laser shutter solenoid and ensure that it
is responding to the setting (On or Off) that you
specify for this field.

ensure that Shutter Control is set
to A (Automatic) before you close
the System Inputs and Outputs
dialog box.

Document 41195-0510
System Fault Lamp Activate the red fault light on the Lasetec II print
head and on the operator station.
Important: Customer output

signals are opto-isolated DC relays
on the I/O card that is located on
the back panel of the print head.
Under normal production conditions, the Lasetec

II illuminates the fault lights when a:
• High priority fault, such as a failure of a

sensor or component, interlock and shutter
status condition, over temperature
condition, or a similar hardware failure
occurs.
• Code failure, such as the failure of a
verifier, insufficient time to complete a
mark, a test fire that interferes with
marking, a time code communication failure
in a master and slave configuration, or the
temporary closing of the laser’s shutter
occurs.
See Also: The section Wiring the Customer
I/O describes these failures in more detail.
Laser Ready Generate the LASER READY signal.

II generates this signal when the interlocks are
closed, you press the Lasetec II power button,
and you issue the start coding command through
a system software screen.
The LASER READY signal is disabled when the

Lasetec II detects a high priority fault or when
you issue the stop coding command through a
system software screen.
See Also: The section Wiring the Customer I/O

contains more information about the LASER
READY signal.
Diagnostic Fault Do nothing. This field is not currently available.
Successful Mark Generate the GOOD MK signal.

II generates this signal when it successfully
completes the marking of a container.

contains more information about the GOOD MK
signal.
Reject Generate the FAULT (NOT)/REJECT (NOT) signal.

II generates this signal when a code failure
occurs.

this signal and code failures in more detail.

Document 41195-0510
6.14 Test Menu
6.14.2 Diagram
You use the Test Menu to test, verify, and calibrate the
operation of verifiers, the alignment of the laser and optics, and
the operation of the galvanometers.
Figure 6-13. Test Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.14.3 Selections on the Test Menu
Use this table to learn the purpose of each selection on the Test
Menu.
F1 - Static Laser Align Display the Alignment Tests dialog box, which
you use to verify the operation of the verifiers
and the alignment of the laser and optics.
F2 - Dynamic Laser Align Test the alignment of the product code on a

target container.
When you run this test, the visible alignment

laser LED traces the product code image on the
target package.
Best Practice: This test does not use the trigger

to fire, so ensure that the target container and
the conveyor are stationary.
F3 - Laser Profiler Display the Profile Laser dialog box, which you
use to locate and calibrate the verifiers or to
test the laser and the galvanometers.
F4 - Misc. Galvo Test Display the Galvo Tests dialog box, which you
use to identify problems with the galvanometers.

coding process.

idle or marking.

Document 41195-0510
6.15 Alignment Tests Dialog Box
Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F4 > F1 > Y or N
6.15.2 Diagram
You use the Alignment Tests dialog box to verify the operation of
the verifiers and the static alignment of the laser and optics.
Figure 6-14. Alignment Tests Dialog Box

Document 41195-0510
6.15.3 Verifier Settings Fields on the Alignment Tests
Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each verifier setting field
on the Alignment Tests dialog box.
Lasing Power Specify the wattage of the laser that you want to
use in the test.

50.0 inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify the maximum wattage for

your particular laser.
Verifier Select Choose the particular verifier that you want to

use in the test.
You can specify Ver1 for verifier 1, Ver2 for

verifier 2, NONE, or BOTH.
The system uses BOTH by default.
Important: If you set the Verifier

Select field to NONE, you cannot
run the F1-Test Verifiers test.
Lasing On Time Specify how long, in milliseconds, that you want

to activate the laser during the test.

200 milliseconds inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify a value between one and

five milliseconds.
Verify Threshold Specify the minimum value that the verifier must
receive to confirm the detection of the laser.

4095 inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify 50 in this field.
ADC Reads to Avg Specify the number of verifier position samples

that you want averaged to define the verifier
position.
The value that you specify acts as a noise filter

to eliminate any extreme readings.


Document 41195-0510
Verify 1 X Y Specify the location of the verifier targets.

Verify 2 X Y
4095 inclusive in these fields.
Best Practice: Specify the following values in

these fields:
Verifier X Y
Ver1 950 1050
Ver2 3150 3050
Ver 1 and Ver 2 Determine both the real-time peak voltage when
Peak the laser fires during the test and the status
Status voltage that is monitored from the verifier
boards during the test.

Note: When the laser fires, the system reads the

peak voltage and uses the difference to validate
the location of the verifier. If the peak voltage is
too low, you might need to relocate the verifier
targets with the Laser Profiler menu selection.
6.15.4 Align Settings Fields on the Alignment Tests Dialog

Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each align settings field on
the Alignment Tests dialog box.
Laser On Time Specify how long, in milliseconds, that you want


Best Practice: Specify the same value as in the

Lasing on Time field.
Increment Size Specify the distance that the align X and Y values
move when you press the PG UP or PG DN (Y axis)
or HOME or END key (X axis) on the operator
station keyboard.


Document 41195-0510
Align on X Y Specify the target point for the laser when you
subsequently fire it.
Note: Changing this setting affects the

movement of the galvanometers.

F1-Test Verifiers Test fire the laser to test the verifiers.
The laser moves to the positions that you specify

in the Verify 1 X Y and Verify 2 X Y fields.
Once you run the test, record the peak values for
the active verifier.
Important: If you set the Verifier

Select field to NONE, you cannot
subsequently run the F1-Test
Verifiers test.
F2-Fire Test fire the laser to test alignment settings.
The laser uses the values that you specify in the

Lasing Power and Laser On Time fields and aims
at the point that you specify in the Align on
X Y field.
Warning: Before you run this test,

ensure that you and all personnel
are at a safe distance from the
focal lens.

Document 41195-0510
6.16 Profile Laser Dialog Box
Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F4 > F3
6.16.2 Diagram
You use the Profile Laser dialog box to locate and calibrate the
verifiers or test the laser and galvanometers.
Figure 6-15. Profile Laser Dialog Box
See Also: Calibrating the Verifiers describes how to calibrate the

verifiers in your Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
6.16.3 Fields on the Profile Laser Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Profile
Laser dialog box.
use in the test.



use in the test.
Best Practice: Specify BOTH in this field.


Best Practice: Specify a value between 1 and 5

milliseconds in this field.
Cooling Threshold Specify the temperature to which you want the

verifiers to drop between readings.

Lower temperatures increase the delay between

test runs.
ADC Reads to Avg Specify the number of analog-to-digital reads

(ADCs), that is, verifier position samples that you
want averaged to define the verifier position.
The value you specify acts as a noise filter to

eliminate any extreme readings.

500 ADCs inclusive in this field.

Document 41195-0510
Start X Y Specify the coordinates of the starting point on

each axis for the test.

4095 galvanometer steps inclusive in this field.
Note: You can profile only one verifier at a time.
Best Practice: Run only one verifier profile at a

time, as each test must run independently.
Specify the following values in this field:

Verifier Start X Start Y
Verifier 1 0 0
or
Verifier 2 2050 2050
End X Y Specify the coordinates of the ending point on

each axis for the test.

Specify the following values in this field:

Verifier End X End Y
or
Step Size Specify the distance, in galvanometer steps, at

which both galvanometers are to step or move
the laser beam for each point in the test.
To learn more about galvanometer steps, see

Galvanometer Step.

Note: The smaller the step size you specify, the

longer the scan takes and the more precise the
verifier location. Specifying a value less than 20
galvanometer steps does not increase the
precision of the test.
Calibrated Values Determine the positions of the verifiers at the

Verify 1 X Y highest actual values that the Lasetec II recorded
Verify 2 X Y during the last profile.
After running this test, you can enter the

displayed values in the Verify 1 X and Y fields
and Verify 2 X and Y fields.
Best Practice: Ignore the values that are

displayed for the other verifier on which you do
not run the test.

Document 41195-0510
Ver 1 and Ver 2 Determine the peak voltage that was recorded
Peak by the verifiers.
Best Practice: Ensure that the calibrated values

are valid by making sure that the corresponding
peak value exceeds 300.
Start Profile Run the profile or calibration test.

Document 41195-0510
6.17 Galvo Tests Dialog Box
Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F4 > F4 > Y or N
6.17.2 Diagram
You use the Galvo Tests dialog box to identify problems with the
galvanometers (galvos).
Figure 6-16. Galvo Test Dialog Box

Document 41195-0510
6.17.3 Fields on the Galvo Tests Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Galvo
Test dialog box.
Pattern Select the pattern that you want to use to test

the galvanometers.
This pattern represents the optical limits of the

Lasetec II, which you define when you configure
the system.
You can select one of the following patterns.
• Box
• Horizontal line
• Vertical line
• Diagonal line
• Circle or ellipse
Best Practice: When troubleshooting the failure

of a galvanometer, select a shape with both x
and y components (a box or a circle, for
example).
Size X Specify the width, in galvanometer steps, of the

pattern that you selected in the Pattern field.

Galvanometer Step.

4095 inclusive in this field. The larger the
number you specify, the wider the shape.
Best Practice: Specify between 400 and 1000

galvanometer steps in this field.
Size Y Specify the height, in galvanometer steps, of the

pattern that you selected in the Pattern field.

Galvanometer Step.
4095 inclusive in this field. The larger the
number you specify, the taller the shape.
Caution: Specify a value that is

less than 2050 in this field or you
might damage the galvanometers.
Best Practice: Specify between 400 and 1000

galvanometer steps in this field.

Document 41195-0510
X Center Specify the distance, in galvanometer steps, that

you want to move the pattern that you selected
in the Pattern field along the x-axis.

Galvanometer Step.
Default: The system uses the optical center of

the focal lens for this field by default.
Y Center Specify the distance, in galvanometer steps, that

you want to move the pattern that you selected
in the Pattern field along the y-axis.

Galvanometer Step.
Default: The system uses the optical center of

the focal lens for this field by default.
Vel (mm/s) Specify the velocity, or speed, in millimeters per

second at which the galvanometers are to run
during the test.

Best Practice: The more difficult a pattern is to
see during a test, the lower the value you need
to specify.
Pause (ms) Specify the length of time, in milliseconds, that

you want to pause the movement of both
galvanometers.

60000 seconds (that is, one minute) inclusive in
this field.
Power (W) Specify the wattage of the laser that you want to
use in the test.
Note: The value that you specify in this field only
works if you specify that the laser shutter is to
remain open when you run the test.

Run Test Run the test on the galvanometers.
Note: The test continues to run until you press

any key on your operator station keyboard.
Best Practice: Run the galvanometer test with the shutter

closed. This method allows the visible LED to display the galva-
nometer movement.

Document 41195-0510
6.18 Load/Save System Settings Dialog Box
6.18.2 Diagram
You use the Load/Save System Settings dialog box use to save,
erase, and load Lasetec II system software configurations.
Figure 6-17. Load/Save System Settings Dialog Box
6.18.3 Fields on the Load/Save System Settings Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Load/Save
System Settings dialog box.
Load User Settings Load the Lasetec II configuration settings that

you saved most recently.
Note: If you have not yet created and saved

configuration settings, the system loads the
default Lasetec II configuration settings that
Industrial Dynamics/filtec ships with the system.
The system displays the number of times that it

has saved configuration settings and the date
and time at which it saved the settings at the
bottom of the dialog box.
Save User Settings Save the currently-loaded configuration settings.
Note: When you select this option, the system

increments the number of times that it has saved
configuration settings and displays the date and
time at which it saved the settings at the bottom
of the dialog box.

Document 41195-0510
Clear Last Saved Erase the currently-loaded configuration

settings.

decreases the number of times that it has saved
configuration settings and displays the date and
time at which it saved the settings at the bottom
of the dialog box.
Load Installation Load the default Lasetec II configuration settings

Defaults that Industrial Dynamics/filtec ships with the
system.

keeps the configuration settings that you saved.
The system does not delete your previous set of
configuration settings.

Document 41195-0510
6.19 Setup Menu
Main Menu > F9 > F9
6.19.2 Diagram
You use the Setup Menu to display the Installation Menu, Config-
uration Menu, and the Computer Menu, which you use to install
and configure your Lasetec II, set computer parameters, and exit
to DOS.
You also use this menu and associated menus when you install
new equipment, repair equipment, and make significant changes
to your equipment.
Figure 6-18. Setup Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.19.3 Selections on the Setup Menu
Use this table to learn the purpose of each selection on the Setup
Menu.
F1 - Installation Menu Display the Installation Menu, which you use to

install and configure your Lasetec II.
F3 - Configuration Menu Display the Configuration Menu, which you use

to set parameters for the Lasetec II laser, delay,
optics, and verifiers.
F4 - Computer Menu Display the Computer Menu, which you use to

set communication and time parameters, specify
the language that you want to use on Lasetec II
screens, and display the versions of the system
software and firmware that the Lasetec II
currently uses.
F9 - Exit to DOS Stop and exit the Lasetec II system software and
display the DOS prompt.
Best Practice: Exit to DOS when you need to

update the Lasetec II system software.

coding process.

idle or marking.

Document 41195-0510
6.20 Installation Menu
6.20.2 Diagram
You use the Installation Menu to install and configure your

Lasetec II.
Figure 6-19. Installation Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.20.3 Selections on the Installation Menu

Installation Menu.
F2 - Calibrate Encoder Display the Calibrate Encoder dialog box, which

you use to calibrate an encoder with the Lasetec
II system software.
F4 - Tracking Settings Display the Tracking System Parameters dialog

box, which you use to specify the direction of
the containers that you intend to mark on the
conveyor or in the labeler, the orientation of the
Lasetec II in relation to the conveyor or labeler,
and delay parameters for the containers that you
intend to mark.
F5 - Thermal Settings Specify the temperatures to which you want to

set thermal-related parameters for the Lasetec
II.
F8 - Save Inst. Defaults Save the current settings that you have specified
on the Installation Menu.
Important: When you select this

option, the system overwrites all
previous settings. You cannot
retrieve previously-saved settings.

coding process.

idle or marking.

Document 41195-0510
6.21 Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box
6.21.2 Diagram
You use the Calibrate Encoder dialog box to calibrate an encoder

with the Lasetec II system software.
Figure 6-20. Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box
6.21.3 Ways to Calibrate the Encoder
You calibrate the Lasetec II encoder in one of two ways: pitch or

width. The particular method that you use depends on the type of
container that you intend to mark.
Use the following chart to determine the calibration method to

use to calibrate your encoder.
Use this calibration method... When...
Pitch You can bind two of the containers

together, and, at the same trigger point,
they maintain a consistent space, or gap,
between them.
Examples: Bottles and similar containers.
Width Each container that you intend to mark

generates a trigger signal that is equal to
or greater than 100 millimeters that the
container travels or that cannot be easily
bound together to calibrate the encoder.
Examples: Boxes and cartons.

Note: When using this method, ensure that
you have set the trigger sensor to leading
edge mode. Leading and Trailing Edge
describes leading edge in more detail.

Document 41195-0510
Best Practice: Whenever possible, use the pitch method rather
than the width method.
6.21.4 Fields on the Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Calibrate
Encoder dialog box.
Test Package Select the method that you want to use to

calibrate the encoder.
You can select Pitch or Width.
Current Enc. Res. Specify the encoder resolution that you want to
use.
See Also: The section Calibrating the Encoder

With the System Software tells you how to
Tested Enc. Res. Determine the value to type in the Current Enc.
Res. field.
The Lasetec II system displays a value in this

field each time that you select the Run Test
command. After you run a series of tests and
you’re satisfied with the value that the system
displays in this field, you enter the value that
the system displays in this field in the Current
Enc. Res. field.
Run Test and Accept Run a calibration test and, after you’ve run a
Test series of tests, accept the value that you type in
the Current Enc. Res. field.
The more times that you run a test, the more

precise the resolution that you obtain.

Document 41195-0510
6.22 Tracking System Parameters Dialog Box
6.22.2 Diagram
You use the Tracking System Parameters dialog box to calibrate

an encoder with the Lasetec II system software.
Figure 6-21. Tracking System Parameters Dialog Box
6.22.3 Fields on the Tracking System Parameters Dialog

Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Tracking
System Parameters dialog box.
Direction Specify the direction that the container is

travelling as it passes the Lasetec II.
This key toggles between Right and Left.

Document 41195-0510
Tracking Mode Select the tracking mode that you want to use.
You can select Dynamic, Indexed, or Static.
Important: Tracking modes are

described in more detail in the
section Tracking Mode in chapter
Lasetec II Concepts.
Encoder Res Specify, if you select Dynamic in the Tracking

Mode field, the encoder resolution.
The encoder resolution is the number of encoder

pulses that equals one centimeter of movement
(enc/cm) of the container that you are marking.

Trigger Delay Specify, in millimeters or number of packages,

the distance from the trigger to the center of the
focal lens.
Use this chart to determine the value to specify.
If you are Then measure the

using... distance...
Dynamic mode In millimeters, from the

center line of the trigger to
the center line of the focal
lens (that is, the red,
vertical line that the laser
displays on the conveyor or
labeler).
Note: The Lasetec II system

software internally reduces
the distance that you
measure for trigger delay
by 10 millimeters to enable
you to change lateral
positions more easily.
Indexed mode By the number of packages

that can fit between the
center line of the trigger
and the center line of the
lens (that is, the red,
vertical line that the laser
displays on the conveyor or
labeler surface).

See Also: The section Calculating the Trigger

Delay describes calculating the value that you
specify in this field in more detail.
Note: The Lasetec II system software adds the

values that you specify for Code Delay and
Trigger Delay to ensure that it marks the
product code at precisely the correct location.

Document 41195-0510
Index Trig Delay Specify, if you select Indexed in the Tracking

Mode field, the number of milliseconds that you
want the Lasetec II to wait before it marks the
container in the labeler.

Orientation Specify the orientation, in degrees, of the

Lasetec II in relation to the conveyor and the
direction of the conveyor.

180 degrees inclusive in this field.
See Also: The section Configuring the Tracking

Settings describes determining the value that
you specify in this field in more detail.
Reject Delay Specify, in milliseconds or number of packages,

the amount of time between the time at which
the Lasetec II encounters a verifier error and the
time at which it generates a reject signal.

End Reject Delay Specify the width, in millimeters or number of

packages, of the reject pulse.

Index Rej Delay Specify the amount of time that, when you are
using the indexed tracking mode, the system
adds to the value that you specify in the Reject
Delay field.
Note: The indexed reject delay does not affect

the reject delay when you use dynamic mode.

Conveyor Speed Determine the rate at which the conveyor is

moving, in meters per minute.
Encoder Counts Determine the number of times that the encoder

has incremented the counter.
Note: When the value of Encoder Counts

reaches 65535, the value resets to 0 and restarts
the count.
6.22.4 Diagram: How Direction and Orientation Interrelate
Use this diagram to learn more about how the values that you
specify for the Direction and Orientation fields interrelate and
define how your Lasetec II print head or print heads are
positioned at your location.

Document 41195-0510
If your installation includes two or more print heads, with one
print head on each side of the conveyor, one print head is left
and the other is right.
No. Description
1 Conveyor
2 Lasetec II print head
3 Target (either a label or a container)
4 Direction left Orientation 0 degrees
5 Direction right Orientation 0 degrees
6 Direction left Orientation 180 degrees
7 Direction right Orientation 180 degrees
Figure 6-22. How Direction and Orientation Interrelate

Document 41195-0510
6.23 Thermal System Parameters Dialog Box
6.23.2 Diagram
You use the Thermal System Parameters dialog box to specify

the temperatures to which you want to set thermal-related
parameters for the Lasetec II.
Figure 6-23. Thermal System Parameters Dialog Box
6.23.3 Fields on the Thermal System Parameters Dialog

Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Thermal
CPU OverTemp Setpoint Determine the temperature, in degrees Celsius,

at which the Lasetec II shuts down its central
processing unit to cool.
When the central processing unit cools to the

ideal range, the Lasetec II restarts.
Range: The ideal operating temperature of the

CPU in the Lasetec II is 30 to 60 degrees Celsius.

Document 41195-0510
Air On Temp Specify the temperature, in degrees Celsius, that

you want the Lasetec II to activate the
compressed air cooling system to cool the
marking engine.

degrees inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify 35 degrees Celsius.
Important: If the temperature of

the marking engine rises to 70
degrees Celsius, the Lasetec II
shuts down the entire system.
Air Off Temp Specify the temperature, in degrees Celsius, at

which you want the Lasetec II to deactivate the
compressed air cooling system.

degrees inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify a value that is one degree
less than the value that you specify in the Air On
Temp field.
Air Knife On Time Specify the amount of time, in seconds, after the
Lasetec II detects the trigger that you want the
air knife to continue to blow away debris from
the Lasetec II lens with compressed air from the
cooling system.

100.0 degrees inclusive in this field.
Important: To disable the air

knife, specify zero in this field.
System Temp The current temperature inside the Lasetec II

enclosure.
Note: If the temperature exceeds the ideal

range, the Lasetec II generates a warning
message.

Document 41195-0510
6.24 Configuration Menu
6.24.2 Diagram
You use the Configuration Menu to set parameters for the

Lasetec II laser, delay, optics, and verifiers.
Figure 6-24. Configuration Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.24.3 Selections on the Configuration Menu

Configuration Menu.
Caution: Industrial Dynamics/filtec sets these parameters at

the factory. Change these parameters only if you are trained by
You can potentially slow or adversely affect production and
system performance if you change these fields incorrectly.
F1 - Laser Settings Display the Laser System Parameters dialog

box, which you use to tune the physical
characteristics of the Lasetec II laser.
F2 - Delay Settings Display the Delay System Parameters dialog

box, which you use to improve the formation of
characters that the laser marks on containers by
fine tuning the laser firing and segment location.
F3 - Optics Settings Display the Optical System Parameters dialog

box, which you use to define characteristics of
the currently installed lens and galvanometers.
F4 - Verifier Settings Display the Verification Parameters dialog box,

which you use to program settings for the
verifier.


coding process.

idle or marking.

Document 41195-0510
6.25 Laser System Parameters Dialog Box
6.25.2 Diagram
You use the Laser System Parameters dialog box to tune the
physical characteristics of the laser in the Lasetec II.
Figure 6-25. Laser System Parameters Dialog Box
6.25.3 Fields on the Laser System Parameters Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Laser
Laser Power Specify the maximum power setting, in watts,

for the laser in the Lasetec II system.
During the manufacturing process, Industrial

Dynamics/filtec measures the power of the
laser. As the characteristics of each laser differ
slightly, the maximum power setting varies from
laser to laser.

Best Practice: As your particular laser ages and

its maximum power diminishes, reduce the laser
power setting.
The Lasetec II system software automatically

compensates for any power loss, and, as a result,
you won’t need to adjust product codes by hand.
Examples: If you are using a 30-watt Lasetec II

and you set the value in this field to 30 watts,
the laser signal shows a 33 percent duty cycle.
If you are using a 60-watt Lasetec II and you set

the value in this field to 45 watts, the laser
signal shows a 75 percent duty cycle.

Document 41195-0510
Laser Frequency Specify, in hertz (Hz), the frequency of the laser

that you want in the Lasetec II.
Range: You can specify a value between 2500

and 65535 Hz inclusive in this field.
Important: Industrial
Dynamics/filtec sets the
frequency of the laser at the
factory.
Change the laser frequency only if

you are trained by Industrial
Dynamics/filtec.
Best Practice: Specify 15000 Hz in this field.

Document 41195-0510
6.26 Delay System Parameters Dialog Box
6.26.2 Definition: Segment
A segment is a single, continuous line that forms a part of a

character. Some characters contain one segment and others
contain several. The number and size of each segment is deter-
mined by the font and style of each character.
6.26.3 Diagram
You use the Delay System Parameters dialog box to improve the
formation of characters that the Lasetec II marks on containers
by fine tuning the laser firing and segment location.
Change these parameters only if the Lasetec II is marking

characters incompletely or if the material that you are marking is
sensitive and teardrop shaped marks or burn marks appear.
Figure 6-26. Delay System Parameters Dialog Box
6.26.4 Definition: Power Ramping
Before you specify values in the Pwr Ramp On Dly, Pwr Ramp
On, and Pwr Ramp Off fields on the Delay System Parameters
dialog box, you need to understand what power ramping is.
Power ramping is the gradual application of power from the laser

in the Lasetec II to a container.

Document 41195-0510
6.26.5 How Power Ramping Works
The Lasetec II laser tube obtains power control for the laser by a
modulated control signal. The ratio between highs and lows in
that control signal defines the power output of the laser tube.
The ramping functions perform consistently at any target power
setting.
The following diagram illustrates power ramping parameters.
2 2
3 3
4
A B 5
1 1
No. Description
A Without power ramping
B With power ramping
1 Point at which power is applied
2 Duration of 100 percent power
3 Point at which power is removed
4 Power on ramp
5 Power off ramp
Figure 6-27. Concepts of Power Ramping
You use power ramping because the galvanometers do not move

instantaneously when the Lasetec II issues a command, ramping
allows the distribution of energy to the laser to more closely
match the motion of the galvanometers.
Best Practice: If you intend to mark energy sensitive materials

such as polyethylene terephthalate (PET), use power ramping. If
you intend to mark other materials, you might not need to use
power ramping.

Document 41195-0510
6.26.6 Fields on the Delay System Parameters Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Delay

Begin Seg Delay Specify the delay, in microseconds (µsec),

between the moment that the Lasetec II issues
the laser fire command and the moment that the
Lasetec II issues the galvanometer draw
command.
Because high speed galvanometers can react
more quickly than the laser, they must wait (be
delayed) for the laser to get started.

2000 microseconds inclusive in this field.
Best Practice: Specify 10 microseconds in this

field.
End Seg Delay Specify the delay, in microseconds (µsec), that

the Lasetec II is to wait for the galvanometer to
reach the last commanded position before
turning off the laser and issuing the next move
command.
If you specify an end segment delay that is too

short, the laser turns off before the end of the
segment is complete (and draws shortened lines
or arcs). If you specify an end segment delay that
is too long, the end segment begins to show
excess energy marks, such as teardrops or dot
shapes, at the end of a segment.

Best Practice: If your Lasetec II includes a

high-speed galvanometer, specify 125 to 150
microseconds in this field. If your Lasetec II
includes an ultra high-speed galvanometer,
specify 50 to 75 microseconds in this field.

Document 41195-0510
Inter Seg Delay Specify the delay, in microseconds (µsec), that

the Lasetec II is to wait for the galvanometer to
reach the last commanded position before
issuing the next command, which is another draw
command rather than a move command.
Example: The number zero (0) consists of four

lines and four arcs, but is one segment. At the
end of each line or arc the Lasetec II pauses
before issuing a directional change command.
The Lasetec II uses the amount of the directional
change to calculate the Intersegment delay.
For sharp turns, such as the apex of the letter A,

the laser uses the full intersegment delay. If the
delay that you specify is too short, the laser
rounds corners excessively. If the delay that you
specify is too long, excess energy marks, such as
teardrops or dot shapes, appear at the corners.


includes an ultra high speed galvanometer,
X Slope Specify the number of nanoseconds per

galvanometer step (ns/step) that you want the
Lasetec II to add to the delay that you specify in
the X Offset field as the Lasetec II increases the
step size of move commands.
Example: Consequently, if the Lasetec II moves

the galvanometer from, say, only one character
to another, it adds a smaller calculated X slope
value to the X offset delay, as it moves fewer
steps. If the Lasetec II moves the galvanometer
from the end of a line to the beginning, it adds a
larger calculated X slope value, as it moves more
steps.
If the value that you specify in this field is too

small, the first character of a line might have a
flag or tail in the first segment of the first
character, but other characters look fine. If the
value that you specify is too large, the product
code looks fine, but the Lasetec II wastes time
waiting to start marking.

50000 nanoseconds per step inclusive in this
field.

high-speed galvanometer, specify 400 to 500 in
this field. If your Lasetec II includes an ultra
high-speed galvanometer, specify 600 to 800 in
this field.

Document 41195-0510
X Offset Specify the amount of time, in microseconds

(µsec), that you want the Lasetec II to take
between move commands and starting the laser
for the next draw command.

small, the Lasetec II draws most characters with
flags or tails at the beginning of their first
segment. If the value that you specify is too
large, the product code looks fine, but the
Lasetec II wastes time waiting to start marking.


includes an ultra high speed galvanometer,
Pwr Ramp On Dly Specify the amount of time, in microseconds

(µsec), between the time at which the Lasetec II
commands the galvanometer to move and time
at which power ramping is to begin.
The galvanometers move a short time after they

receive a move command from the Lasetec II.
During this lag time, any laser energy that the
Lasetec II distributes is focused into a single dot
or teardrop at the beginning of a segment.

small, the beginning of segments contain
significantly visible dots or deepened marks. If
the value that you specify is too large, the
beginning of the segment shortens and dots of
lessened contrast might appear as well,
depending on the value that you specify in the
Pwr Ramp On field.


high-speed galvanometer, specify 0
microseconds for no power ramping delay, 50
microseconds for a medium power ramping
delay, and 100 microseconds for the maximum
power ramping delay in this field. If your Lasetec
II includes an ultra high speed galvanometer,
specify 0 microseconds for no power ramping
delay or 25 microseconds for the power ramping
delay.

Document 41195-0510
Pwr Ramp On Specify the amount of time, in microseconds

(µsec), that you want the Lasetec II to take to
ramp up power to the laser from zero power to
full or target power.
If the value that you specify is too small, the dot

at the beginning of a segment remains. If the
value that you specify is too large, the beginning
of a segment consists of a thin line that gradually
thickens to complete thickness as the Lasetec II
forms the segment.


microseconds for no power ramping on, 100
microseconds for a medium power ramping on,
and 200 microseconds for the maximum power
ramping on in this field.
If your Lasetec II includes an ultra high speed

galvanometer, specify 0 microseconds for no
power ramping or 100 microseconds for the
power ramping on.
Pwr Ramp Off Specify the amount of time, in microseconds

(µsec), that you want the Lasetec II to take to
ramp down power to the laser from full or target
power to zero power.
The value that you specify in the End Seg Delay

field deactivates the laser before the
galvanometer stops. However, the value you
specify in the End Seg Delay field is less critical
in the overall power ramping scheme.

Best Practice: If you are marking a material

other than PET or if your Lasetec II includes a
microseconds for no power ramping off, 25
microseconds for a medium power ramping off,
and 50 microseconds for the maximum power
ramping off in this field.
If your Lasetec II includes an ultra high speed

galvanometer, specify 0 microseconds for no
power ramping off or 25 microseconds for the
power ramping off.

Document 41195-0510
6.26.7 Guidelines: Setting Delays for Fast or Precise
Operation
Use these charts to determine the ideal values to which to set

delay system parameters to achieve fast or precise operation of
your Lasetec II system.
High Speed Ultra High Speed
Fast Precise Fast Precise

Begin Seg Delay 10 10 10 10 microseconds
End Seg Delay 125 150 50 75 microseconds
Inter Seg Delay 50 75 10 25 microseconds
X Slope 400 500 600 800 nanoseconds
per step
X Offset 200 250 50 75 microseconds
High Speed Ultra High Speed
No Ramp Medium Ramp High Ramp No Ramp Ramp On

Pwr Ramp On Dly 0 50 100 0 25 microseconds
Pwr Ramp On 0 100 200 0 100 microseconds
Pwr Ramp Off 0 25 50 0 25 microseconds
Important: The value that you specify for Pwr Ramp Off Dly
plus the value that you specify for Pwr Ramp Off must equal
End Seg Delay (Pwr Ramp Off Dly + Pwr Ramp Off =
End Seg Delay). For example, 275 + 50 = 325.

Document 41195-0510
6.27 Optical System Parameters Dialog Box
6.27.2 Diagram
You use the Optical System Parameters dialog box to change

characteristics of the focal lens and the galvanometers.
Figure 6-28. Optical System Parameters Dialog Box
6.27.3 Fields on the Optical System Parameters Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Optical


Document 41195-0510
X Field Limit Specify, in millimeters, the standard horizontal

Y Field Limit and vertical field limit for the focal lens that is
installed in the Lasetec II.
Range: Although you can specify a value

between 0 and 1000 millimeters inclusive in
these fields, if your Lasetec II uses a standard
lens that is set to the correct focal distance, the
lens field is practically limited to 50 millimeters.
Best Practice: In the X Field Limit field, specify

50 millimeters. In the Y Field Limit field, specify
25 millimeters.
X Galvo Range Specify, in degrees, the maximum angle of the

Y Galvo Range galvanometers on the x- and y-axis from stop to
stop.

between 20 and 75 degrees inclusive in these
fields, the galvanometers are mechanically
limited to a 40 degree range.
Best Practice: Specify 40 degrees in this field.
X Aperture Specify, in degrees, the maximum angle through

Y Aperture the lens on the x- and y-axis from stop to stop.

between 10 and 75 degrees inclusive in these
fields, if your Lasetec II uses a standard lens, the
lens aperture is mechanically limited to 20
degrees.
If the laser beam that passes through the lens

exceeds this range, the laser beam is distorted
and might not produce the result that you want.
Best Practice: Specify 20 degrees in this field.
X Aperture Size Specify, in millimeters, the size of the focal lens

Y Aperture Size aperture.

between 10 and 1000 millimeters inclusive in
these fields, if your Lasetec II uses a standard
lens, the lens aperture size is mechanically
limited to 68 millimeters.
Best Practice: Specify 68 millimeters in this

field.
X Pin Cushion Compensate for, and essentially correct,

pincushion error, which causes the focal lens to
produce a barreling effect of the marked product
code.
Best Practice: Although you can specify a value

between 0 and 10000 inclusive in this field,
specify 750.

Document 41195-0510
6.28 Verification Parameters Dialog Box
6.28.2 Introduction
The Lasetec II monitors and verifies that the laser is operating

correctly by firing the laser at the verifier sensors. The Lasetec II
then measures the laser energy with the two verifier cards that
are mounted on the galvanometer assembly.
6.28.3 Diagram
You use the Verification Parameters dialog box to program

settings for the verifiers.
Figure 6-29. Verification Parameters Dialog Box

Document 41195-0510
6.28.4 Fields on the Verification Parameters Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Verifi-
cation Parameters dialog box.
use in the verification test.



use in the verification test.
You can specify Ver1 for verifier 1, Ver2 for

verifier 2, NONE, or BOTH.
The system uses BOTH by default.

to activate the laser during the verification test.

Best Practice: Specify a value between one and

five milliseconds.
Verify Threshold Specify the minimum value that the verifier must
receive to confirm the detection of the laser.

ADC Reads to Avg Specify the number of verifier position samples

that you want averaged to define the verifier
position.
The value you specify acts as a noise filter to

eliminate any extreme readings.

Align on new PCF Choose whether you want the Lasetec II to:
• Activate the focus and alignment LEDs each

time the operator selects a new product
code.
• Shine one or two red dots on whatever is in
the Lasetec II laser’s line of sight.
• Display a dialog box that prompts the
operator to verify the focus and alignment.
This key toggles between On and Off. The
system uses On by default.

Document 41195-0510
Verify 1 X Y Specify the location of the verifier targets.

Verify 2 X Y
4095 inclusive in these fields.
Best Practice: Specify the following values in

this field:
Verifier X Y
Ver1 950 1050
Ver2 3150 3050

Document 41195-0510
6.29 Computer Menu
6.29.2 Diagram
You use the Computer Menu to set communication and time

parameters, set up a communication link between the Lasetec II
and an external system, specify the language that you want to
use on Lasetec II screens, and display the versions of the system
software and firmware that the Lasetec II currently uses.
Figure 6-30. Computer Menu

Document 41195-0510
6.29.3 Selections on the Computer Menu

Computer Menu.
F1 - Comm. Settings Display the Communication Parameters dialog

box, which you use to set up communications
between master and slave Lasetec II systems or
the Lasetec II, a host, or programmable logic
controller.
F2 - Time Settings Display the Date & Time Settings dialog box,
which you use to
F3 - Languages Display a list of languages from which you select

the language that you want used on all Lasetec II
system software screens.
At present, languages that you can select

include:
• English
• French
• German
• Spanish
• Danish
• Portuguese
• Russian
• Polish
F7 - Help, About Display the About Lasetec II dialog box, which

you use to determine the version of the Lasetec
II system software and firmware that you are
using.


coding process.

idle or marking.

Document 41195-0510
6.30 Communication Parameters Dialog Box
6.30.2 Diagram
You use the Communication Parameters dialog box to configure

communication between the Lasetec II and another Lasetec II or
system.
See Also: The section Wiring Another Lasetec II to Your Lasetec II

describes how to set up and configure Lasetec II systems in a
master and slave configuration. The section Connecting a Host
Computer System to Your Lasetec II describes how to set up and
configure the Lasetec II as a client to a host computer system.
Figure 6-31. Communication Parameters Dialog Box
6.30.3 Fields on the Communication Parameters Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Communi-
cation Parameters dialog box.
Host/Master/Slave Select how you want to set up and configure your

Config Lasetec II.
You can specify Single, Master, Slave, Host

Port, or Master/w Host in this field.

Document 41195-0510
8 Bit, Even Parity, 1 Remind yourself that the communication

Stop between your Lasetec II and any other system is
asynchronous serial, at 9600 baud, 8-bit, even
parity, 1 stop bit.
This field is intended to provide information

only.
Master/Slave Comm Port Select the communication port for which you
want to set communication parameters for the
master or the slave Lasetec II.
Range: You can select either COM1 or COM2 in

this field.
Best Practice: Select COM2, as you can set up

and configure this port more easily to connect
two Lasetec II systems with a serial cable.
Important: You cannot select the

same communication port in both
the Master/Slave Comm Port and
the Host Port Comm Port field.
Master/Slave Baud Rate Select the baud rate for the master or the slave
Lasetec II that you want to use.
Range: You can select 9600, 19200, 38400,

57600, or 115200 in this field.
The system uses a baud rate of 9600 by default.
Host Port Comm Port Select the communication port for which you
want to set communication parameters for the
host system that you want to use with the
Lasetec II.
Range: You can select either COM1 or COM2 in

this field.
Best Practice: Select COM1, as the COM1 port

uses a DB9 connector.
Important: You cannot select the

same communication port in both
the Master/Slave Comm Port and
the Host Port Comm Port field.
Host Port Baud Rate Select the baud rate for the master Lasetec II
and the host system that you want to use.
Range: You can select 9600, 19200, 38400,

57600, or 115200 in this field.
The system uses a baud rate of 9600 by default.

Document 41195-0510
Host Port Comm Spec Select the type of communication that you want
to configure between your Lasetec II and the
host.
Range: You can select Standard or Enhanced in

this field.
Best Practice: Select Standard, which the

system uses by default.

Document 41195-0510
6.31 Date & Time Settings Dialog Box
6.31.2 Diagram
You use the Date & TIme Settings dialog box to modify the time
and date of your Lasetec II system.
Figure 6-32. Date & Time Settings Dialog Box
6.31.3 Fields on the Date & Time Settings Dialog Box
Use this table to learn the purpose of each field on the Date &
Time Settings dialog box.
Important: The Lasetec II does not automatically adjust for

daylight savings time, if you observe it at your location. You
must adjust the system time yourself to compensate.
08-31-2009 9:04:25 See the current date and time.
The Lasetec II system software displays this

information for your reference.
Year Specify the year to which you want to set the

system clock.

Document 41195-0510
Month Specify the month to which you want to set the

system clock.
Day Specify the day to which you want to set the

system clock.
Hours Specify the hour to which you want to set the

system clock.
Minutes Specify the minute to which you want to set the

system clock.
Seconds Specify the second to which you want to set the

system clock.
ClockSelect Specify the real-time, battery-powered clock

chip from which you want your Lasetec II system
to get the current system time.
• Complementary Metal Oxide Semiconductor

(CMOS) chip, which is located on the
Lasetec system’s PC/104 central processing
unit card.
• Lasetec chip, which is located on the
Lasetec system’s marking engine card.
ScreenSaver Specify the amount of time, in minutes, that you

want to elapse before the Lasetec system’s
screen saver starts.
The screen saver continues to run until the

operator presses a key on the operator station
keyboard or the Lasetec II generates a diagnostic
message.
Note: Disable the screen saver by specifying the

value 0 in this field.

Document 41195-0510
6.32 Languages Dialog Box
6.32.2 Diagram
You use the Languages dialog box to select the language that you
want used on all Lasetec II system software screens.
Figure 6-33. Languages Dialog Box
6.32.3 Languages That You Can Select
At present, the following languages are available.
• English
• French
• German
• Spanish
• Danish
• Portuguese
• Russian
• Polish

Document 41195-0510
6.33 About Lasetec II Dialog Box
6.33.2 Diagram
You use the About Lasetec II dialog box to determine the version
of the Lasetec II system software and firmware that you are
using.
Figure 6-34. About Lasetec II Dialog Box

Document 41195-0510
Document 41195-0510
7. Configuring Your Lasetec II
Once you’ve installed the Lasetec II and learned how to use the
Lasetec II system software, you’re ready to align the print head
and configure the Lasetec II with the system software.
This chapter tells you how to align the print head and configure
your Lasetec II. Drawings and schematics that you might need are
supplied in the Lasetec II Drawing Pack.
Configuring Your Lasetec II 7-1

Document 41195-0510
7.1 Aligning the Print Head
7.1.1 Steps
Follow these steps to set the print head to the correct focal
length and align the print head perpendicularly to the conveyor
or labeler.
Important: The drift tolerance for the focal length of the print
head is 0.25 inch or 6 millimeters. Align the print head carefully
and precisely.
1. Verify that the guide rails are aligned correctly.
If you change the position of a guide rail after you align the
print head, you might cause alignment problems later.
2. Place a sample container on the conveyor or in the labeler

at the precise position at which it will be located during
production.
3. Use the following chart to determine where to position the

print head.
If you’re using a... And the diameter of the lens is... Position the print head... According to drawing...
30-watt Lasetec II 3.9 inches or 100 millimeters 4.25 inches or 108

millimeters from the
container
I00768
5.9 inches or 150 millimeters 6.25 inches or 159
millimeters from the area
on the container that you
intend to mark
60-watt Lasetec II 3.9 inches or 100 millimeters 4.25 inches or 108

millimeters from the
container
I00781
5.9 inches or 150 millimeters 6.25 inches or 159
millimeters from the area
on the container that you
intend to mark
4. Ensure that your Lasetec II is turned on.
5. At the operator station, display the Lasetec II Main Menu.
6. On the operator station keyboard, press the F9 function key

button.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system selects the F9 - Advanced Features
option on the Main Menu and displays the Advanced Menu.
7. On the Advanced Menu, select F8 - Maintenance Menu.
Result: The system displays the Maintenance Menu.
8. On the Maintenance Menu, select F2 - System I/O Display.
Result: The system displays the System Inputs and Outputs

dialog box.
Figure 7-1. System Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box
9. Change the values in the Focus LED’s field from Off and A
(automatic) to On and M (manual).
Result: Depending on how well you aligned the print head,

two red dots appear on or close to the container that you
placed on the conveyor or in the labeler.
Caution: These red dots are not dangerous. As with any intense
light source, however, avoid looking directly into the light
source.

Document 41195-0510
10. Use the following chart to determine what to do next to
focus the laser.
If you mounted And the surface of the Then...

the print head... container to be marked is...
Vertically Flat, such as a box or carton 1. Move the print head on its mount slowly towards or
away from the container until the two red dots merge
into one dot.
Result: The print head is positioned correctly at the
ideal focal length.
No. Description
1 Move the two dots towards each
other
2 When the dots merge into one,
the print head is positioned
correctly
Curved, such as a bottle Since the focal point of the container is just inside the
point along the bottle’s curvature that is closest to the
laser, it is impossible to merge the dots at the correct focal
point, follow these steps to compensate.
1. Move the print head on its mount slowly towards or

away from the product until the two red dots merge
into one red dot.
2. Continue to move the print head towards the container
until the dots separate approximately 1.5 millimeters.
No. Description
1 Move the two dots towards each other until...
2 The dots merge into one
3 After the dots merge into one, continue moving
them through each other until the are about 1.5
millimeters apart

Document 41195-0510
If you mounted And the surface of the Then...
the print head... container to be marked is...
Horizontally Either flat or curved 1. Align the dots over the area on the container that you
intend to mark.
2. If necessary, slide the support pipe up or down on the
mounting base tripod.
1
2
No. Description
1 Lens/laser beam
2 Slide he mount in or out until you
determine the correct position
11. Measure the distance from each of the front corners of the
print head to the conveyor or labeler.
No. Description
1 Ensure that the distance from each
corner of Lasetec II to the labeler is
the same
2 Ensure that the distance from each
corner of Lasetec II to conveyor is the
same
3 Ensure that the Lasetec II is 90 1
degrees, or perpendicular, to the
conveyor
3 2

Document 41195-0510
12. Do the measurements you made match exactly?
If yes, as the print head is perpendicular to the conveyor or

labeler, proceed to the next step.
If no, as the print head is not perpendicular to the conveyor

or labeler, repeat from step 1.
13. Once you are certain that the print head is aligned
correctly, using a marker, mark the hole in the floor mount
on the floor where the mounting insert will go.
14. Use the following table to determine the procedures to

follow to successfully secure your Lasetec II to the floor.
If you are installing the... Refer to drawing...

Document 41195-0510
7.2 Configuring Your Lasetec II With the
System Software
After you install the Lasetec II, you need to configure your
Lasetec II with the system software. You configure your Lasetec II
with the system software only once.
7.2.1 Flow Chart
need to complete to configure your Lasetec II with the system
software.
Calibrate the encoder
Configure tracking
Configure the trigger distance
Configure the tracking mode
Figure 7-2. Configuring Your Lasetec II With the System

Software

Document 41195-0510
7.3 Calibrating the Encoder With the System
Software
If you installed an encoder with your Lasetec II, you need to

calibrate the encoder with the system software.
You calibrate the encoder in one of two ways: pitch or width. The
particular method that you use depends on the type of container
that you intend to mark.
See Also: The section Ways to Calibrate the Encoder describes

how to determine the method to use.
7.3.1 Steps: Pitch Method
Follow these steps to calibrate the encoder with the system

software by using the pitch method.
1. Gather several samples of production containers that you

intend to mark with your Lasetec II.
2. Tape two of the containers together and measure, in milli-

meters, the distance between the same point on both, as
described in the following diagram.
No. Description 4 3
1 Tape two containers together so that
they are touching, have a gap
between them at the trigger point,
and maintain a consistent distance
from each other
2 If the containers are clear at the
2
trigger point, place a piece of
opaque tape around the containers
at that point to provide a clear
trigger signal
3 At the trigger point, in millimeters,
measure from the leading edge of
the first container... 1
4 ...to the leading edge of the second
container
You can also measure from trailing

edge to trailing edge
Figure 7-3. Measuring the Pitch Distance

Document 41195-0510
3. Place the fixed sample containers on the production line far
enough upstream of the Lasetec II so that they will be
positioned correctly and traveling at maximum production
speed as they pass through the coding area.
4. Back at the operator station, display the Lasetec II Main

Menu.
5. On the operator station keyboard, press the F9 function key.

option and displays the Advanced Menu.
6. On the Advanced Menu, select F9 - Setup Menu.
Result: The system displays the Setup Menu.
7. On the Setup Menu, select F2 - Installation Menu.
Result: The system displays the Installation Menu.
8. On the Installation Menu, select F2 - Calibrate Encoder.
9. Result: The system displays the Calibrate Encoder dialog

box and highlights the Test Package field.
1
No. Description
1 Calibrate Encoder dialog
box, showing Pitch in the
Test Package field
Figure 7-4. Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box Showing Pitch
10. On the operator station keyboard, press the ENTER key.
The Test Package field displays Pitch and Width in a pop-up

window.
11. Select Pitch.
Important: Do not select Accept yet.

You need to select Run Test before you select Accept. If you
select Accept before Run Test, the system automatically sets
the encoder calibration value to 1 by default.

Document 41195-0510
12. Select Run Test.
13. Start and run the conveyor at production speed.
When the container passes by the trigger and through the

coding area, the system calculates and displays a value in
the Tested Enc. Res. (tested encoder resolution) field.
14. Retrieve the sample containers and repeat from step 3

several times to verify the consistency of the tested encoder
resolution.
15. When you are satisfied with the calibration of the encoder,
on the Calibrate Encoder dialog box, select Accept by
pressing ENTER on the operator station keyboard.
Result: You have successfully calibrated the encoder.
16. Restart your Lasetec II.
7.3.2 Steps: Width Method
Follow these steps to calibrate the encoder with the system

software by using the width method.
1. Gather some samples of the production container that you

intend to mark with your Lasetec II.
2. Ensure that you have set up the trigger sensor so that it

senses the leading edge of containers, that is, it is set to
leading edge, dark on mode.
See Also: Leading and Trailing Edge describes this concept.
3. Is the container large enough to block the trigger at least 4

inches, or 100 millimeters?
If yes, go to the next step.
If no, use a false or dummy container that blocks the trigger

at least 4 inches or 100 millimeters.
4. Measure, in millimeters, the width of the container at the

point where it intersects the trigger, known as the width at
trigger point.

Document 41195-0510
1
No. Description
1 Width of the container where the trigger
intersects the container—in this case, the
width of the face of the container
Figure 7-5. Measure the Width of the Container at the Trigger

Point
5. Place the sample container on the production line far

enough upstream of the Lasetec II so that it will be
positioned correctly and traveling at maximum production
speed as they pass through the coding area.
6. Back at the operator station, display the Lasetec II Main

Menu.

button.

option and displays the Advanced Menu.
10. On the Installation Menu, select F2 - Calibrate Encoder.

Document 41195-0510
11. Result: The system displays the Calibrate Encoder dialog
box and highlights the Test Package field.
1
No. Description
1 Calibrate Encoder dialog
box, showing Width in
the Test Package field
Figure 7-6. Calibrate Encoder Dialog Box Showing Width
12. On the operator station keyboard, press the ENTER key.
The Test Package field displays Pitch and Width in a pop-up

window.
13. Select Width.
Important: Do not select Accept yet.

You need to select Run Test before you select Accept. If you
select Accept before Run Test, the system automatically sets
the encoder calibration value to 1 by default.
14. Select Run Test.
15. Start and run the conveyor at production speed.
When the container passes by the trigger and through the

coding area, the system calculates and displays a value in
the Tested Enc. Res. (tested encoder resolution) field.
16. Retrieve the sample containers and repeat from step 5

several times to verify the consistency of the tested encoder
resolution.
17. When you are satisfied with the calibration of the encoder,
on the Calibrate Encoder dialog box, select Accept by
pressing ENTER on the operator station keyboard.
Result: You have successfully calibrated the encoder.
18. Restart your Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
7.4 Calculating the Trigger Delay
7.4.1 Steps: Calculating the Trigger Delay
Follow these steps to calculate the trigger delay.

button.

4. On the Maintenance Menu, select F4 - Test Menu.
Result: The system displays the Test Menu.
5. On the Test Menu, select F4 - Misc. Galvo Tests.
Result: The system displays the following user alert.
6. Type N for No.
Result: The system displays the Galvo Tests dialog box and
highlights the Pattern field.
7. On the operator station keyboard, press ENTER.
Result: The system displays a list of patterns that you can

select.
8. Use the arrow keys to select Vertical Line and press ENTER.
9. Use the TAB key to select Run Test.
Result: The laser displays a harmless, red, vertical line on

the conveyor or labeler surface.

Document 41195-0510
10. Use the following chart and diagram to calculate the trigger
delay based on the tracking mode that you intend to use.
See Also: The section Types of Tracking Modes describes the

different tracking modes.
If you are using... Then measure the distance...
Dynamic mode In millimeters, from the center line of the trigger

to the center line of the focal lens (that is, the
red, vertical line that the laser displays on the
conveyor or labeler surface).
Note: The Lasetec II system software internally

reduces the distance that you measure for
trigger delay by 10 millimeters to enable you to
change lateral positions more easily.
Indexed mode By the number of packages that can fit between

the center line of the trigger and the center line
of the lens (that is, the red, vertical line that the
laser displays on the conveyor or labeler
surface).
No. Description
1 Center line of the trigger
2 Center line of the lens
3 Center line of the trigger to the center line of the lens:
• If you are using dynamic mode, measure the

distance in millimeters
• If you are using indexed mode, measure the
distance in the number of containers that can fit 3
between the two center lines
1 2

Document 41195-0510
7.5 Configuring the Tracking Settings
7.5.1 Steps: Displaying the Tracking System Parameters

Dialog Box
Follow these steps to display the Tracking System Parameters

dialog box.

button.

5. Select F4 - Tracking Settings.
Result: The system displays the Tracking System Param-

eters dialog box and highlights the Direction field.
Tracking System Parameters Dialog Box describes the

fields on this dialog box in detail.

Document 41195-0510
7.5.2 Steps: Configuring Direction, Mode, Resolution,
Delay, and Orientation
Follow these steps to configure the first set of tracking settings of

your Lasetec II.
1. Use the following diagram to determine how you want the

laser to mark your container, that is, which direction and
orientation that you want to specify on the Tracking System
Parameters dialog box.
1 Lasetec II print head

No. Description
3 4
1 Orientation of the Lasetec II
is 180 degrees
2 Orientation of the Lasetec II
is 0 degrees ABCD ABCD
3 Direction of containers is
towards the right
4 Direction of the containers
is towards the left
Lasetec II print head
2
Figure 7-7. Determining the Direction and Orientation
2. On the operator station keyboard, press the ENTER key until

the direction that you want, either Right or Left, is
displayed in the Direction field.
3. On the operator station keyboard, press the TAB key until

the Tracking Mode field is highlighted.
4. On the keyboard, use the ENTER key to select the tracking

mode that you want.
5. On the keyboard, press the TAB key until the Trigger Delay
field is highlighted.
6. Type the value that you calculated in Calculating the Trigger

Delay.
7. On the keyboard, press the TAB key until the Index Trig
Delay field is highlighted.
8. Type the delay, in milliseconds, that you want.

Document 41195-0510
9. On the keyboard, press the TAB key until the Orientation
field is highlighted.
10. Use the diagram in Figure 7-7 to determine the orientation

that you want and type the value in the Orientation field.
7.5.3 Steps: Configuring Delay Settings
Follow these steps to configure the second set of tracking settings

of your Lasetec II.
1. Highlight the Reject Delay field and enter the delay that
you want.
2. Highlight the End Reject Delay field and enter the delay
that you want.
3. Highlight the Index Reject Delay field and enter the delay
that you want.
4. On the keyboard, press the ESC key.
Result: The system closes the Tracking System Parameters

dialog box.
5. On your keyboard, press the F8 key to select F8 - Save Inst.

Defaults.
Result: The system displays the following status window.
Best Practice: Write down and file for later reference all values
that you specify on the Tracking System Parameters dialog box.
Having these values on file will subsequently save you time and
effort if you need to re-enter them.
You have now successfully completed installing and configuring

your Lasetec II. You are now ready to build a product code to
mark on your product.
For more information, see Creating and Editing Product Codes.
If you have a code ready or you are familiar with building product
codes, the section Product Code Editor provides details about
advanced functions that are not explained in the Creating and
Editing Product Codes section.

Document 41195-0510
7.6 Setting the Advanced Features Password
7.6.1 Steps
Follow these steps to set the password that operators must

provide to gain access to the advanced features of the Lasetec II.
1. Ensure that the Lasetec II is displaying the Main Menu.

button.
Result: The Lasetec II system selects the F9 - Advanced

Features option and displays the Advanced Menu.

button.
Result: The Lasetec II system selects the F8 - Maintenance

Menu option and displays the Maintenance Menu.

button.
Result: The Lasetec II system selects the F6 - Password

option and displays the Enter new password dialog box.
5. On the operator station keyboard, type the password that

you want and press the ENTER key button.
Result: The Lasetec II system displays the Re-enter new

password dialog box.
6. Retype the password that you typed previously and press the
ENTER key button.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The Lasetec II system displays New password
accepted in the Re-enter new password dialog box.
The Lasetec II system then displays the Update cfg file

[Y/N]? user alert.
7. On the operator station keyboard, press the Y key button

(for Yes).
Result: The Lasetec II system saves the password.
If an operator attempts to access the advanced features by

selecting F9 - Advanced Features on the Main Menu, the
Lasetec II system prompts the operator to provide a
password first.
See Also: Steps that tell you how to reset or remove a

password that you have forgotten appear in Removing the
Advanced Features Password.

Document 41195-0510
Document 41195-0510
8. Creating and Editing Product
Codes
This chapter explains how create and edit product codes by

example.
Because product codes are unique and vary greatly between

companies, it’s impossible to explain every variation that you
might encounter. So, this chapter provides the essential
knowledge, tools, and guidelines that will enable you to exper-
iment and develop the product code that best meets your needs.
See Also: Read or review Lasetec II System Software before

following the procedures in this chapter. You need to know and
understand the Lasetec II system software before you can
create a product code.
Creating and Editing Product Codes 8-1

Document 41195-0510
8.1 Creating and Editing Product Codes
8.1.1 Flow Chart
need to complete to create and edit product codes.
Determine the format of the product code that you want to use
Create a new PCF and product code description
Build the product code by using items and fields
Adjust items, fields, and the print area box
Test the product code and adjust placement on the container
Figure 8-1. Creating and Editing a Product Code

Document 41195-0510
8.2 Determining the Format of the Product
Code
8.2.1 Product Code That You Build
In this exercise, you build a three-item product code from the

default PCF that Industrial Dynamics/filtec ships with the Lasetec
II, as follows:
• The first item contains a text field (Lot:), which does not
change, and a user-defined field (12345) for which the
Lasetec II operator subsequently provides an actual lot
number.
• The second item contains text (Exp:), which does not change,
and an expiration date (08/31/2010) that the system
automatically calculates daily from the current production
date.
• The third item contains a 10-digit serial number
(1234567890).
In this exercise, you mark a label on a paper board package.
2
4
3
No. Description
1 Item that contains a fixed text field (Lot:) followed by a user-defined
field (12345), for which the Lasetec II operator subsequently provides
an actual lot number.
2 Item that contains a text field followed by an expiration date field that
is set to 12 months after the production date (current month + 12).
3 Item that contains a serial number field.
4 Area in which the product code is to be marked.
Figure 8-2. Product Code and Label That You Build

Document 41195-0510
8.3 Creating a New PCF and Product Code
Description
8.3.1 Steps
Follow these steps to create a PCF and product code description.
1. Ensure that your Lasetec II is turned on and that the system

displays the Lasetec II Main Menu.

3. On the Advanced Menu, select F7 - Product Code Editor.
Result: The system displays the Product Code Editor and

loads the PCF named DEFAULT.
Figure 8-3. DEFAULT PCF Loaded in the Product Code Editor

Document 41195-0510
4. Ensure that the field that contains the text Lasetec Default
PCF is highlighted.
Note: This field is the Product Code Description field, not

the Product Code File (PCF) field.
No. Description
1 Product Code Filename (PCF) 2
2 Product Code Description
Figure 8-4. Difference Between Product Code File and Product

Code Description
5. In the highlighted field, type a description of your new

product code.
Best Practice: Type a description that reminds you about

the purpose or function of the new product code.
6. On the operator station keyboard, press ALT S.
Result: The system displays the Save Product Code File

dialog box.
See Also: The section Keys That You Can Use in the Product
Code Editor describes other keys on your operator station
keyboard that you can use in the Product Code Editor.

Document 41195-0510
7. On the operator station keyboard, press the TAB, left arrow
(←), right arrow (→), up arrow (↑), or down arrow (↓) key
to highlight the name of the PCF in the File Name field.
8. Type a new name for the PCF.
Best Practice: Ensure that the filename you specify contains

only letters, digits, a dash (-), and an underline character
(_), and does not contain spaces.
Caution: Ensure that you specify a unique PCF name.

If you specify the same name for a PCF that already exists on
disk, the system overwrites the existing PCF without warning.
9. On the operator station keyboard, first press the ENTER key

and then press the F2 key.
Result: The system saves your new PCF and displays the
following status window.
The system then displays the Product Code Editor.

Document 41195-0510
8.4 Building the Product Code
8.4.1 Steps: Clearing Fields in the Existing Product Code
Follow these steps to clear all fields in the existing product code
to make room for your new product code.
1. On the keyboard, press PG DN until the Lasetec II text field,

or the first item in the print area box, is highlighted.
Note: In this example, the date is AUG 31, 2009, as shown

in the diagram DEFAULT PCF Loaded in the Product Code
Editor. The actual date that your Lasetec II system displays
will be different.
2. On the keyboard, press DEL.
Result: The system displays the Delete current Field [Y/N]?

user alert.
3. On the keyboard, press the Y key.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system deletes the Lasetec II text field and
highlights the current date field AUG 31, 2009, as shown
below.

user alert.
Result: The system deletes the current date field (AUG 31,
2009), as shown in the example and highlights the current
time field 12:35, as shown below.

user alert.
Result: You have cleared all fields in the print area box.

Document 41195-0510
8.4.2 Steps: Creating a Standard Text Field for a
User-Defined Lot Number Field
Follow these steps to create a standard text field for a

user-defined lot number item.
Important: The chapter Lasetec II Concepts describes

user-defined product code fields in more detail.
1. On the operator station keyboard, press the TAB or arrow

keys until you highlight the Insert Field field.
2. On the keyboard, press ENTER.
Result: The system displays the Insert Field window.
Result: The system displays the Standard Text Field dialog

box.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system displays the Item Font window.
5. On the keyboard, press the down arrow (↓) key to move

down the list of fonts, select SIMPLEX, and then press
ENTER.
Result: The system changes the font to SIMPLEX.
6. Use the following table to determine what to do next.
Press the TAB or an arrow And in that field type...

key to highlight the field...
X Position 5.0
Y Position 18.0
Size 2.0
Field Text Lot:
Important: Be sure to include a space character after the colon

(:) in the text Lot: that you type.
7. Ensure that your Standard Text Field dialog box looks like
this.
8. On the keyboard, press F2 twice.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system closes the Standard Text Field dialog
box and saves the new text field that you created.
9. On the keyboard, press ESC.
Result: The system closes the Insert Field window and now
displays Lot: in the print area box.
8.4.3 Steps: Creating a User-Defined Lot Number Field
Follow these steps to create a user-defined product code field.
Important: The chapter Lasetec II Concepts describes

user-defined product code fields in more detail.

keys until you highlight the Insert Field field and press
ENTER.
2. On the keyboard, press the TAB or arrow keys until you

highlight the User Defined field and press ENTER.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system displays the User Defined Field dialog
box.
Press the TAB or an arrow And in that field type... And then...
Field Name Lot Number Press ENTER
User Data 12345 Press ENTER
User Entry is at most 5 Press ENTER
4. When you are finished, ensure that the User Defined Field
dialog box looks like this.
5. On the keyboard, press F2.
Result: The system closes the User Defined Field dialog box
and saves the new user-defined field that you created.

Document 41195-0510
displays Lot: 12345 in the print area box.
8.4.4 Steps: Creating an Expiration Date and Time Item
Follow these steps to create an expiration date and time item.
Important: The chapter Lasetec II Concepts describes date and

time product code fields in more detail.

keys until you highlight the Insert Item field and press
ENTER.

highlight the Date & Time field and press ENTER.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system displays the Date/Time Field dialog box.
Note: The Lasetec II system remembers and displays the

values that you entered in fields on the dialog box that you
used most recently (Item Font, X Position, Y Position, and
Size, for example).

Y Position 14.0
Field Text Exp: [MM+12]/[DD]/[YYYY]
4. When you are finished, ensure that the Date/Time Field


Document 41195-0510
Result: The system closes the Date/Time Field dialog box
and saves the new expiration date item that you created.
displays Exp: 08/31/2010 in the print area box.
Note: In this example, the date that is shown is

08/31/2010. The actual date that your Lasetec II system
displays will be different.
8.4.5 Steps: Creating a Serial Number Item
Follow these steps to create a 10-digit serial number item.
Important: The chapter Lasetec II Concepts describes serial

number product code fields in more detail.

keys until you highlight the Insert Item field and press
ENTER.

highlight the Serial Number field and press ENTER.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system displays the Serial Number Field dialog
box.
Note: The Lasetec II system remembers and displays the

values that you entered in fields on the dialog box that you
used most recently (Item Font, X Position, Y Position, and
Size, for example).

Y Position 10.0
Serial Format D10S1V1E999999999
4. When you are finished, ensure that the Serial Number Field

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system closes the Serial Number Field dialog
box and saves the new serial number item that you created.
Result: The system closes the Insert Field window and

displays 0000000001 in the print area box.
8.4.6 Steps: Saving Your New PCF
Follow these steps to save your new PCF.
2. Result: The system displays the Save Product Code File

dialog box.
3. Press F2 again.
The system displays the Advanced Menu.

Document 41195-0510
8.5 Adjusting Items and Fields
8.5.1 Steps: Adjusting the Size of the Print Area Box
Follow these steps to adjust the size of the print area box.
1. Ensure that the system displays the Product Code Editor.
2. On the keyboard, use the TAB or arrow keys to highlight the

Code Width field.
3. In the Code Width field, type 50 and press ENTER.
4. Use the TAB or arrow keys to highlight the Code Height

field.
5. In the Code Height field, type 25 and press ENTER.
Result: The system changes the width and height of the

print area box to the maximum settings for a standard lens.

dialog box.
3. Press F2 again.

Document 41195-0510

Document 41195-0510
8.6 Readjusting the Size of the Print Area
Box
8.6.1 Introduction
Once you have adjusted the fields, items, and print area box, you
are ready to once again adjust the size of print area box so that
its borders fit snugly around your new product code.
8.6.2 Steps
Follow these steps to readjust the size of the print area box.
2. Use the TAB or arrow keys to highlight the Code Width field.
3. In the Code Width field, type 40 and press ENTER.
Note: The value that you specify in this field is an estimate.

field.
5. Calculate a new value to specify in the Code Height field by

adding the total height of items in your product code to the
total space between items in your product code.
1
2
1
2
1
No. Description
1 Height, or Size, of
characters in an item
2 Space between an
item
Example: The value that you specified in the Size field (1 in

above diagram) for the lot number, expiration date, and
serial number item was 2.0 millimeters each, for a total
size, or height, of 6.0 millimeters.

Document 41195-0510
The value that you specified in the Y Position field for the
lot number, expiration date, and serial number item was
18.0, 14.0, and 10.0 millimeters, respectively. Note that the
vertical position of each item is 4 millimeters apart.
If the size of each item was 2.0 millimeters and each item
was positioned vertically 4.0 millimeters apart, each of the
two spaces between the items (2 in above diagram) was
therefore 2.0 millimeters, for a total of 4.0 millimeters.
You calculated a total height of 6.0 millimeters. You calcu-

lated a total space of 4.0 millimeters. To ensure readability
of your product code, add a 1.0 millimeter to the sum of the
total height and space. This 1-millimeter space produces a
very small gutter between the product code text and the
border of the print area box.
6.0 millimeters
+ 4.0 millimeters
+ 1.0 millimeter
11.0 millimeters
The value that you specify in the Code Height field is

therefore 11 millimeters.
6. In the Code Height field, type 11 and press ENTER.
Result: The system reduces the size of the print area box.

Document 41195-0510
8.7 Rearranging Items in the Print Area Box
8.7.1 Introduction
Follow these steps to arrange items in the print area box.
Important: There’s some trial and error involved in determining

the correct values to specify in the fields that you use to center
the product code in, and readjust the size of, the print area
box. These steps illustrate this process to some degree.
8.7.2 Steps: Moving the 0000000001 Serial Number Item
Follow these steps to move the serial number item (0000000001)

into the print area box.
2. Press the PG DN key until the 0000000001 field is

highlighted.
3. Use the TAB or arrow keys to highlight the X Position field.
4. In the X Position field, type 0.0 and press ENTER.
5. Use the TAB or arrow keys to highlight the Y Position field.
6. In the Y Position field, type 1.0 and press ENTER.
8.7.3 Steps: Moving the Exp: Expiration Date Item
Follow these steps to move the expiration date and time item
(Exp:) into the print area box.
1. Press the PG UP key until the Exp: 08/31/2010 field is

highlighted.

Document 41195-0510
8.7.4 Steps: Moving the Lot: 12345 Text and User-Defined
Fields
Follow these steps to move the text and user-defined lot number
fields (Lot: 12345) into the print area box.
1. Press the PG UP key until the Lot: field is highlighted.
Important: When you move one field within an item, all fields
within that item move with it.
8.7.5 Steps: Correcting the Placement of the 0000000001

Serial Number Item
Follow these steps to correct the vertical placement of the serial

number item (0000000001) in the print area box.
1. Press the PG DN key until the 0000000001 field is

highlighted.
8.7.6 Steps: Correcting the Placement of the Exp:

Expiration Date Item
Follow these steps to correct the vertical placement of the

expiration date item (Exp: 08/31/2010) in the print area box.
1. Press the PG UP key until the Exp: 08/31/2010 field is

highlighted.

Document 41195-0510
8.7.7 Steps: Correcting the Placement of the Lot: 12345
Fields
Follow these steps to correct the vertical placement of the text

and user-defined lot number fields (Lot: 12345) in the print area
box.
1. Press the PG UP key until the Lot: field is highlighted.
8.7.8 Diagram: Final Print Area Box
If you have created your new product code correctly, your final
print area box looks approximately like this:

dialog box.
3. Press F2 again.

Document 41195-0510
8.8 Adding a Two-Dimensional Data Matrix
Bar Code to Your Product Code
8.8.1 Steps
Follow these steps to add a two-dimensional data matrix bar code

to the product code that you created previously in this chapter.

highlight the Insert Item field and press ENTER.
Result: The system displays the Insert Item window.
Result: The system displays the Standard Text Field dialog

box.
Press the TAB or an arrow And in that field select or type...

Item Font SIMPLEX

X Position 0.0
Y Position 12.5
Size 8.0
Field Text 09F032 ACME TABLET

Document 41195-0510
4. Ensure that the dialog box looks like this.
5. On the keyboard, press F2 twice.
Result: The system closes the Standard Text Field dialog

box and saves the new text field that you created.
Result: The system closes the Insert Field window and

displays 09F032 ACME TABLET above the print area box.
Note: Due to the size of the text that you insert, the text
does not fit entirely within the code editing window.

Document 41195-0510
keys until you highlight the Barcode field and press ENTER.
Result: The system displays Yes in the Barcode field and

converts the text field 09F032 ACME TABLET to a bar code.
8. Calculate the value to type in the Code Height field.
8.0 millimeters is the size, or height, of the characters

+ 4.0 millimeters is the space between items
+ 1.0 millimeter is the padding, or gutter, added for readability
13.0 millimeters + 11, the current Code Height, = 24 millimeters

field, type 24 in the field, and press ENTER.
Result: The system adjusts the print area box to the correct
height.

Document 41195-0510
8.8.2 Diagram: Final Print Area Box
If you have created your new bar code correctly, your final print
area box looks approximately like this:
8.8.3 Steps: Saving Your Updated PCF
Follow these steps to save your PCF.

dialog box.
3. Press F2 again.

Document 41195-0510
8.9 Troubleshooting and Fixing Quality
Problems With Product Codes
8.9.1 Introduction
Use the procedures in this section to troubleshoot and fix general

quality problems with product codes that the Lasetec II marks on
containers.
Important: Ensure that you have enabled the laser verification

process and that it is working before you perform the
procedures in this section.
To resolve this problem... Try this solution...
The product code is consistently stretched or 1. Calibrate the encoder.

scrunched (smashed) on containers
2. Verify that the trigger delay distance is correct,
and if it is not, adjust it.
See Also: The section Calculating the Trigger
Delay describes how to adjust the trigger delay.
The Lasetec II is marking inconsistently, but the mark 1. Verify that the surface on which the Lasetec II is
count increments correctly marking the product code is located at the correct
focal point.
See Also: The section Installing the Encoder,
Trigger, and Print Head describes how to set the
correct focal point.
2. Place a container in front of the Lasetec II and
mark the container statically.
See Also: The section Configuring Your Lasetec II
describes how to configure your Lasetec II by
marking a container statically.
If the Lasetec II marks the product code correctly,
verify that the trigger delay is correct and that
nothing is blocking the laser beam.
If the mark is light, clean the focal lens.
If a mark does not appear on the container, check
the laser tube for problems.
The section Troubleshooting Your Lasetec II contains
additional possible solutions.

Document 41195-0510
On flat-surfaced containers, the Lasetec II marks 1. Verify that the surface on which the Lasetec II is
partial or faded product codes marking the product coding is passing the laser at
the correct focal point.
2. Check the focal lens for dirt or chips and, if you
find debris, clean or replace it.
3. Check the contents of the PCF and verify that the
settings for the power and galvanometers are the
same for all fields.
4. Check for blockage (label, guide rail height) in
front of the Lasetec II.
5. Verify that the print head is aligned correctly.
6. Check the internal optics for cleanliness and, if
they are not, clean them.
7. See the section The Lasetec II marks the product
code out of range of the focal lens for further
possible solutions.
On round surfaces, the Lasetec II marks partial or 1. Ensure that the setting for the trigger delay is
faded product codes correct. Increase or decrease the setting to see if
the quality of the product code improves.
2. Verify that the surface on which the Lasetec II is
marking the product code is passing the laser at
the correct focal point.
3. Check the focal lens for dirt or chips and, if you
find debris, clean or replace it.
4. Verify that the print head is aligned correctly.
5. Check the contents of the PCF and verify that the
settings for the power and galvanometers are the
same for all fields.
6. Check for blockage (label, guide rail height) in
front of the Lasetec II.
7. Check the internal optics for cleanliness and, if
they are not, clean them.
The Lasetec II marks the product code correctly, but 1. Ensure that containers pass the focal lens at the
misses some containers correct and same distance.
2. Decrease the value that appears in the trigger
blanking field in the Product Code Editor is 10
millimeters less than the width of the container.
3. Verify that the trigger is detecting containers
correctly and that connections to the I/O card are
secure and correct.
4. Verify that count for marks that the Lasetec II
shows on the screen equals the count for
containers.
5. Check that the trigger is operating correctly.
The horizontal position at which the Lasetec II marks 1. Check the encoder coupling for slippage.
the product code on containers is erratic and the
quality of the product code is inconsistent 2. Check belts for wear or looseness.
3. Verify that the container is not sliding on the
conveyor as it is being marked.
4. Verify that the mechanical movement of the
conveyor is not creating vibrations that are
disrupting the correct movement of the product or
the print head.

Document 41195-0510
The Lasetec II marks the product code correctly, but 1. Verify that the point at which the trigger sees the
the position of the product code is inconsistent container is correct and that trigger sensitivity is
correct.
2. If you are using a labeler with the Lasetec II, check
the laser is placing the label consistently on
containers and check the encoder coupling to
ensure that is connected correctly.
The vertical position at which the Lasetec II marks the If the version of the Lasetec II system software that
product code on containers is erratic and the quality of you are using is 2.04 or an earlier version, select the
the product code is inconsistent tracking settings and turn web tracking off.
The position at which the Lasetec II marks the product Ensure that the print head is correctly aligned, that is,
code on containers climbs or falls in a staircase manner perpendicular to the flow of containers on the
conveyor.
The Lasetec II marks the product code out of range of 1. Verify that the value in the Y Field Limit field on
the focal lens the Optical System Parameters dialog box is 25
millimeters.
2. Check the PCF and ensure that the height of the
product code does not exceed 25 millimeters.
The Lasetec II marks the product codes that contain Verify that the power ramping and delay settings are
teardrop shapes or incomplete characters correct.
The sections Definition: Power Ramping and How

Power Ramping Works describe power ramping in more
detail.

Document 41195-0510
8.10 Backing Up a PCF
8.10.1 Steps
Follow these steps to make a backup copy of the currently loaded

PCF.
Important: Always back up every PCF that you create to ensure

minimal interruption if problems occur with your currently
loaded PCF.
Caution: Only one backup copy is created for each PCF. The
system overwrites this same backup copy every time you back
up a PCF.
1. If the Lasetec II is marking containers, stop marking.
3. Use the TAB or arrow keys to highlight the Backup PCF field
and press ENTER.
Result: The system overwrites the contents of the last

backed up version of your PCF, saves your new PCF, and
displays the following status window.

Document 41195-0510
8.11 Loading the Backed Up Copy of a PCF
8.11.1 Steps
Follow these steps to revert to the version of the current PCF by

loading a backup copy into the Product Code Editor.
Important: When you use this command, the system, without

warning, overwrites the currently loaded PCF with the backup
version. Any changes that you have made to the currently
loaded PCF are lost forever.
1. If the Lasetec II is marking containers, stop marking.
3. Use the TAB or arrow keys to highlight the Load Bkup field
and press ENTER.
Result: Without warning, the system loads the backup copy

into the Product Code Editor.

Document 41195-0510
Document 41195-0510
9. Executing Your First Test Run
and Making Adjustments
In this chapter, you fine tune selected Lasetec II parameters and

prepare your Lasetec II for production.
Executing Your First Test Run and Making Adjustments 9-1

Document 41195-0510
9.1 Calibrating the Verifiers
9.1.1 What the Lasetec II Does When You Calibrate the

Verifiers
When you calibrate the verifiers, the Lasetec II moves the galva-
nometers through a grid pattern that you specify while evaluating
the signal that the Lasetec II receives from the verifiers.
When the Lasetec II identifies the position of the galvanometer

that provides the highest signal to the verifiers, it displays this
position in the Peak fields (under Ver 1 and Ver 2) at the bottom
of the dialog box.
Warning: When you run this test, the Lasetec II activates the
laser many times. Do not place any body part or object in front
of the focal lens, as serious injury or fire can occur.
9.1.2 Steps
Follow these steps to calibrate the verifiers in your Lasetec II.
1. Ensure that your Lasetec II is installed and configured

correctly.
See Also: The chapters Installing Your Lasetec II and Config-

uring Your Lasetec II tell you how to install and configure
the Lasetec II.

5. On the Maintenance Menu, select F4 - Test Menu.
Result: The system displays the Test Menu.
6. On the Test Menu, select F3 - Laser Profiler.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The system displays the Profile Laser dialog box.
See Also: The section Profile Laser Dialog Box describes the
fields on the Profile Laser dialog box in detail.
7. Change any of the values that you see in the fields.
8. On the operator station keyboard, press ENTER.
The system displays the following user alert.
9. To specify if you want to run the test with the shutter open
or closed, type Y for Yes or N for No.
Result: As the system runs the test, it displays a status

window that shows values as the test proceeds.
When the system completes the test, it displays the results

in a status window.

Document 41195-0510
9.2 Focusing and Aligning Your Product Code
on a Container
9.2.1 Introduction
Marking your product code under test conditions enables you to

see the location on the container that the Lasetec II prints the
product code and the quality of the product code.
9.2.2 Steps
Follow these steps to focus and align your product code on a test
container.
1. Ensure that your Lasetec II is installed and configured

correctly.
See Also: The chapters Installing Your Lasetec II and Config-

uring Your Lasetec II tell you how to install and configure
the Lasetec II.
2. Gather several samples of the containers that you intend to

mark and place one of them on the production conveyor,
which is stationary, or in the labeler.
3. Center the sample container in front of the Lasetec II focal

lens at the exact distance from the lens at which the
container will move during production.


6. On the Advanced Menu, select F2 - Select Product Code.
Result: The system displays the Product Code Files dialog

box.

Document 41195-0510
7. Select the PCF that you want to test.
Result: If the Align on new PCF field on the Verification

Parameters dialog box is set to On, the system activates the
focus LED, shines two red dots on the test container, and
displays a dialog box that prompts you to verify the focus.
1 2 3 4 5
No. Description
1 The product code is clear and positioned correctly on the container
2 One dot, which indicates that the focus is correct
3 The product code is not clear
4 Two dots, which indicate that the focus is incorrect
5 The product code is positioned incorrectly, so adjust the print head vertically
Figure 9-1. How to Verify the Laser Focus and Alignment
8. Is the focus correct?
If yes, at the dialog box prompt, select Yes [Y].
Result: The system displays a dialog box that prompts you to

verify the alignment of the product code on the container.
If no, correct the focus as described below and repeat from

step 6.
• If you have the X and Y axis adjustable stand, turn the

correct axis adjustment lever until the two red dots
merge into one.
• If your print head is mounted horizontally, and you
have an adjustable stand, turn the height adjustment
lever until the two red dots merge into one.

Document 41195-0510
• If your print head is mounted vertically, adjust the
stand position, as it might have been knocked from the
correct position or adjust the conveyor guide rails to
move the container until the two dots merge into one.
Note: There are several types of adjustable mounts. Some

might only offer one axis adjustment that will either correspond
to focus or position adjustment.
9. Is the alignment of the product code on the container

correct?
If yes, at the dialog box prompt, select Yes [Y].
Result: The system closes the dialog box.
If no, correct the alignment as described below.
• If you have the X and Y axis adjustable stand, turn the

correct axis adjustment lever until the product code
appears at the correct position.
• If the print head is mounted vertically and you have an
adjustable stand, turn the height adjustment lever
until the product code appears at the correct height.
• If the print head is mounted horizontally, adjust the
stand position as it might have been knocked from the
correct position or adjust the conveyor guide rails to
move the container until the product code appears at
the correct position.
• Remount the print head entirely or, if you are not using
one already, use an adjustable stand.
If you need to align your product code more precisely, see
Adjusting the Height of Your Product Code and Adjusting the
Code Delay or X Position.

Document 41195-0510
9.3 Executing a Test Run
9.3.1 Steps
Follow these steps to execute a test run and, hopefully, start

regular production.
1. Ensure that your conveyor is set up and loaded with enough

containers to run at maximum production speed without
running out.


box.
4. Select the PCF that you want to test.

5. On the keyboard, type N to select No [N].
6. Start the production conveyor and run it at production

speed.
7. On the keyboard, press F1 to select F1 - Start Coding.
Result: The Lasetec II starts marking containers.
8. After the Lasetec II marks at least one container, at the

keyboard, press F1 to select F1 - Stop Coding.
Result: The Lasetec II stops marking containers.
9. Stop the conveyor, examine the product codes on marked

containers, and ensure that the Lasetec II marks the product
codes:

Document 41195-0510
• Completely.
Is any part cut off? Does the product code not fit within
the designated area on the test container? If yes, see
Adjusting the Height of Your Product Code and
Adjusting the Code Delay or X Position.
• Clearly.
Does the Lasetec II etch the product code deeply
enough into the material to be clear, but not so deeply
that it compromises the integrity of the material? Does
the Lasetec II produce any burn marks or teardrop
shaped marks, particularly at the ends of characters? If
yes to any of these questions, see Adjusting the Speed
of the Galvanometers and Adjusting the Power of the
Laser.
• Only one at a time.
Does the Lasetec II mark more than one product code
on a container? If yes, see Adjusting the Trigger
Blanking.
• In the correct position relative to the direction of the
conveyor.
Does the Lasetec II mark the product code too closely
to the leading or trailing edge of the label on the
container? If yes, see Adjusting the Height of Your
Product Code and Adjusting the Code Delay or X
Position.
10. Is the Lasetec II marking your product code correctly
according to the preceding criteria?
If yes, on the keyboard, press F1 to select F1 - Start Coding.
If no, follow the appropriate procedures in:
• Adjusting the Height of Your Product Code

• Adjusting the Code Delay or X Position
• Adjusting the Speed of the Galvanometers
• Adjusting the Power of the Laser
• Adjusting the Trigger Blanking
And then, repeat the procedures in this section Executing a

Test Run.

Document 41195-0510
9.4 Adjusting the Height of Your Product
Code
9.4.1 Steps
Follow these steps to adjust the height of your product code

when you cannot precisely align its height mechanically.

2. On the operator station keyboard, press F9.
Result: The system displays the Advanced Menu.

box.
4. Select the PCF whose product code height you want to

modify.

6. On the keyboard, press F7 to select F7 - Product Code

Editor.
Result: The system displays the Product Code Editor.
7. Is the value 25 millimeters shown in the Code Height field?

Document 41195-0510
If yes, go to step 11.
If no, specify 25 in the Code Height field.
Important: Although you can specify a value between 0 and

1000 millimeters inclusive in this field, you must specify from 1
to 25 millimeters, as the vertical field limit of the Lasetec II’s
standard lens is 25 millimeters, or 1 inch.
Result: The system resets the height of the product code to

25 millimeters, and increases the height of the print area
box accordingly.
8. Do you need to adjust the vertical position of items in the

print area box to fill the new product code height?
If yes, specify a new value for each item in the Y Position

field until you position the items correctly.
dialog box.
11. Press F2.
Result: If you modified the PCF, the system saves your new
PCF and displays the following status window.
The system then displays the Advanced Menu.

Document 41195-0510
9.5 Adjusting the Code Delay or X Position
9.5.1 Introduction
As a container passes by the Lasetec II, it marks the product code

on a container from left to right or from right to left. The
direction from which the Lasetec II marks a container depends on
how you position the print head.
You use the Code Delay or X Position field in the Product Code
Editor to horizontally position the product code on a container. If
you are using dynamic mode, you use the Code Delay field. If you
are using indexed mode, you use the X Position field.
9.5.2 Steps
Follow these steps to move your product code farther to the left
or to the right on a container as it passes the Lasetec II.
1. Ensure that your conveyor is set up and ready to go and that

you have enough containers to complete the test.


box.
5. Select the PCF whose code delay or x position that you want
to modify.


Document 41195-0510

Editor.
8. In the Product Code Editor, specify a new value in the Code

Delay or the X Position field according to the following
guidelines.
• To move your product code farther towards the trailing

edge of the container, increase the value in the Code
Delay field. To move your product code farther towards
the right edge of the container, increase the value in
the X Position field.
• To move your product code farther towards the leading
edge of the container, decrease the value in the Code
Delay field. If you cannot further reduce the value in
the Code Delay field (that is, it equals 0), reduce the
value in the Trigger Delay field on the Tracking
9. Start the conveyor and run it at maximum production speed.
10. After the Lasetec II marks at least one container, stop the
conveyor and examine the position of the product code on a
marked container.
11. Is your product code positioned as you want?
If yes, go to the next step.

If no, repeat from step 8.
dialog box.
14. Press F2.
Result: The system saves your PCF and displays the


Document 41195-0510
9.6 Adjusting the Speed of the
Galvanometers
9.6.1 Introduction
To get the Lasetec II to mark your product code correctly, you

might need to adjust the speed of the galvanometers.
Quality issues that you can correct by adjusting the speed of the
galvanometers include incomplete product codes, product codes
that are etched or burned too deeply, and product codes that are
marked too lightly.
The velocity of the galvanometer and the power of the laser

interact together to affect the quality of the product code. When
attempting to resolve quality issues, adjust both parameters,
starting with the velocity of the galvanometer. If you tune the
velocity of the galvanometer correctly, the laser requires less
energy to produce the quality that you seek.
9.6.2 Steps: Getting Set Up
Follow these steps to get set up for adjusting the speed of the
galvanometers.
1. Ensure that your conveyor is set up and ready to go and that

you have enough containers to complete the test.


box.

Document 41195-0510
5. Select the PCF whose galvanometer setting you want to
modify.

9.6.3 Steps: Adjusting the Speed
Follow these steps to adjust the speed of the galvanometers.
2. Run a few containers past the Lasetec II at maximum

production speed.
3. On the operator station screen, check the Lasetec II error

message area to see if the system displays the following
message.
4. Does the Lasetec II system display the No Time to Complete

Mark message?
If yes, start the Product Code Editor and go to step 5.
If no, is this the first time that you are performing this step?
If yes, stop, your galvanometers are running at the

correct speed.
If no, start the Product Code Editor, increase the
current value in the Velocity field by 10 percent for
each product code field and item, and go to step 7.

Document 41195-0510
5. Use the PG UP or PG DN keys to highlight each product code
field and item in your product code and verify that all values
in the Velocity field match.
Important: The value that the system displays in the Velocity

field applies only to the particular field or item that is
highlighted, not to the entire product code, nor to other
product codes.
6. Do all values match?
If yes, increase all Velocity field values for all product code
fields and items by 100 millimeters per second.
If no, change the Velocity field values so that they all match
the highest value that you saw in one of the Velocity fields.

dialog box.
9. Press F2.

10. In step 4, did you increase the value in the Velocity field by
10 percent?
If yes, is the mark on the containers faint?
If yes, go to the section Adjusting the Power of the

Laser.
If no, stop, your galvanometers are running at the
correct speed and your laser is running at the correct
wattage.
If no, repeat from step 1.

Document 41195-0510
9.7 Adjusting the Power of the Laser
9.7.1 Introduction
To get the Lasetec II to mark your product code correctly, you

might need to adjust the laser power.
The velocity of the galvanometer and the power of the laser

interact together to affect the quality of the product code. When
attempting to resolve quality issues, adjust both parameters,
starting with the velocity of the galvanometer. If you tune the
velocity of the galvanometer correctly, the laser requires less
energy to produce the quality that you seek.
9.7.2 Steps: Getting Set Up
Follow these steps to get set up for adjusting the wattage of the
laser.
1. If you haven’t already, complete the steps in Adjusting the

Speed of the Galvanometers.


box.
5. Select the PCF whose laser power setting you want to

modify.


Document 41195-0510
9.7.3 Steps: Adjusting the Wattage
Follow these steps to adjust the wattage of the laser.
2. Run a few containers past the Lasetec II at maximum

production speed.
3. Check the mark on all containers.
4. Is the Lasetec II printing the mark correctly?
If yes, stop, you have successfully adjusted the wattage.

If no, start the Product Code Editor.
5. Is the Lasetec II printing the mark too faintly or too intensely

(that is, producing pin holes or burning through the
container)?
If too faintly, use the PG UP or PG DN keys to highlight each

product code field and item in your product code and, in the
Power field, increase the current value by one or two watts.
If too intensely, use the PG UP or PG DN keys to highlight

each product code field and item in your product code and,
in the Power field, decrease the current value by one or two
watts.
Important: The value that the system displays in the Power

field applies only to the particular field or item that is
highlighted, not to the entire product code, nor to other
product codes.

dialog box.
8. Press F2.

Document 41195-0510
9. Repeat from step 2.

Document 41195-0510
9.8 Adjusting the Trigger Blanking
9.8.1 Introduction
You use the Trig Blank (trigger blanking) field in the Product
Code Editor to tell the Lasetec II to:
• Accept only one trigger signal per container during a specified

period of time.
• Ignore other trigger signals that occur within that time frame.
You might need to use trigger blanking when a container

generates more than one trigger signal, for example, if the
container is clear or has a handle.
9.8.2 Steps
Follow these steps to adjust the trigger blanking.


box.
4. Select the PCF for which you want to modify the trigger
blanking.


Document 41195-0510

Editor.
7. Use the following chart to determine the value to specify in

the Trig Blank field.
If the width of And... In the Trig Blank field, specify the...

your container...
Is fixed You can bind two of the containers Pitch of the container, in millimeters,
together, and, at the same trigger point, minus 10 millimeters.
they maintain a consistent space, or gap,
between them. Pitch mm - 10 mm = Trig Blank
Examples: Bottles and other similar

containers.
Varies Each container generates a trigger signal Width of the container, in

that is equal to or greater than 100 millimeters.
millimeters that the container travels or
that cannot be easily bound together. Width = Trig Blank
Examples: Boxes and cartons.
Important: The value that you specify in the Trig Blank field
applies only to the particular PCF that you are editing, not to
other PCFs.

dialog box.
10. Press F2.

11. Perform the steps in Executing a Test Run.

Document 41195-0510
10. Performing Maintenance
This chapter contains suggested maintenance schedules and

procedures to help you keep your Lasetec II operating at
maximum efficiency.
Performing Maintenance 10-1

Document 41195-0510
10.1 When to Perform Maintenance Tasks
Use this chart to determine how often to perform inspection and

maintenance tasks. Click on a weekly or monthly task to learn
how to perform the task.
Inspect the... Daily Weekly Monthly For procedures, see...
Laser safety shroud (cover) Steps: Inspecting the Print Head and
Safety Covers
Focal lens Steps: Cleaning the Focal Lens
Air filtration system (if installed) Steps: Cleaning Air Filtration System
Filters
Trigger beam emitter and receiver lenses Steps: Cleaning Trigger Beam Emitter
and Receiver Lenses
Beacon lamps Steps: Inspecting the Beacon Lamps
Cooling fans for the laser Industrial Dynamics/filtec Customer

Support
External wiring and conduit Steps: Inspecting External Wiring
Laser print head housing Steps: Cleaning the Print Head

Housing
Warning and instruction labels and plates Steps: Inspecting the Warning and
on the Lasetec II Instruction Labels and Plates
Important: If your organization has a maintenance policy,

follow it. Depending upon your organization’s policy, you might
need to contact your organization’s service personnel to
complete a particular task.

Document 41195-0510
10.2 Maintenance Procedures
10.2.1 Introduction
Follow the steps in this section to perform inspection and mainte-

nance procedures on your Lasetec II equipment.
Warning: Turn off or disconnect power to your Lasetec II while

servicing or performing maintenance, unless instructed to turn
on power to perform a procedure. Do not place any body part in
front of the focal lens when the laser is powered.
10.2.2 Steps: Inspecting the Print Head and Safety Covers
Follow these steps to ensure that the print head and all safety
covers are installed and working correctly.
1. Verify that the cover to the print head is secure and that the
latches on the control box are closed and that the cover is
secure.
2. Verify all parts, such as labels, placards, beacon covers,

knobs, and switches are firmly attached and operating
correctly.
3. Verify all mounting brackets and locking knobs are tight.
Note: Do not disturb the position of the mounting brackets

when checking.
10.2.3 Steps: Cleaning the Focal Lens
Use lens tissue or a soft, lint-free cloth moistened with isopropyl

alcohol or acetone to clean the focal lens.
Caution: Do not use abrasive materials, such as paper towels,

dry wipes, or scouring pads, or chemicals, such as abrasive
cleaners or caustic solutions, as they can damage the lens. If
you are unsure, contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec Customer
Support before starting to clean.

Document 41195-0510
10.2.4 Steps: Cleaning Air Filtration System Filters
If the container material that you mark produces high amounts of

smoke or soot, you might need to clean the air filter frequently.
Refer to the instructions that the manufacturer of your air
filtration unit provided for cleaning schedules and procedures.
10.2.5 Steps: Cleaning Trigger Beam Emitter and Receiver

Lenses
Use a cotton swab or bud, lens tissue or a soft, lint-free cloth

dampened with water or isopropyl alcohol to clean the trigger
beam emitter and receiver lenses.
Caution: Do not use abrasive materials, such as paper towels or

scouring pads, or chemicals, such as abrasive cleaners or
caustic solutions, as they can damage the lens. If you are
unsure, contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec Customer Support
before starting to clean.
10.2.6 Steps: Inspecting the Beacon Lamps
Follow these steps to ensure that beacon lamps work correctly.
See Also: The section Replacing the Beacon LED describes how to
replace the beacon lamp.
1. In the past, when a problem occurred during production, did

all beacon lamps lit as expected?
If yes, the beacon lamps are working correctly.

2. Inspect all beacon lamps.
3. Is any beacon lamp cracked or damaged?
If yes, replace the beacon lamp.

4. Inspect the wiring between the beacon lamps and power

supply that provides power to them.
5. Are all wires connected and routed correctly?

Document 41195-0510
If yes, contact your service personnel.
If no, repair the wiring.
10.2.7 Steps: Inspecting External Wiring
Follow these steps to ensure that the wiring and cables to and
from your Lasetec II are safe and working correctly.
1. Inspect all external wiring and cables for damage, such as

loose conduit connectors and worn, frayed, chafed, or
gouged spots.
2. Verify all cable connections and squeeze fittings are

connected tightly and are secure.
3. Inspect cable routing to verify that it does not create a

tripping or catching hazard for personnel or machinery.
10.2.8 Steps: Cleaning the Print Head Housing
Use a cloth dampened with a non-caustic and non-abrasive

solution to clean the print head housing.
Caution: Do not wash the print head with a high pressure

nozzle. Do not steam clean or saturate the print head housing
with water.
10.2.9 Steps: Inspecting the Warning and Instruction

Labels and Plates
Labels and plates contain important information regarding the

safety and proper operation of the Lasetec and are often required
by law. Inspect the Lasetec for missing or damaged labels and
replace them if necessary.

Document 41195-0510
Document 41195-0510
11. Troubleshooting
This chapter provides diagnostic information, including a trouble-

shooting flow chart and a list of diagnostic and alarm messages.
Troubleshooting 11-1
Document 41195-0510
11.1 Troubleshooting Your Lasetec II
11.1.1 Flow Chart
Use the Lasetec II Troubleshoot application to resolve problems

with your Lasetec II.
Important: The troubleshoot application Troubleshoot.exe

is located in the folder named Graphics in the folder named
Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
11.2 Diagnostic and Alarm Messages
11.2.1 Table
Use the following table to resolve diagnostic and alarm messages

that your Lasetec II generates.
If you receive this error... It means that... To resolve this error...
A/D Conversion timeout The analog to digital converter in Check the power to the Lasetec II
the Lasetec II has locked up or did for noise that might cause the
not finish the conversion quickly Lasetec II electronics to
enough. malfunction.
Bottle Queue Violation The queue of containers in the Check the trigger sensitivity and
tracking area for the Lasetec II is verify that it is not sending
greater than 49 containers. multiple triggers.
If more than 40 containers can fit

between the trigger and the lens,
move the trigger closer to the
Lasetec print head.
Can’t load Font! The Lasetec II cannot load a Remove or comment out the line
particular font file that is listed in the PCF that references the
in the PCF because it is not particular font that is generating
available, does not exist, or is the error and try again.
corrupted.
For example, if a PCF contains a

reference to a bar code font and
you subsequently load that PCF
onto a Lasetec II on which the bar
code software is not installed,
that Lasetec II system generates
this error.
Cant Update with Invalid Test Results The value that you specified for Rerun the test to calibrate the
the encoder resolution on the encoder and enter a new value
Calibrate Encoder dialog box is for the encoder resolution.
outside the acceptable range and
cannot be saved. The section Calibrating the
Encoder With the System
Software describes how to
Check Focal Distance; Press ESC or The focal lens in your Lasetec II is Focus the laser in the Lasetec II.
any other key to Continue not set to the correct focal
length. The section Configuring Your
Lasetec II describes how to focus
the laser.
Check Number of Characters in User You might have typed a Check and confirm that you typed
Defined Field user-defined field incorrectly. the characters in the user-defined
field correctly and retype the
The number of characters in the characters correctly.
user-defined field that you
specified might be greater than Also, confirm, with the person
the number that is allowed for who created the user-defined
that user-defined field. field, the correct number of
characters that the user-defined
field requires.
Document 41195-0510
Check system alignment; Press ESC The print head is not aligned Realign the print head, as
or any other key to Continue correctly. described in the section Aligning
the Print Head.
Check the Laser Cover, or Stop The print head cover is not Reseat the cover and ensure that
Coding correctly attached to the Lasetec it is correctly snapped into the
II enclosure, that is, the cover is interlock connector.
not correctly snapped into the
interlock connector inside the
print head enclosure.
Close Interlocks, Check Chiller & The print head cover is not Reseat the cover and ensure that
Push button, or Stop Coding correctly attached to the Lasetec it is correctly snapped into the
II enclosure, that is, the cover is interlock connector.
not correctly snapped into the
interlock connector inside the Check all connections between
print head enclosure. the chiller and Lasetec II.
The chiller is not correctly

connected to the Lasetec II.
Comm Error: Junk Message The Lasetec II did not correctly Check and ensure that the serial
receive the information that the cable connection and the baud
host or master Lasetec II sent. rate setting on both the master
and slave Lasetec II systems
match.
Comm Error: Lost Message The Lasetec II received two Check the format that the host
consecutive synchronization sends and verify that the host is
characters (colon (:) in ASCII text not sending empty fields.
format or 3A in hexadecimal
format) without a command.
Communications Framing Error The Lasetec II did not correctly Check and ensure that the serial
match.
Communications Overrun Error The Lasetec II did not correctly Check and ensure that the serial
match.
Communications Parity Error The Lasetec II did not correctly Check and ensure that the serial
match.
Verify that the parity is set to

even on the host computer
system.

Document 41195-0510
CPU Over Temperature The PC/104 card inside the Check the air that is going to the
Lasetec II is too warm. Lasetec II and make sure that it is
turned on.
Check the fan on the laser tube

and ensure that it turns on when
you turn on power to the Lasetec
II.
Verify that the cooling hose is

directed correctly over the laser
fan. Figure 12-24. Sliding the
Cooling Air Hose From the
Retaining Block contains
additional information.
Verify that the air filter and

regulator is clean and is set
between 60 and 80 pounds per
square inch (psi).
CPU Temperature ShutDown The Lasetec II system software Check all connections inside the
cannot read the CPU temperature Lasetec II and ensure that they
probe that is located on the are connected correctly.
PC/104 card.
If you continue to see this error,
contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
Customer Support.
Decrease Velocity or Resolution in

PCF
Decrease X Field Size or increase A serious error has occurred in Clear the error message, and
X_Opt_Field the Lasetec II system software. contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
Customer Support.
Default pcf file not found! The Lasetec II system software Clear the error message and
could not find a product code file contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
named DEFAULT.PCF to load. Customer Support.
Error reading diaghist.dat The Lasetec II system software Clear the error message and
could not find or create the contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
default diagnostic history file Customer Support.
named DIAGHIST.DAT.
Error reading graphic file! The Lasetec II system software Clear the error message and
could not find or create a symbol contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
graphics file (which contains a Customer Support.
company logo, for example) that
is associated with a product code.
Error reading mark file
Error writing temp file!
Failed Laser Warmup: (ESC to abort; When you press the F1 key on the Ensure that the laser is firing.
F1 to retry; F2 to override) operator keyboard to start
marking containers, the Lasetec II Check the function of the
runs the laser verifier routine. galvanometers.
If the verifiers do not detect the Ensure that you or someone else
laser, the Lasetec II issues this calibrated the verifiers correctly.
error message.
Document 41195-0510
Firmware Version Not Read! The Lasetec II system software Ensure that all cables to and from
could not obtain the version of the marking engine card are
the firmware that the marking connected correctly.
engine uses from the marking
engine card. Ensure that the marking engine
card is available and working.
Illegal Command When Marking You cannot load a new, edit, or Stop marking containers and
save a product code file, reissue the command.
calibrate the verifiers, or perform
the operation that you attempted
while the Lasetec II is marking
containers.
Illegal Condition Occured A serious error has occurred in Clear the error message, and
the Lasetec II system software. contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
Customer Support.
Inconsistent Encoder Signal The Lasetec II has detected Verify that the encoder linkage is
intermittent encoder pulses. not slipping or damaged and the
signal cable is not loose or
damaged.
Check the TP1 connector on the

TX card for a clean encoder
signal.
Replace the encoder if necessary.
Increase Velocity or Resolution in

PCF
Insufficient Memory! A serious error has occurred in Clear the error message, and
Customer Support.
Interlock Induced Reject The interlock has opened during a Check the interlocks (if any) to
code and produced a reject. see if any is intermittent.
Verify that you have turned on

the Lasetec II system correctly.
Invalid Bar Code conversion The bar code that you tried to Convert the field or item to
convert contains characters that another type of bar code or
you cannot validly include in that remove the offending characters
type of bar code. from the field or item.
For example, if you try to convert

a text field that contains
alphabetical characters into a
UPC bar code, which can contain
only numeric characters, the
Lasetec II generates this error.
Invalid Mark Code A serious error has occurred in Clear the error message, and
Customer Support.
Laser 48V DC Power Failure The +48 VDC power supply is not Verify that you have pressed the
providing power to the laser. laser power button.
Laser Failure Detected The laser tube is intermittently Check all connections to the laser
lasing and might fail entirely. tube.
If necessary, replace the laser

tube.

Document 41195-0510
Laser in Thermal Shutdown! The Lasetec II laser tube has Check the air that is going to the
overheated and the Lasetec II Lasetec II and make sure that it is
refuses to mark containers. turned on.
Check the fan on the laser tube

and ensure that it turns on when
you turn on power to the Lasetec
II.
Verify that the cooling hose is

directed correctly over the laser
fan. Figure 12-24. Sliding the
Cooling Air Hose From the
Retaining Block contains
Verify that the air filter and

regulator is clean and is set
between 60 and 80 pounds per
square inch (psi).
Laser Status Failure! The laser tube is not responding. Check all connectors to the laser
tube.
If necessary, replace the laser

tube.
Lasetec Clock Battery Low Power for the battery on the Clear the error message, and, if
Lasetec chip, which is located on you continue to see this error,
the Lasetec II marking engine contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
card, is so low that you might Customer Support to arrange for a
need to replace the marking replacement marking engine
engine card. card.
Mark Engine Over Temperature
Marking Engine Not Detected While calibrating the verifiers, Clear the error message, restart
the Lasetec II failed to the Lasetec II, and, if you
communicate with the marking continue to see this error,
engine hardware. The marking contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
engine card might have failed. Customer Support.
Master Comm: Checksum Error The slave Lasetec II did not Check and ensure that the serial
correctly receive a message from cable connection and the baud
the master Lasetec II. rate setting on both the master
match.
Master Comm: Invalid Response The slave Lasetec II did not Check and ensure that the serial
correctly receive the message cable connection and the baud
from the master Lasetec II. rate setting on both the master
match.
Master Communications Timeout The slave Lasetec II has lost Check and ensure that the serial
communication with the master cable connection and the baud
Lasetec II. rate setting on both the master
match.
MEMORY ALLOCATION ERROR! System A serious error has occurred in Clear the error message, and
shutdown! the Lasetec II system software. contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
Customer Support.
Missed Code During Test Fire You conducted a test fire as the Refrain from pressing the F11 key
Lasetec II was marking containers during production runs.
dynamically.
Document 41195-0510
Missed Code: Interlock Open You or someone removed the Verify that the print head cover is
print head cover from the Lasetec installed and secured correctly.
II as the Lasetec II was marking a
container and, as a result, the Check that the shutter is
Lasetec II missed marking the connected correctly and that the
container. +12 VDC power supply is working
correctly.
Missed Code: Shutter Closed The laser shutter closed as the If the conveyor begins to run
Lasetec II was marking a within five seconds of closing the
container and the Lasetec II interlocks, you see this error
missed marking the container. message.
Verify that the print head cover is

installed and secured correctly.
Check that the shutter is

connected correctly and that the
+12 VDC power supply is working
correctly.
Missed Code:Triggers Too Fast A container is moving too fast or Verify that the trigger
multiple triggers are occurring for connections and signal wires are
one container. not loose or damaged and that
the trigger sensor is emitting one
You might also see this error pulse per container.
message if you conduct a test fire
during production. Increase the trigger blanking
distance.
Decrease marking time by
reducing the character size or
increasing the velocity of the
galvanometers. The section
Adjusting the Speed of the
Galvanometers contains
If possible, reduce the number of

characters in the product code or
decrease the velocity of the
container on the conveyor.
Missed Encoder Interrupts A serious error has occurred in Contact Industrial

the Lasetec II system software. Dynamics/filtec Customer
Support.
Missed Velocity Interrupts A serious error has occurred in Contact Industrial

the Lasetec II system software. Dynamics/filtec Customer
Support.
Multiple Triggers W/O Encoder Several trigger pulses occurred Check the encoder coupling,
and Lasetec II did not detect encoder signal, and the encoder
encoder pulses in between. You cable.
see this error message if you are
conducting work around the
Lasetec II and the trigger
detected errant movement
several times.
No date/time
No entries in diaghist.dat The diagnostic history file Clear the error message and
contains no entries. resume operation.
No Entry The diagnostic history contains no Clear the error message and
entries. resume operation.

Document 41195-0510
No field to delete The product code from which you Clear the error message and
are trying to delete a field is resume operation.
currently empty.
No field to edit The product code that you are Clear the error message and
trying to edit is currently empty. resume operation.
No Files Found! A serious error has occurred in Clear the error message, and
Customer Support.
No font file A serious error has occurred in Clear the error message, and
Customer Support.
No item to delete The product code from which you Clear the error message and
are trying to delete an item is resume operation.
currently empty.
No PCF data The product code file that you Clear the error message, add a
are trying to save or zoom is field or item to the product code
empty, that is, does not contain file and resume operation.
any fields or items.
No Room to Insert Field You have inserted the maximum Remove one or more existing
number of fields in a product fields or add the information that
code that the Lasetec II allows. you want to insert as an item.
At present, you can insert a

maximum of four fields in a
product code.
No Room to Insert Item You have inserted the maximum Remove one or more existing
number of items in a product items or add the information that
code that the Lasetec II allows. you want to insert as a field.
At present, you can insert a

maximum of eight items in a
product code.
No Time to Complete Mark The current line speed is faster Check the line speed and ensure
than the speed at which the that it is running at the correct
Lasetec II was calibrated. speed.
Verify that trigger connections

and signal wires are not loose or
damaged.
Increase the velocity of the
galvanometers and the power to
the laser to compensate for a
higher line speed, as described in
the sections Adjusting the Speed
of the Galvanometers and
Adjusting the Power of the Laser.
Reduce the size or number of

characters in your product code.
Slow down the production line.
Increase the distance for trigger

blanking.
Document 41195-0510
No user defined fields The Lasetec II system software Clear the error message and
was unable to find a user-defined resume operation.
field in the currently-displayed
product code.
PCF Wider than Field Size and The product code that you are Clear the error message and
PCFtest Wider than Field Size attempting to mark on a contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
container is wider than the Customer Support.
Lasetec II lens allows.
If your product code is wider than

2 inches or 50 millimeters and
you conduct a test fire, you see
this error message.
If you are marking the product

code dynamically, this condition
does not affect the actual
product code.
Slave Comm: Checksum Error The slave Lasetec II did not Check and ensure that the serial
correctly receive a message from cable connection and the baud
the master Lasetec II. rate setting on both the master
match.
Slave Comm: Invalid Command The slave Lasetec II did not Check and ensure that the serial
correctly receive a command cable connection and the baud
message from the master Lasetec rate setting on both the master
II. and slave Lasetec II systems
match.
Spurious Interrupt The Lasetec II marking engine Clear the error message and, if
received an unidentified you see the error message again,
hardware interrupt. check the power cable to the
Lasetec II for noise.
This error often indicates a noisy
power line to the Lasetec II. Check and reseat all the
connections to the marking
engine.
SW Decreased Reject Delay
This Feature is Protected by

Password
Time Not Received from Master The slave Lasetec II did not Clear the error message, and, if
receive the product code time the error persists, contact your
data, which indicates that the service personnel.
master and slave Lasetec II
systems are not communicating.
Too Many Packages in Queue You placed the trigger a distance Move the trigger closer to the
equal to more than 255 Lasetec II.
containers from the Lasetec II.
UDF Not Updated Due to an internal software error, Clear the error message, and, if
the Lasetec II system software you continue to see this error,
could not update a user defined contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
field. Customer Support.
Velocity Clock Timeout A timing error occurred in the Clear the error message, and, if
Lasetec II hardware. you continue to see this error,
Customer Support.

Document 41195-0510
Velocity Clock Warning Clear the error message, and, if

you continue to see this error,
Customer Support.
Verifier 1 Failure and Verifier 2 The Lasetec II generated fault If you see this error message
Failure and reject pulses for each consistently, check the laser by
container after the verifier sensor placing a stationary container in
1 or sensor 2 detected low laser front of the Lasetec II and
temperature or power. marking it.
If you mark the container

successfully, re-calibrate the
verifier that is malfunctioning.
If you cannot successfully mark

the container, verify that the
laser shutter is opening and that
the laser and galvanometers are
working correctly. See the section
Troubleshooting Your Lasetec II
for more information about what
to do if you see this error
message.
Verifier Saturation The verifiers failed to produce a If you have had the Lasetec II
difference in detection voltage, serviced before you see this error
which can occur if the laser message, check the connectors on
verifier wattage is too high and the back of the verifiers to ensure
does not allow the verifier to cool that they are seated correctly.
down.
Wait 5 Seconds to Open, or Stop The laser in the Lasetec II is Wait five seconds.
Coding about to start.
National and international law

require that a laser wait five
seconds before starting.
Warming Laser The laser power supplies are Wait until the laser is warmed up
currently warming up the laser. and then resume operation.
Warn: Reduce End Reject Delay
Warn: Reject Delay Too Small
WatchDog Timed Out! The Lasetec II system software Clear the error message, and, if
was unable to start correctly you continue to see this error,
after being reset. contact Industrial Dynamics/filtec
Customer Support.
Document 41195-0510
11.3 Clearing Error Messages
11.3.1 What Happens When the Lasetec II Encounters an

Error
When the Lasetec II encounters an error, the red fault beacon on

the top of the Lasetec II lights.
In some cases, for example if a hardware component in the

Lasetec II fails, the Lasetec II stops marking containers. In other
cases, for example if a passing or incidental software error
occurs, the Lasetec II continues to mark containers.
After the operator resolves the error or condition that causes the
error, the operator clears the error message in the Lasetec II
system software.
The Lasetec II produces a diagnostic history log of all error

messages in the binary file DIAGHIST.DAT, which is located in
the main Lasetec II directory.
You can display the contents of this diagnostic history log through
the Maintenance Menu.
11.3.2 Before You Clear an Error Message
Before you clear an error message and attempt to diagnose or

troubleshoot a problem, ensure that you:
• Read and understand the correct procedure to follow to

resolve the problem.
• Understand and comply with all safety precautions.
• As a last resort, call your service department first, and Indus-
trial Dynamics/filtec Customer Support second.
11.3.3 Steps
Follow these steps to clear an error message and turn off the
fault beacon.
1. Ensure that your Lasetec II is turned on.
2. At the operator station, ensure that the Lasetec II is

displaying a menu.

Document 41195-0510
3. On the operator station keyboard, press the F12 function
key button.
Result: The Lasetec II system clears the error message,

turns off the fault beacon, and resumes operation.
Document 41195-0510
11.4 Troubleshooting Problems
11.4.1 Table
Use this table to troubleshoot problems with your Lasetec II.
If the Lasetec II... Then...
Marks a few containers, and then 1. Check the spacing of containers

misses one container, repeatedly, on the conveyor and ensure that
causing containers to “bunch up” in the containers are spaced
the trigger sensor area. correctly.
2. Check the font size, as it might
be too large to mark correctly.
3. Check and correct the speed of
the conveyor belt, as it might be
too fast.
4. Check that the maximum speed
that you or service personnel
have specified for marking the
product code on containers does
not exceed the speed of the
containers on the conveyor,
and, if the conveyor speed is
incorrect, contact your service
personnel.
5. Check that system tracking
variables are set correctly, and,
if they are not, contact your
service personnel.
Produces many marking errors. 1. Ensure that the trigger sensor is

clean, and, if it is not, clean it.
2. Ensure that the trigger sensor is
aligned correctly, and if it is
not, contact your service
personnel to re-align it.
3. Ensure that the trigger sensor is
working correctly, and if it has
failed, contact your service
personnel.
Marks containers in the wrong 1. Ensure that you have selected

location. the correct PCF, and if you have
not, select the correct one.
2. Check the PCF and confirm that
no one has incorrectly changed
it, and if someone has, contact
your service personnel to
correct the problem.
3. Check the mechanical alignment
of the print head, and if it needs
adjustment, contact your
service personnel.

Document 41195-0510
If the Lasetec II... Then...
Marks containers faintly. 1. Check the mechanical alignment

of the print head and the focal
point, and if they need
re-alignment, reset the focal
point on a sample container.
The section Focusing and
Aligning Your Product Code on a
Container describes how to reset
the focal point on a sample
container.
2. Ensure that you are using the
correct product code, and if you
are not, select the correct one.
3. Ensure that the product code
that you are using is configured
correctly for the type of
container that you are marking,
and if you are using an incorrect
product code, contact your
service personnel to check the
configuration.
4. Clean the focal lens.
5. Contact your service personnel
to ensure that the laser power is
set correctly for the type of
container that you are marking,
and if it is not, correct it.
Fails to start when you press the Check your facility’s circuit breaker
power switch. and ensure that it is open. If it is
not, contact your service personnel.
Turns on when you press the power 1. Reset the system, as the
switch and the fault and laser computer inside the Lasetec II
emission beacons light, but never print head is locked up.
loads the Lasetec II Main Menu. The section Resetting the
Lasetec II tells you how to reset
the Lasetec II.
2. Contact your service personnel,
as the computer inside the
Lasetec II has locked up and
needs attention.
Turns on when you press the power 1. Ensure that you have turned on
switch, but the laser emission the system enable key switch,
beacon does not light. and if it is not, turn it clockwise
to the on position.
2. Contact your service personnel
and ask them to check the
access doors and laser shielding
in the Lasetec II, as the
customer interlocks might be
open.
Document 41195-0510
Document 41195-0510
12. Servicing Your Lasetec II
This chapter provides instructions for servicing and repairing or

replacing the hardware components of your Lasetec II.
Servicing Your Lasetec II 12-1

Document 41195-0510
12.1 Before You Begin
12.1.1 Safeguards to Observe
Before you begin, familiarize yourself with these safety proce-

dures. Failure to follow proper safety procedures can cause injury
to yourself or others or damage the equipment.
• Before you begin any procedure ensure that the main power
to the Lasetec II is turned off.
• Never place any body part in front of the focal lens while the
main power is turned on.
• Never look into the lens while the main power is turned on.
• To avoid damaging the circuitry of the Lasetec II, when
replacing circuit boards, ground yourself by using an electro-
static discharge (ESD) wrist strap.

Document 41195-0510
12.2 Accessing the Inside of the Print Head
and Laser Enclosure
12.2.1 Introduction
On a 30-watt Lasetec II, the print head contains the laser,

electronics, air, and steering mechanisms, as well as the system
and laser power supplies.
On a 60-watt Lasetec II, the print head (on the top) contains the
electronics and the system and laser power supplies. The laser
enclosure (on the bottom) contains the laser and steering
mechanisms.
To access these components on a 30-watt Lasetec II, you must

remove the print head cover. You might also need to remove the
back panel, through which all external cables pass, to gain room
to work within the print head.
To access these components on a 60-watt Lasetec II, you must

remove the print head cover. You might also need to remove the
back panel, through which external cables pass, to gain room to
work within the print head. To gain access to the laser and
steering mechanisms, you must remove the laser enclosure cover.
12.2.2 Removing the Print Head Cover
Follow these steps to remove the print head cover.
1. Ensure that all power to the Lasetec II is turned off.
2. Using a standard blade screwdriver:
On the print head of the 30-watt Lasetec II, loosen the

six locking fasteners by turning them counter
clockwise.
On the print head of the 60-watt Lasetec II, loosen the
four locking fasteners by turning them counter
clockwise.
3. Grasp the edges of the print head cover and lift up.

Document 41195-0510
12.2.3 Removing the Back Panel
Follow these steps to remove the back panel of the print head.
2. Loosen all squeeze fittings through which cables pass.
No. Description
1 Squeeze fitting for operator 2 1
station signal cable
2 Remove six screws

1
No. Description
1 Squeeze fitting for the
operator station signal cable
2 Remove six screws

Document 41195-0510
3. Remove the screws that hold the back panel in place, and
pull away the back panel from the print head.
No. Description
back panel
back panel (top)
1 2
Figure 12-3. Pulling Away the Back Panel
12.2.4 Closing the Back Panel and the Print Head Cover
Follow these steps to close the back panel and print head cover.
1. Put the back panel back into place.
2. On the back panel, insert and tighten the screws.
3. Align the interlock connector on the print head cover with

the interlock connector inside the print head and push the
cover into place on the print head enclosure.
No. Description
1 Print head cover interlock
connector inside the print
head (looking down) on a 1
30-watt Lasetec II
No. Description
2 Print head cover interlock
connector inside the print
head (looking down) on a 2
60-watt Lasetec II
Figure 12-4. Print Head Cover Interlock Connector

Document 41195-0510
4. Using a standard blade screwdriver, tighten the locking
fasteners by turning them clockwise.
12.2.5 Removing the Laser Enclosure Cover on a 60-Watt

Lasetec II
Follow these steps to remove the laser enclosure cover.
2. Using a Phillips head screwdriver, unscrew the latch.
No. Description
1 Latch 1
2 Laser enclosure cover
2
Figure 12-5. Unscrewing the Latch
Note: The screw is captive. It does not fall out when it is loose.

Document 41195-0510
3. Grasp the top of the latch with one hand and with the other,
lift the print head at its hinges.
No. Description 1
1 Print head
2 Lifting the print head
at its hinges 2
3 Laser enclosure cover
Figure 12-6. Lifting the Print Head
4. Lock the print head in place by inserting the plug in the slot.
No. Description
1 Plug
1
Figure 12-7. Locking the Print Head in Place

Document 41195-0510
5. Using a standard blade screwdriver, loosen the six locking
fasteners on the cover by turning them counterclockwise.
6. Grasp the edges of the laser enclosure cover and lift up.
12.2.6 Closing the Laser Enclosure Cover on a 60-Watt

Lasetec II
Follow these steps to remove the laser enclosure cover.
2. Align the interlock connector on the laser enclosure cover

with the interlock connector inside the laser enclosure and
push the cover into place on the laser enclosure.
3. Using a standard blade screwdriver, tighten the locking

fasteners by turning them clockwise.
4. Grasping the edge of the print head, pull out the plug and
lower the print head onto the latch.
No. Description
1 Plug
1
Figure 12-8. Pulling Out the Plug

Document 41195-0510
5. Using a Phillips head screwdriver, screw the latch into
place.
No. Description
1 Latch 1
Figure 12-9. Screwing the Latch Into Place

Document 41195-0510
12.3 Updating Lasetec II System Software
12.3.1 Utilities That You Use to Update System Software
You use these utilities to update the Lasetec II system software.
You use this utility... To...
LLINK.EXE Establish communication between the Lasetec II and

a computer.
You can specify these options with LLINK.EXE.
Important: You can also specify

options in the configuration file
LLINK.CFG, which you place in the
same directory as LLINK.exe.
Use option... To...

/BAKUPVER=dir Specify the directory on your
computer where LLINK is to place
copies of original version files.
/BAKUPDAT=dir Specify the directory on your
computer where LLINK is to place
copies of original data files.
/Brate Specify the baud rate to use for
communication. You can specify
these values for rate:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19.2K
• 38.4K
• 56K
/BIrate Specify the initial baud rate to use
when establishing communication.
You can specify these values for
rate:
• 2400
• 4800
• 9600
• 19.2K
• 38.4K
• 56K
/COMn Specify the COM port to use. You
can specify 1 through 7 for n.
/DFdps Specify number of data bits (d),
parity (p), and number of stop bits
(s). You can specify 5 through 8 for
d, N, O, or E for p, and 1 or 2 for s.
/MONO Display screens in grayscale rather
than color, the default.
/SLAVE Run the LLINK.EXE utility as a
slave program on the Lasetec II.
/H or /? Display a help screen that lists and
briefly describes these options.

Document 41195-0510
You use this utility... To...
UDLAZ.EXE Automatically install the latest versions of Lasetec II

system software files.
Note: This utility is a self-extracting archive that

contains the Lasetec II system software, and
associated configuration files, language files, font
files, and other similar files.
Important: The name of the utility

that you obtain might differ from
UDLAZ.exe.
12.3.2 Diagram: LLINK.EXE Utility Main Menu
The LLINK.EXE utility main menu is the first menu that the
system displays when you run the LLINK.EXE utility.
Figure 12-10. LLINK.EXE Main Menu

Document 41195-0510
12.3.3 Elements on the LLINK.EXE Utility Main Menu
Use this table to learn the purpose of each element on the

LLINK.EXE utility main menu.
LLINK 2.01 - Copyright Determine the version of the LLINK.EXE utility

(c) 2000-2002 IDC that you are using.
B 9600 Determine the initial baud rate that the

LLINK.EXE utility is using to establish
communication between the Lasetec II and your
notebook computer.
8N1 Determine number of data bits, parity, and

number of stop bits that the LLINK.EXE utility
is using to communicate.
COM1 Determine the port that the LLINK.EXE utility is

using to communicate.
VERSION: Specify the updated version of the Lasetec II

system software that you are installing.
DAT: Indicate whether you want to send or receive

updated Lasetec II system software.
SEND Send updated Lasetec II system software files.
RECEIVE Receive updated Lasetec II system software files.
EXIT Close and exit from the current send session.
Exit LLINK Close the link and exit from the LLINK.EXE
utility.

Document 41195-0510
12.3.4 Keys That You Can Use on the LLINK.EXE Utility
Main Menu
Use the following keys on your Lasetec II operator station

keyboard to navigate within the LLINK.EXE utility main menu.
TAB, left arrow (←), right arrow Move between, and highlight,
(→), up arrow (↑), or down arrow (↓) elements.
ENTER Do one of the following, depending

on the context:
• Change a value in a field.

• Highlight a value in a field so
that you can change that value.
• Select a value from a pop-up
menu that is displayed for a
field.
When the system software
displays a pop-up menu, use the
up and down arrow keys to
select the menu option that you
want.
12.3.5 Ways to Update the Lasetec II System Software
At present, you can update the Lasetec II system software three

ways. The method that you use depends on your particular
configuration and Lasetec II model.
Use this chart to determine the best method to use.
If you are using a... Use the... For which you need...
Lasetec II that was Updating System • A notebook or portable computer with an available
manufactured before Software by Using the RS-232 serial port, preferably connected at COM1.
2009 Serial Port Method
• RS-232 null modem cable (with pins 2 and 3
crossed) or a universal serial bus (USB) to RS-232
serial cable.
• The latest versions of the utilities UDLAZ.EXE and
LLINK.EXE, either stored on the notebook or
portable computer or stored on a disk or drive that
is attached to the notebook or portable computer.
Updating System • Either a notebook or a desktop computer.

Software by Using the
Compact Flash Card • A compact flash card reader that is attached to
Method your notebook or desktop computer.
• The latest versions of the utilities UDLAZ.EXE and
LLINK.EXE, either stored on the notebook or
portable computer or stored on a disk or drive that
is attached to the notebook or portable computer.

Document 41195-0510
If you are using a... Use the... For which you need...
Lasetec II that was Updating System • A 10-pin USB-to-motherboard header cable, which
manufactured in or after Software by Using the you obtain from Industrial Dynamics/filtec.
2009 Universal Serial Bus
Method • A USB storage device that has a maximum capacity
of 2 Gbytes and is formatted with a FAT16 file
system.
Important: The capacity of your

USB device can exceed 2 Gbytes,
but you will only be able to access
up to 2 Gbytes of data on it.
Best Practice: Use a SanDisk Cruzer USB drive, as

this brand works reliably with the Lasetec II CPU.
• The utilities UDLAZ.EXE and LLINK.EXE, stored
on your USB storage device.

Document 41195-0510
12.4 Updating System Software by Using the
Serial Port Method
12.4.1 Steps: Establishing Communication
Follow these steps to establish communication between your

notebook computer and the Lasetec II.
1. Ensure that power to the Lasetec II is turned off.
2. If it isn’t already removed, remove the back panel from the

Lasetec II.
3. Connect the RS-232 null modem or the RS-232 connector on

the USB to serial RS-232 cable to the COM1 DB9 RS-232 cable
connector.
No. Description
1 COM1 DB9 RS-232 cable connector
on a 30-watt Lasetec II
No. Description
2 COM1 DB9 RS-232 cable connector
on a 60-watt Lasetec II
Figure 12-11. COM 1 DB9 RS-232 Cable Connector
4. Connect the other end of the RS-232 null modem cable to

the serial port on your notebook or portable computer or
connect the USB connector to the USB port on your notebook
or portable computer.
5. Turn on your Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The Lasetec II system starts and displays the Lasetec
II Main Menu on the operator station screen.
6. On the operator station keyboard, press the F9 key three

times.
Result: The system displays the Exit Lasetec [Y/N]? user

alert.
7. On the operator station keyboard, press the Y key.
Result: The Lasetec II system exits to DOS and displays the

DOS prompt [ LASETEC ] C:\>LASETEC2.
8. On the Lasetec operator station keyboard, type LL /SLAVE

or LLINK /SLAVE and press ENTER.
The Lasetec II starts Llink, which places the Lasetec II in

slave mode.
9. On your notebook computer, are you using Windows XP,

Windows Vista, or Windows 7?
If you are using Windows XP, on your notebook computer,

display the Start Menu, select Run, and in the Run dialog
box, type PATH-TO-LLINK.EXE /B56K, and click OK.
If you are using Windows Vista or Windows 7, on your

notebook computer, press the Windows ( ) and R keys
simultaneously, and in the Run dialog box, type
PATH-TO-LLINK.EXE /B56K, and click OK.
Note: PATH-TO-LLINK.EXE is the actual directory path to the

LLINK.EXE utility on your notebook computer.
Result: Your notebook computer and the Lasetec II establish

communication with each other.
12.4.2 Steps: Transferring and Installing Files
Follow these steps to transfer and install updated system

software files from your notebook computer to the Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
1. On your notebook computer’s keyboard, use the arrow keys,
Tab, and Enter keys to select Send on the LLINK.EXE
utility main menu and press the Enter key.
Result: The LLINK.EXE utility displays a dialog box that

prompts you to specify where on your notebook computer
the files that you want to install on the Lasetec II are
located.
2. In the dialog box, type the path to the UDLAZO.EXE utility,

and, on your notebook computer’s keyboard, press Enter.
Result: The LLINK.EXE utility displays a dialog box that

prompts you to specify the location on the Lasetec II where
you want to install the updated files.
3. In the dialog box, type the path C:\LASETEC2 and, on your

notebook computer’s keyboard, press Enter.
Result: LLINK.EXE transfers a copy of UDLAZO.EXE from

your notebook computer to the directory C:\LASETEC2 on
the Lasetec II.
4. Do you want to install additional updated files on the

Lasetec II?
If yes, repeat from step 1 in Steps: Transferring and

Installing Files.
If no, on the LLINK.EXE utility main menu on your

notebook computer, select EXIT.
5. On the Lasetec II operator station, at the DOS prompt, type

CD LASETEC2 and at the DOS prompt, type UDLAZO.
Result: The Lasetec II system runs the UDLAZO.EXE

self-extracting utility and deposits the extracted files in the
current directory.
6. Does the Lasetec II system display a dialog box that asks you
to confirm that you want to overwrite files?
If yes, click OK.

7. At the DOS prompt, type LASETEC and press ENTER.
Result: The Lasetec II reboots and displays the Lasetec II

Main Menu, which contains the version number in the upper
left.

Document 41195-0510
8. Is the correct version shown?
If yes, disconnect the serial cable from the Lasetec II and

your notebook computer.
If no, repeat from step 1 in Steps: Establishing

Communication.

Document 41195-0510
Compact Flash Card Method
You need to have a compact flash card reader that you have
attached to your notebook or desktop computer to successfully
update the Lasetec II system software by using this method.
12.5.2 Steps
Follow these steps to update the Lasetec II system software by

using the compact flash card method.
2. If they aren’t already, remove the back panel and print head
cover from the Lasetec II.
3. Remove the PC/104 and TX card assembly from the inside of

the print head.
See Also: The sections Removing the PC/104 and TX Cards

From a 30-Watt Lasetec II and Removing the PC/104 and TX
Cards From a 60-Watt Lasetec II describe how to remove the
PC/104 and TX cards.
4. Remove the compact flash card from flash card slot on the
PC/104 card and insert it into the compact flash reader that
you attached to your notebook or desktop computer.
Figure 12-12. Removing the Compact Flash Card

Document 41195-0510
5. Copy the UDLAZ.EXE file from your notebook or desktop
computer to the C:\LASETEC2 directory on the compact
flash card.
6. On the compact flash card, double click UDLAZ.EXE.
Result: Your notebook or desktop computer runs the

UDLAZO.EXE self-extracting utility and deposits the
extracted files in the current directory on the compact flash
card.
7. Does your notebook or desktop computer display a dialog

box that asks you to confirm that you want to overwrite
files?
If yes, click OK.

8. Remove the compact flash card from the reader and replace
it in the compact flash card slot on the PC/104 card.
9. Replace the PC/104 and TX card assembly in the Lasetec II.
See Also: The sections Replacing the PC/104 and TX Cards in

the 30-Watt Lasetec II and Replacing the PC/104 and TX
Cards in the 60-Watt Lasetec II describe how to replace the
Note: Before proceeding, verify that all cable connections to

the marking engine card are secure and that all cards are
seated correctly.

II Main Menu, which contains the version number in the
upper left.
If yes, you have successfully updated your Lasetec II system

software.
If no, repeat from step 1 in Steps: Establishing

Communication.

Document 41195-0510
Universal Serial Bus Method
To use a universal serial bus (USB) storage device with the

Lasetec II, ensure that:
• Your Lasetec II was manufactured in or after 2009.

• The maximum capacity of your USB storage device is 2
Gbytes.
Important: The capacity of your USB device can exceed 2

Gbytes, but you will be able to access only up to 2 Gbytes of
data on it.
Best Practice: Use a SanDisk Cruzer USB drive, as this brand

works reliably with the Lasetec II CPU.
• Your USB storage device is formatted with a FAT16 file
system.
• You have obtained the utilities UDLAZ.EXE from Industrial
Dynamics/filtec and you have copied it to your USB storage
device.
• You have obtained a 10-pin USB-to-motherboard header
cable, also known as a 10-pin internal USB to external USB
female port panel mount cable.
Industrial Dynamics/filtec provides this cable.
Figure 12-13. 10-Pin USB-to-Motherboard Header Cable
12.6.2 Steps: Connecting the Cable
Follow these steps to connect the 10-pin USB-to-motherboard

header cable to the Lasetec II system.

Document 41195-0510
2. If it isn’t already removed, remove the back panel from the
Lasetec II.
3. Attach the 10-pin connector on the USB-to-motherboard

header cable to the header pins on the PC/104 card.
1
No. Description
1 TX card
2 PC/104 card
3 Marking engine
4 Header pins on the PC/104
card for the USB cable 2
5 Compact flash card
3
6 10-pin USB-to-motherboard
header cable connected to
the header pins on the
PC/104 card 4 5
7 Marking engine ribbon
cable connector and ribbon
Figure 12-14. Connecting a USB Cable to the Header Pins on

the PC/104 Card
4. Connect your USB storage device to the female USB

connector on the USB-to-motherboard header cable.
No. Description
1 Female connector on the
USB-to-motherboard
header cable that
Industrial Dynamics/filtec
provides
1
Figure 12-15. Female Connector on the USB-to-Motherboard

Header Cable

Document 41195-0510
12.6.3 Steps: Transferring and Installing Files
Follow these steps to transfer and install updated system

software files from your notebook computer to the Lasetec II.

II Main Menu on the operator station screen.
2. On the operator station keyboard, press the F9 key three

times.
Result: The system displays the Exit Lasetec [Y/N]? user

alert.
3. On the operator station keyboard, press the Y key.
Result: The Lasetec II system exits to DOS and displays the

DOS prompt [ LASETEC ] C:\>LASETEC2.
4. On the Lasetec II operator station keyboard, at the DOS

prompt, type COPY D:\UDLAZO.EXE and press ENTER.
Result: The Lasetec II system copies the UDLAZO.EXE utility

from your USB storage device to the current directory
C:\LASETEC2.
5. Does the Lasetec II prompt you to confirm that you want to

overwrite UDLAZO.EXE?
If yes, on the operator station keyboard, at the DOS prompt,

type Y for yes and press ENTER.
6. Do you want to install additional updated files on the

Lasetec II?
If yes, use the COPY command to copy all files that you
want from your USB storage device to the Lasetec II.
7. On the operator station keyboard, at the DOS prompt, type

UDLAZO and press ENTER.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The Lasetec II system runs the UDLAZO.EXE
self-extracting utility and deposits the extracted files in the
current directory.
8. Does the Lasetec II system display a dialog box that asks you
to confirm that you want to overwrite files?
If yes, type Y for yes and press ENTER.

9. At the DOS prompt, type LASETEC and press ENTER.
Result: The Lasetec II reboots and displays the Lasetec II

Main Menu, which contains the version number in the upper
left.
If yes, you have successfully updated your Lasetec II system

software.
If no, repeat from step 1 in Steps: Connecting the Cable.

Document 41195-0510
12.7 Removing the Advanced Features
Password
You need to have a compact flash card reader that you have
attached to your notebook or desktop computer to successfully
update the Lasetec II system software by using this method.
12.7.2 Steps
Follow these steps to manually reset the password that operators

must provide to gain access to the advanced features of the
Lasetec II.
2. If they aren’t already, remove the back panel and print head
cover from the Lasetec II.
3. Remove the PC/104 and TX card assembly from the inside of

the print head.
See Also: The sections Removing the PC/104 and TX Cards

From a 30-Watt Lasetec II and Removing the PC/104 and TX
Cards From a 60-Watt Lasetec II describe how to remove the
4. Remove the compact flash card from flash card slot on the
PC/104 card and insert it into the compact flash reader that
you attached to your notebook or desktop computer.
Figure 12-16. Removing the Compact Flash Card

Document 41195-0510
5. Copy the entire Lasetec II system software folder
X:\LASETEC2 on the compact flash card onto your
notebook or desktop computer for backup.
Note: X represents the actual drive letter of your compact

flash card reader.
12.7.3 Steps: Editing the LASETEC.CFG Configuration File
Follow these steps to edit the LASETEC.CFG configuration file.
1. On your notebook or desktop computer, use a text editor

such as the MS-DOS editor or Notepad to open, on the
compact flash card, the LASETEC.CFG configuration file.
Result: Your text editor displays the contents of the

LASETEC.CFG configuration file on the compact flash card.
Figure 12-17. MS-DOS Editor Window Showing LASETEC.CFG

Document 41195-0510
2. Delete the entire string characters that follows Password=
(shown as kOROpdefZCWXgKw in Figure 12-17).
Figure 12-18. MS-DOS Editor Window Showing Removed

Password
3. Save LASETEC.CFG on the compact flash card.
4. Remove the compact flash card from the reader and replace
it in the compact flash card slot on the PC/104 card.
5. Replace the PC/104 and TX card assembly in the Lasetec II.
See Also: The sections Replacing the PC/104 and TX Cards in

the 30-Watt Lasetec II and Replacing the PC/104 and TX
Cards in the 60-Watt Lasetec II describe how to replace the

II Main Menu.
7. On your operator station keyboard, press the F9 key to

confirm that you can access the Advanced Menu without
providing a password.

Document 41195-0510
12.8 Removing and Replacing the Operator
Station
12.8.1 Steps
Follow these instructions to remove and replace the operator

station.
2. If it isn’t already removed, remove the print head cover

from the Lasetec II.
3. Remove the operator station signal cable ground wire from

the marker engine.
3
No. Description
1 Marker engine 2
wire
1

Marker Engine
4. Remove the marker engine ground wire from the double

connector on the operator station signal cable ground wire.

Document 41195-0510
5. Remove the operator station signal cable from connector J3
on the TX card.
1 No. Description 2
signal cable on a 30-watt Lasetec II
signal cable on a 60-watt Lasetec II
Figure 12-20. Connector J3 on the TX Card for the Operator

Station Cable
6. Connect the signal cable for the new operator station to

connector J3 on the TX card.
7. If it is not already removed, remove the ground wire from

the marker engine.
8. Connect the ground wire to the double connector on the

operator station signal cable ground wire.

Document 41195-0510
9. Connect the operator station signal cable ground wire to the
marker engine, as shown below.
3
No. Description
1 Marker engine 2
wire
1

Marker Engine

Document 41195-0510
12.9 Removing and Replacing the 30-Watt
Laser Assembly
12.9.1 Steps: Removing the Laser Assembly
Follow these steps to remove the laser assembly from the Lasetec
II print head.
2. If it isn’t already removed, remove the print head cover

3. Remove the metal shroud by pulling the shroud spring

release knob and lifting the shroud up.
No. Description
1 Metal shroud spring release knob
Figure 12-22. Removing the Metal Shroud on the Laser

Assembly

Document 41195-0510
4. Disconnect the cables that connect the safety shutter (P2),
the alignment diode (P1), and the power supply (J1).
No. Description
1
1 Power supply cable J1
2 Alignment diode cable P1
3 Safety shutter cable P2
2
Figure 12-23. Disconnecting Cables to Remove the Laser

Assembly
5. Slide the cooling air hose from under the retaining block.
Note: Do not disconnect the hose from the air cooler.
No. Description
1 Retaining block
2 Pull the cooling air hose from under
the retaining block.
Note: Do not disconnect the hose

from the air cooler.
2
Figure 12-24. Sliding the Cooling Air Hose From the Retaining
Block

Document 41195-0510
6. Remove the supplied laser tools by first pulling up on the
black knobs until they extend completely, and then opening
them to form T-handles.
No. Description
1 Pull up on the black knob to extend
to a handle. 1
2 When fully extended, fold the handle
and slide it through hole to form a
T-handle.
Figure 12-25. Removing the Supplied Laser Tools

Document 41195-0510
7. Using the tool that has the larger hex wrench, loosen the
four laser mounting bolts.
Note: The bolts are captive. They do not fall out when they
are completely loose.
No. Description
1 Rear mounting bolts (2)
2 Front mounting bolts (2)
3 Rear wrench location
4 Front wrench location
1 3 2 4
Figure 12-26. Removing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts
8. Screw one wrench into the threaded hole at the front of the
laser assembly base plate and another into the threaded
hole at the rear of the laser assembly base plate.
Note: Ensure that the base plate holes that you choose are
diagonal from each other, as shown in Figure 12-26.
No. Description 2
1 Screw the wrenches into the holes in
the base plate at the front and the rear
of the laser assembly.
2 When fully extended, the T-handles
enable you to pull the unit out of the
chassis.
Figure 12-27. Screw the Wrenches Into the Base Plate

Document 41195-0510
9. Grasp both T-handle wrenches and gently rock the laser
assembly to unseat it.
10. Lift the rear slightly and then lift the front and rear until the
laser assembly clears the alignment pins and then move the
entire assembly slightly to the rear and lift the unit straight
up, being extremely careful not to bump the upscope
assembly on the front end.
No. Description
1 Remove the rear slightly ahead of the front.
2 When installing, insert the front slightly ahead of the rear.
Figure 12-28. Removing the Laser Assembly
Note: Do not attempt to access the laser assembly or tamper

with the upscope optics assembly. Tampering with the laser
assembly or upscope optics assembly can damage the laser and
void your warranty.
12.9.2 Steps: Replacing the Laser Assembly
Follow these steps to replace the laser assembly in the Lasetec II

print head.
1. Ensure that power to the Lasetec II is turned off and that the
print head cover is removed.

Document 41195-0510
2. If you haven’t already, screw one T-handle wrench into the
threaded hole at the front of the laser assembly base plate
and another into the threaded hole at the rear of the laser
assembly base plate.
No. Description 2
enable you to slide the unit into the
chassis.
Figure 12-29. Screwing the Wrenches Into the Base Plate
3. Grasp both T-handle wrenches and lower the laser assembly

into the chassis, inserting the front of the laser assembly
slightly ahead of the rear.
No. Description
1 and 2 Insert the front (1) slightly
ahead of the rear (2).
Figure 12-30. Lowering the Laser Assembly Into the Chassis

Document 41195-0510
4. Carefully lower and align the laser assembly onto the
alignment dowels and ensure that it sits flush inside the
cabinet.
5. Using the tool that has the larger hex wrench, tighten the
No. Description
3 Rear wrench location
4 Front wrench location
1 3 2 4
Figure 12-31. Replacing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts

Document 41195-0510
6. Replace the supplied laser tools by first flipping and sliding
the T-handles into the tubes and then twisting and pushing
the black knobs down into the chassis.
No. Description
1 Flip and slide the T-handle into the
tube. 2
2 Twist and push down on the black
knob to insert it into the chassis.
Figure 12-32. Removing the Supplied Laser Tools
7. Slide and the cooling air hose under the retaining block.
No. Description
1 Retaining block
2 Slide and push the cooling air hose
under the retaining block.
Figure 12-33. Sliding the Cooling Air Hose Under the Retaining
Block

Document 41195-0510
8. Connect the safety shutter (P2), the alignment diode (P1),
and power supply (J1) cables, ensuring that none are
pinched or crimped.
No. Description
1
2
Figure 12-34. Connecting Cables to Replace the Laser

Assembly
9. Push the shroud into place and tighten the shroud spring
release knob.
No. Description
Figure 12-35. Replacing the Metal Shroud on the Laser

Assembly
10. Replace the print head cover on the Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
12.10 Removing and Replacing the 60-Watt
Laser Assembly
12.10.1 Steps: Draining Water From the Chiller Hoses
1. Obtain a mop, rags, and a pail or bucket and keep all of

these items handy near your Lasetec II.
2. From the back panel, disconnect both chiller hoses and drain
all water or coolant from the hoses into the bucket.
3. Mop up, remove, and dry all water or coolant.
12.10.2 Steps: Removing the Laser Assembly
Follow these steps to remove the laser assembly from the Lasetec
II laser enclosure.
2. If it isn’t already removed, remove the laser enclosure cover

The section Removing the Laser Enclosure Cover on a

60-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the laser
enclosure cover.

Document 41195-0510
3. Remove the metal shroud by pulling the shroud spring
release knob and lifting the shroud up.
No. Description

Assembly
4. Using a 5/8 inch wrench, uncouple both chiller hoses.
No. Description
1 Chiller hose couplings
Figure 12-37. Chiller Hose Couplings

Document 41195-0510
5. Disconnect the cables that connect the safety shutter (P2),
the alignment diode (P1), and the power supply (J1).
No. Description
3
2
Figure 12-38. Disconnecting Cables to Remove the Laser

Assembly
6. Get the laser tools that Industrial Dynamics/filtec ships

separately with your Lasetec II and then open them to form
T-handles, or get a 5/32 inch Allen wrench.
Figure 12-39. Lasetec II Laser Tools

Document 41195-0510
7. Using the tool that has the larger hex wrench, loosen the
Note: The bolts are captive. They do not fall out when they
are completely loose.
No. Description
1 2
Figure 12-40. Removing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts
8. Screw one wrench into the threaded hole at the front of the
laser assembly base plate and another into the threaded
hole at the rear of the laser assembly base plate.

Document 41195-0510
No. Description 2
chassis.
9. Grasp both T-handle wrenches and gently rock the laser

assembly to unseat it, ensuring that any droplets of water or
coolant that remain in the chiller couplings do not leak out.
Figure 12-42. Grasping Both T-Handle Wrenches

Document 41195-0510
10. Lift the one end slightly and then the other until the laser
assembly clears the alignment pins and then move the entire
assembly slightly to the rear and lift it straight up, being
careful not to bump the upscope assembly on the front.
Figure 12-43. Removing the Laser Assembly
11. Rest the assembly on the Lasetec II laser enclosure.
Figure 12-44. Resting the Assembly on the Laser Enclosure
Note: Do not attempt to access the laser assembly or tamper

with the upscope optics assembly. Tampering with the laser
assembly or upscope optics assembly can damage the laser and
void your warranty.

Document 41195-0510
12.10.3 Steps: Replacing the Laser Assembly
Follow these steps to replace the laser assembly in the Lasetec II

laser enclosure.
1. Ensure that power to the Lasetec II is turned off and that the
laser enclosure cover is removed.
2. If you haven’t already, screw one T-handle wrench into the

threaded hole at the front of the laser assembly base plate
and another into the threaded hole at the rear of the laser
assembly base plate.
No. Description 2
chassis.

Document 41195-0510
3. Grasp both T-handle wrenches and lower the laser assembly
into the chassis, inserting one end of the laser assembly
slightly ahead of the other, ensuring that any droplets of
water or coolant that remain in the chiller couplings do not
leak out.
Figure 12-46. Lowering the Laser Assembly Into the Chassis
4. Carefully lower and align the laser assembly onto the

alignment dowels and ensure that it sits flush inside the
cabinet.

Document 41195-0510
5. Using the Industrial Dynamics/filtec tool that has the larger
hex wrench or your own 5/32 inch Allen wrench, tighten the
No. Description
1 2
Figure 12-47. Replacing the Laser Assembly Mounting Bolts
6. Reconnect the hoses to the chiller hose couplings on the

inside and the outside of the Lasetec II and refill the chiller
with water or coolant.

Document 41195-0510
7. Connect the safety shutter (P2), the alignment diode (P1),
and power supply (J1) cables, ensuring that none are
pinched or crimped.
No. Description
3
2
Figure 12-48. Connecting Cables to Replace the Laser

Assembly
8. Push the shroud into place and tighten the shroud spring
release knob.
No. Description
Figure 12-49. Replacing the Metal Shroud
9. Replace the laser enclosure cover on the Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
12.11 Removing the PC/104 and TX Cards
From a 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.11.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the PC/104 and TX card assembly.
1. If you haven’t already, remove the print head cover and

back panel.
The section Accessing the Inside of the Print Head and Laser
Enclosure tells you how to remove the print head cover and
back panel.
2. On the TX card, disconnect the P3 cable and J2 connector.
No. Disconnect
1 Cable P2 from the marking engine
2 Connector J3 for operator station signal cable
3
3 Retaining screw that is not marked with white
paint
Figure 12-50. Disconnecting the Cables From the TX Card

Document 41195-0510
3. Remove the one screw that is not marked with a white paint
dot.
Important: Do not remove the other three screws that are

marked with white paint dots at this time.
4. Grasp the edges of TX card and, with a gentle rocking

motion, pull up the entire assembly.
Figure 12-51. Removing the TX Card
5. Disconnect the P1 and P2 cables from the PC/104 card.
No. Description
1 Cable P1
2 Cable P2
Figure 12-52. Disconnecting the Cables From the PC/104 Card

Document 41195-0510
6. Are you removing the PC/104 and TX cards to update the
Lasetec II system software?
If yes, go to Updating System Software by Using the Compact

Flash Card Method and follow the steps in that section.
7. Are you removing the PC/104 and TX card assembly to

replace the compact flash card?
If yes, replace the compact flash card and go to Replacing

the PC/104 and TX Cards in the 30-Watt Lasetec II.

replace either the PC/104 card or the TX card?
If yes, separate the two cards by disconnecting the P1 and

P4 cables from the TX card, removing the three pan head
bolts that are marked with the white paint dots, and gently
pulling the two cards apart.
9. Do you intend to access the marking engine or marking

engine power supply for service or replacement?
If yes, go to Removing the Marking Engine From a 30-Watt

Lasetec II.
If no, repair your faulty PC/104 or TX card, as necessary, or

have handy the replacement PC/104 or TX card that you
intend to install in the Lasetec II and go to Replacing the
PC/104 and TX Cards in the 30-Watt Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
12.12 Removing the PC/104 and TX Cards
12.12.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the PC/104 and TX card assembly.

back panel.
back panel.
2. On the TX card, disconnect the P3 cable and J2 connector.
No. Disconnect
1
1 Cable P2 from the marking
engine
2 Connector J3 for operator
station signal cable
3 Retaining screw that is not
marked with white paint
2
Figure 12-53. Disconnecting the Cables From the TX Card
3. Remove the one screw that is not marked with a white paint
dot.
Important: Do not remove the other three screws that are

marked with white paint dots at this time.

Document 41195-0510
4. Grasp the edges of TX card and, with a gentle rocking
motion, pull up the entire assembly.
Figure 12-54. Removing the TX Card
5. Disconnect the P1 and P2 cables from the PC/104 card.
No. Description
1 Cable P1
2 Cable P2
Figure 12-55. Disconnecting the Cables From the PC/104 Card

Document 41195-0510
6. Are you removing the PC/104 and TX cards to update the
Lasetec II system software?
If yes, go to Updating System Software by Using the Compact

Flash Card Method and follow the steps in that section.

replace the compact flash card?
If yes, replace the compact flash card and go to Replacing

the PC/104 and TX Cards in the 60-Watt Lasetec II.

replace either the PC/104 card or the TX card?
If yes, separate the two cards by disconnecting the P1 and

P4 cables from the TX card, removing the three pan head
bolts that are marked with the white paint dots, and gently
pulling the two cards apart.
9. Do you intend to access the marking engine or marking

engine power supply for service or replacement?
If yes, go to Removing the Marking Engine From a 60-Watt

Lasetec II.
If no, repair your faulty PC/104 or TX card, as necessary, or

have handy the replacement PC/104 or TX card that you
intend to install in the Lasetec II and go to Replacing the
PC/104 and TX Cards in the 60-Watt Lasetec II.

Document 41195-0510
12.13 Removing the Marking Engine From a
30-Watt Lasetec II
12.13.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the marking engine card.

back panel.
back panel.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the PC/104 and TX cards.
The section Removing the PC/104 and TX Cards From a

30-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the PC/104 and
TX card assembly.
3. Disconnect all cables from the marking engine card,

including PE ground, P4, J29, P8, P12, P502 and P520, P4,
P6, P9, P13, P14, P16, P17, P18, and P19.
4 5 6 7
No. Description
1 PE Ground
2 P4
3 J29
4 P12
5 P8
3
6 P520
7 P6, P9, P13, P14, P16, P17,
P18, P19
Figure 12-56. Disconnecting Cables From the Marking Engine

Card

Document 41195-0510
4. Snap out the plexiglas crossbar (with all of the P-cable wire
attached) and pull it away from the marking engine to give
you room to work.
No. Description
1 Crossbar
2 Snap out the crossbar
that is held in place by
pins at each end.
Figure 12-57. Removing the Plexiglas Crossbar
5. Reach through the Plexiglas divider and lift the front edge of
the marking engine card.

Document 41195-0510
Result: The marking engine card snaps up and pivots off of
the rear edge.
Figure 12-58. Releasing the Front of the Marking Engine Card

by Pulling Up
6. Grasp the rear of marking engine carriage and pull up.
Result: The marking engine carriage snaps from its position.

Document 41195-0510
7. Remove the marking engine card through the back of the
Figure 12-59. Removing the Marking Engine Card
8. Slide the marking engine card out of the plastic mounting

carriage.

Document 41195-0510
12.14 Removing the Marking Engine From a
60-Watt Lasetec II
12.14.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the marking engine card.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.
3. Disconnect all cables from the marking engine card,

including PE ground, P4, J29, P8, P12, P502 and P520, P4,
P6, P9, P13, P14, P16, P17, P18, and P19.
4 5 6 7
No. Description
1 PE Ground
2 P4
3 J29
3
4 P12
5 P8
6 P520
7 P6, P9, P13, P14, P16,
P17, P18, P19
2
Figure 12-60. Disconnecting Cables From the Marking Engine

Card

Document 41195-0510
4. Reach into the cabinet and lift up the front edge of the
marking engine card.
Result: The marking engine card snaps up and pivots off of

the rear edge.
5. Grasp the rear of marking engine carriage and pull up.
Result: The marking engine carriage snaps from its position.
6. Remove the marking engine card through the top of the

Figure 12-61. Removing the Marking Engine Card

Document 41195-0510
7. Slide the marking engine card out of the plastic mounting
carriage.
Figure 12-62. Sliding Out the Marking Engine Card

Document 41195-0510
12.15 Removing the Marking Engine Power
Supply From a 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.15.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the marking engine power supply.

TX card assembly.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the marking engine card.
The section Removing the Marking Engine From a 30-Watt

Lasetec II tells you how to remove the marking engine.
3. Disconnect the P502, P503 and P520 cables.
No. Description
1 P520 cable
2 P503 cable
3 P502 cable 1
Figure 12-63. Cables From the Marking Engine Power Supply

Card

Document 41195-0510
4. Pull the marking engine power supply card away from the
side until it is free of the grommets and then pull the card
up to free it from the galvanometers power supply.
No. Description
1 Rubber grommets at the top
of the marking engine power
supply card and the socket 1
connector (not shown) that
attaches the card to the
galvanometers power supply
card that is mounted on the
bottom of the enclosure
Figure 12-64. Rubber Grommets on the Marking Engine Power

Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
12.16 Removing Both Marking Engine Power
Supplies From a 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.16.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove both marking engine power

supplies.
1. From the first marking engine power supply, disconnect the

P502, P503 and P520 cables.
No. Description
1 P502 cable 1 2 3
2 P503 cable
3 P520 cable
Figure 12-65. Cables From the First Marking Engine Power

Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
No. Description
Figure 12-66. Rubber Grommets on the First Marking Engine

Power Supply Card
3. From the second marking engine power supply, disconnect

the P520 cable.
No. Description
1
1 P520 cable
Figure 12-67. Cable From the Second Marking Engine Power

Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
No. Description
Figure 12-68. Rubber Grommets on the Second Marking Engine

Power Supply

Document 41195-0510
12.17 Replacing the Marking Engine Power
Supply in the 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.17.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the marking engine power supply.

TX card assembly.

3. If you haven’t already, remove the marking engine power

supply card.
The section Removing the Marking Engine Power Supply

From a 30-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the
marking engine power supply.
4. Reseat the marking engine power supply card into the galva-
nometers power supply that is mounted at the bottom of the
enclosure and onto the grommets at the top of the card.
No. Description
supply card 1
Figure 12-69. Rubber Grommets on the Marking Engine Power

Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
5. Connect the P502, P503 and P520 cables.
No. Description
1 P520 cable
2 P503 cable
3 P502 cable 1
Figure 12-70. Cables to the Marking Engine Power Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
12.18 Replacing Both Marking Engine Power
Supplies in the 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.18.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace both marking engine power

supplies.
1. If you haven’t already, remove both marking engine power

supplies.
The section Removing Both Marking Engine Power Supplies

marking engine power supplies.
2. Reseat the first marking engine power supply card into the
first galvanometers power supply that is mounted at the
bottom of the enclosure and onto the grommets at the top
of the card.
No. Description
supply card 1
Figure 12-71. Rubber Grommets on the First Marking Engine

Power Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
3. Connect the P502, P503 and P520 cables.
No. Description
1 P502 cable 1 2 3
2 P503 cable
3 P520 cable
Figure 12-72. Cables to the Marking Engine Power Supply Card
4. Reseat the second marking engine power supply card into

the second galvanometers power supply that is mounted at
the bottom of the enclosure and onto the grommets at the
top of the card.
No. Description
supply card 1
Figure 12-73. Rubber Grommets on the Second Marking Engine

Power Supply

Document 41195-0510
5. Connect the P520 cable.
No. Description
1
1 P520 cable
Figure 12-74. Cable to the Second Marking Engine Power

Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
12.19 Removing the Laser Power Supply From
a 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.19.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the laser power supply card.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.

4. Disconnect the P702 and P2 cables from the laser power

supply card.
No. Description
1 Cable P702
2 Cable P2
Figure 12-75. Disconnecting Cables From the Laser Power

Supply Card

Document 41195-0510
5. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the two
nuts on the slide plate.
6. Slide the plate up.
Result: You release the mount for the laser power supply
card.
No. Description
1 Slide plate
2 Two retaining bolts
Figure 12-76. Loosening the Slide Plate
7. Remove the laser power supply card by pulling away from

the side of the enclosure and then pulling up.

Document 41195-0510
12.20 Removing Both Laser Power Supplies
12.20.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove both laser power supply cards.
1. If you haven’t already, remove the print head cover.
back panel.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the marking engine card,

including the PC/104 and TX cards assembly.

3. Disconnect the P702 and P602 cables from both laser power
supply cards.
No. Description
1 Cable P702
2 Cable P602
1
Figure 12-77. Disconnecting Cables From the Laser Power

Supply Cards

Document 41195-0510
4. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, loosen, but do not remove, the
four nuts on the two slide plates, as shown below.
Result: You release the mount for each laser power supply
card.
No. Description
1 Four slide plate nuts
2 Two slide plates
2
Figure 12-78. Loosening Nuts From the Slide Plates
5. Slide the plates so that both laser power supply cards move
freely.
6. Remove the laser power supply cards up and out of the

enclosure.

Document 41195-0510
12.21 Replacing the Laser Power Supply on a
30-Watt Lasetec II
12.21.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the laser power supply card.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.

4. If you haven’t already, remove the laser power supply card.
The section Removing the Laser Power Supply From a

30-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the laser power
supply.

Document 41195-0510
5. Insert the laser power supply card by sliding the card down
into the mounting plate and pushing it into the mounting
brackets.
1
No. Description
1 Notch in card mounting plate
2 Tab on slide plate mount 2
Figure 12-79. Notches in the Laser Power Supply Card

Mounting Brackets
6. Insert the two nuts on the slide plate and, using a 3/8 inch
wrench, tighten the nuts.
7. Connect the P702 and P2 cables to the laser power supply

card:
No. Description
1 Cable P702
2 Cable P2
Figure 12-80. Connecting Cables From the Laser Power Supply

Card

Document 41195-0510
12.22 Replacing Both Laser Power Supplies
on a 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.22.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace both laser power supply cards.
back panel.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the marking engine card,

including the PC/104 and TX cards assembly.

3. If you haven’t already, remove the laser power supply cards.
The section Removing Both Laser Power Supplies From a

60-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the laser power
supplies.
4. Insert both laser power supply cards by sliding the cards

down into the mounting plate and pushing each into the
mounting brackets.
1
No. Description
1 Notch in card mounting plate
2 Tab on slide plate mount 2
Figure 12-81. Notches in the Laser Power Supply Cards

Mounting Brackets
5. Move the slide plates into their respective positions and,

using a 3/8 inch wrench, tighten the four nuts.

Document 41195-0510
6. Connect the P702 and P602 cables to their respective laser
power supply card.
No. Description
1 Cable P702
2 Cable P602
1
Figure 12-82. Connecting Cables to Both Laser Power Supply

Cards

Document 41195-0510
12.23 Removing the Galvanometers Power
Supply From a 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.23.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the galvanometers power supply.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.


supply.


Document 41195-0510
5. Pull up and unplug the TB1 block and disconnect both the AC
power input cable P602 and the PE ground cable.
No. Description
1 TB1 block
2 AC power input cable (P602)
3 PE ground cable
Figure 12-83. Disconnecting Cables From the Galvanometers

Power Supply
6. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, loosen the two slide plate retaining
nuts.
No. Description
1 Slide plate
2 Two retaining nuts
Figure 12-84. Loosening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and

Sliding Plate
7. Slide the plate towards the rear of print head enclosure.

Document 41195-0510
8. Remove the galvanometers power supply by lifting it out of
the rear of the enclosure.
Figure 12-85. Removing the Galvanometers Power Supply

Document 41195-0510
12.24 Removing Both Galvanometers Power
Supplies From a 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.24.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove both galvanometers power supplies.
Enclosure tells you how to remove the print head cover.
2. Pull up and unplug the TB1 block on each galvanometers

power supply and disconnect both the AC power input cable
P602 and the PE ground cable on each galvanometers power
supply.
No. Description
2 PE ground cable
3 TB1 block

Power Supplies

Document 41195-0510
3. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, loosen the two slide plate retaining
nuts on each galvanometers power supply (four retaining
nuts in all).
No. Description
1 Slide plate
Figure 12-87. Loosening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and

Sliding Plates
4. Remove both galvanometers power supplies by lifting each

out through the top of the enclosure.

Document 41195-0510
12.25 Replacing the Galvanometers Power
Supply in the 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.25.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the galvanometers power supply.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.


supply.

5. If you haven’t already, remove the galvanometers power

supply.
The section Removing the Galvanometers Power Supply

From a 30-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the galva-
nometers power supply.

Document 41195-0510
6. Slide the galovonometers power supply card down into the
mounting plate and align it with the tab in the slide plate.
3
No. Description
1 Slide plate
2 Tab of slide plate mount 2
3 Card mount plate notch
Figure 12-88. Aligning the Notch When Replacing a

Galvanometers Power Supply
7. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, tighten the two slide plate

retaining nuts.
No. Description
1 Slide plate
Figure 12-89. Tightening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and

Sliding Plate

Document 41195-0510
8. Plug in the TB1 block and connect both the AC power input
cable P602 and the PE ground cable.
No. Description
1 TB1 block
3 PE ground cable
Figure 12-90. Connecting Cables to the Galvanometers Power

Supply

Document 41195-0510
12.26 Replacing Both Galvanometers Power
Supplies in the 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.26.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace both galvanometers power supplies.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the galvanometers power

supplies.
The section Removing Both Galvanometers Power Supplies

nometers power supplies.
3. Slide the galovonometers power supply card down into the

mounting plate and align it with the tab in the slide plate.
3
No. Description
1 Slide plate
2 Tab of slide plate mount 2
3 Card mount plate notch
Figure 12-91. Aligning the Notch When Replacing a

Galvanometers Power Supply

Document 41195-0510
4. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, tighten the two slide plate
retaining nuts on each galvanometers power supply (four
retaining nuts in all).
No. Description
1 Slide plate
Figure 12-92. Tightening the Slide Plate Retaining Nuts and

Sliding Plates

Document 41195-0510
5. Plug in the TB1 block on each galvanometers power supply
and connect both the AC power input cable P602 and the PE
ground cable on each galvanometers power supply.
No. Description
2 PE ground cable
3 TB1 block
Figure 12-93. Connecting Cables to the Galvanometers Power

Supplies

Document 41195-0510
12.27 Replacing the Marking Engine in the
30-Watt Lasetec II
12.27.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the marking engine card.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.

Lasetec II tells you how to remove the marking engine card.

supply.

5. Slide the marking engine card into its plastic mounting

carriage.
6. Slide the marking engine card through the back of the print
head enclosure.
7. Grasp the rear of marking engine carriage and push down on

the mounting supports.
Result: The marking engine carriage snaps into position.

Document 41195-0510
Note: Ensure that you clip the marking engine carriage
firmly onto the mounting supports.
No. Description
1 Snap the mounting carriage slots... 1
2 onto the mounting support pins.
Figure 12-94. Snapping the Mounting Carriage Onto the

Mounting Supports
8. Snap the plexiglas crossbar (with all of the P-cable wire

attached) into place.
No. Description
1 Crossbar
2 Snap the crossbar that is
held in place by pins at
each end into place.
Figure 12-95. Replacing the Plexiglas Crossbar

Document 41195-0510
9. Connect all cables to the marking engine card, including PE
ground, P4, J29, P8, P12, P502 and P520, P4, P6, P9, P13,
P14, P16, P17, P18, and P19.
4 5 6 7
No. Description
1 PE Ground
2 P4
3 J29
4 P12
5 P8
3
6 P520
7 P6, P9, P13, P14, P16, P17,
P18, P19
Figure 12-96. Connecting Cables to the Marking Engine Card

Document 41195-0510
12.28 Replacing the Marking Engine in the
60-Watt Lasetec II
12.28.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the marking engine card.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.

Lasetec II tells you how to remove the marking engine card.

Document 41195-0510
4. Slide the marking engine card into its plastic carriage.
Figure 12-97. Sliding the Marking Engine Card Into Its Carriage

Document 41195-0510
5. Lower the marking engine card through the top of and into
the print head enclosure.
Figure 12-98. Lowering the Marking Engine Card Into the

Enclosure
6. Grasp the rear of marking engine carriage and push down on

the mounting supports.
Result: The marking engine carriage snaps into position.

Document 41195-0510
Note: Ensure that you clip the marking engine carriage
firmly onto the mounting supports.
No. Description
1 Snap the mounting carriage slots... 1
2 onto the mounting support pins.
Figure 12-99. Snapping the Mounting Carriage Onto the

Mounting Supports
7. Connect all cables to the marking engine card, including PE

ground, P4, J29, P8, P12, P502 and P520, P4, P6, P9, P13,
P14, P16, P17, P18, and P19.
4 5 6 7
No. Description
1 PE Ground
2 P4
3 J29
3
4 P12
5 P8
6 P520
7 P6, P9, P13, P14, P16,
P17, P18, P19
2
Figure 12-100. Connecting Cables to the Marking Engine Card

Document 41195-0510
12.29 Replacing the PC/104 and TX Cards in
the 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.29.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the PC/104 and TX card assembly.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.
3. If they are not already connected, connect the PC/104 and

TX cards by gently pushing the two cards together,
connecting the P1 and P4 cables to the TX card, and
screwing in the three pan head bolts that are marked with
the white paint dots.
No. Description 3 3
1 Cable P1
2 Cable P4
3 Screws with white paint
dots that secure the
PC/104 and TX cards
together
3
2
Figure 12-101. Connecting the PC/104 and TX Cards

Document 41195-0510
4. Connect the P1 and P2 cables to the PC/104 card.
No. Description
1 Cable P1
2 Cable P2
Figure 12-102. Connecting the Cables to the PC/104 Card
5. Grasp the edges of TX card and, while rocking the assembly

to ensure that the connector is seated correctly, gently slide
and push the entire assembly downwards into the print head
housing.
Figure 12-103. Replacing the TX Card

Document 41195-0510
Note: Ensure that you correctly line up the pins on the
64-pin connector (J1) that is located between the PC/104
card and the marking engine card.
No. Description
1 PC/104 card 3
2 64-pin connector (J1)
3 Standoff 4
4 Marking engine
Figure 12-104. Lining Up Pins on the J1 Connector
Caution: Use caution when installing the card assembly and

lining up the connectors between the cards. Misalignment or
forcing the cards into position can damage the electronics. If
you have to push hard, the connectors are not aligned.
6. Verify that all connections between the cards and cables are
secure.
7. Replace the back panel and print head cover.

Document 41195-0510
12.30 Replacing the PC/104 and TX Cards in
the 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.30.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the PC/104 and TX card assembly.

back panel.
back panel.

TX card assembly.
3. If they are not already connected, connect the PC/104 and

TX cards by gently pushing the two cards together,
connecting the P1 and P4 cables to the TX card, and
screwing in the three pan head bolts that are marked with
the white paint dots.
3 3
2
No. Description
1 Cable P4 connector
2 Cable P1 connector
3 Screws with white paint
dots that secure the
PC/104 and TX cards
together
Figure 12-105. Connecting the PC/104 and TX Cards

Document 41195-0510
4. Connect the P1 and P2 cables to the PC/104 card.
No. Description
1 Cable P1
2 Cable P2
Figure 12-106. Connecting the Cables to the PC/104 Card
5. Grasp the edges of TX card and, while rocking the assembly

to ensure that the connector is seated correctly, gently slide
and push the entire assembly downwards into the housing.
Figure 12-107. Replacing the TX Card

Document 41195-0510
Note: Ensure that you correctly line up the pins on the
64-pin connector (J1) that is located between the PC/104
card and the marking engine card.
No. Description
1 PC/104 card 3
2 64-pin connector (J1)
3 Standoff 4
4 Marking engine
Figure 12-108. Lining Up Pins on the J1 Connector
Caution: Use caution when installing the card assembly and

lining up the connectors between the cards. Misalignment or
forcing the cards into position can damage the electronics. If
you have to push hard, the connectors are not aligned.
6. Verify that all connections between the cards and cables are
secure.
7. Replace the back panel and print head cover.

Document 41195-0510
12.31 Removing the Galvanometer Controller
Cards From a 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.31.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the galvanometers controller cards.
Note: The galvanometers controller cards and galvanometers

assembly are a tuned set. Replace them as a set. Do not mix the
controller cards and galvanometers from different sets.

back panel.
back panel.
2. Pull the shroud’s spring return knob and lift up the shroud.
No. Description
Figure 12-109. Removing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly

Document 41195-0510
3. Unscrew the retaining screw for the plexiglas partition on
the side of the galvanometers driver and pull it up and out.
No. Description
1 Plexiglas partition
2 Retaining screw
Figure 12-110. Removing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw
4. Disconnect the following cables:
Y-galvanometer signal/power cable

Y-galvanometer scanner cable
X-galvanometer signal/power cable
X-galvanometer scanner cable

Document 41195-0510
Best Practice: Unmount the controller cards to make
removing the cables easier.
3
4
No. Description
1 Disconnect galvanometers signal cables (Y shown).
2 Disconnect galvanometers power cables (Y shown).
3 To unlock connect, push in here.
4 To lock connect, push in here.
Figure 12-111. Disconnecting Signal, Power Cables From the

Controller Cards

Document 41195-0510
5. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, loosen but do not remove, the two
slide bracket bolts on the side of the X-galvanometer card
and slide the bracket away from the card mount plate.
No. Description
1 Slide bracket
2 Slide bracket retaining nuts (2)
Figure 12-112. Loosening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts
6. Pull the card assembly away from the side and then up.
Figure 12-113. Removing the Galvanometers Controller Cards

Document 41195-0510
12.32 Removing the Galvanometer Controller
Cards From a 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.32.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the galvanometers controller cards.


back panel.
back panel.
2. Pull the shroud’s spring return knob and lift up the shroud.
No. Description
Figure 12-114. Removing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly

Document 41195-0510
3. Unscrew the retaining screw for the plexiglas partition and
pull the partition up and out of the enclosure.
No. Description
1 Retaining screw
1 2
Figure 12-115. Removing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw
4. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, loosen but do not remove, the two
slide bracket bolts on the side of the X-galvanometer card
and slide the bracket away from the card mount plate.
No. Description
2 3 4
1 Slide bracket
retaining nuts
2 Slide bracket
3 3/8 inch wrench
4 Screws loosened
and slide bracket
pushed to the left
Figure 12-116. Loosening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts

Document 41195-0510
5. Pull the card assembly away from the side and then up and
partially out of the enclosure, being careful not to stretch
the attached cables too much.
Figure 12-117. Removing the Galvanometers Controller Cards
6. Locate and disconnect the following cables:
X-galvanometer adapter and signal cables

Y-galvanometer adapter and signal cables

Document 41195-0510
1
4
8
5
No. Description
1 Disconnected X-galvanometer adapter cable
2 Disconnected Y-galvanometer adapter cable
3 Y-galvanometer adapter cable
4 Y-galvanometer signal cable
5 Disconnected Y-galvanometer signal cable,
showing both signal cable blocks
6 X-galvanometer signal cable
7 X-galvanometer adapter cable
8 Connected X-galvanometer signal cable, showing
both signal cable blocks that you disconnect
Figure 12-118. X- and Y-Galvanometer Adapter and Signal

Cables
7. Pull the entire galvanometers controller card assembly up

and completely out of the enclosure.

Document 41195-0510
12.33 Replacing the Galvanometers Controller
Cards in the 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.33.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the galvanometers controller cards.


back panel.
back panel.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the galvanometer controller

cards.
The section Removing the Galvanometer Controller Cards

nometer controllers.

Document 41195-0510
3. Slide the card assembly into the mounting brackets.
Figure 12-119. Replacing the Galvanometers Controller Cards
4. Ensure that the card is oriented correctly and seated firmly

in the mounting brackets.
5. Insert the slide bracket retaining nuts, and using a 3/8 inch
wrench, tighten them.
No. Description
1 Slide bracket
2 Slide bracket retaining nuts (2)
Figure 12-120. Tightening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts

Document 41195-0510
6. Connect the following cables:
Y-galvanometer signal/power cable

Y-galvanometer scanner cable
X-galvanometer signal/power cable
X-galvanometer scanner cable
7. Insert the retaining screw for the plexiglas partition on the
side of the galvanometers driver and screw it in.
No. Description
2 Retaining screw
Figure 12-121. Replacing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw
8. Replace the metal shroud and push the shroud’s spring

return knob.
No. Description
Figure 12-122. Replacing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly

Document 41195-0510
12.34 Replacing the Galvanometers Controller
Cards in the 60-Watt Lasetec II
12.34.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the galvanometers controller cards.


back panel.
back panel.

cards.

3. Connect the following cables:
X-galvanometer adapter and signal cables

Y-galvanometer adapter and signal cables

Document 41195-0510
1
4
8
5
No. Description
1 Connect X-galvanometer adapter cable
2 Connect Y-galvanometer adapter cable
3 Y-galvanometer adapter cable
4 Y-galvanometer signal cable
5 Connect Y-galvanometer signal cable,
6 X-galvanometer signal cable
7 X-galvanometer adapter cable
8 Connected X-galvanometer signal cable,
Figure 12-123. X- and Y-Galvanometer Adapter and Signal

Cables

Document 41195-0510
4. Lower the card assembly partially into the enclosure.
Figure 12-124. Lowering the Galvanometers Controller Cards
5. Ensure that the card assembly is oriented correctly and

seated correctly in the mounting brackets.
6. Using a 3/8 inch wrench, tighten the two slide bracket bolts
on the side of the X-galvanometer card.
No. Description
2 3 4
1 Slide bracket
retaining nuts
2 Slide bracket
3 3/8 inch wrench
4 Screws loosened
and slide bracket
pushed to the left
Figure 12-125. Tightening the Slide Plate Securing Nuts

Document 41195-0510
7. Replace the plexiglas partition and screw the retaining
screw.
No. Description
1 Retaining screw
1 2
Figure 12-126. Replacing the Plexiglas Partition Retaining Screw
8. Replace the metal shroud and push the shroud’s spring

return knob.
No. Description
Figure 12-127. Replacing the Shroud on the Laser Assembly

Document 41195-0510
12.35 Removing the Galvanometers Assembly
12.35.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the galvanometers assembly.


back panel.
back panel.

cards.


Document 41195-0510
3. Disconnect the P1A and P1B cables from the galvanometers
assembly.
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Cable P1A
2 Cable P1B
3 Galvanometers assembly
securing screws (2)

Assembly
4. Using the smaller of the two laser tools that are described in
step 6 in the section Steps: Removing the Laser Assembly,
loosen the two securing screws.
Note: The screws are contained in the galvanometers block

assembly and do not come out.
5. To make removal easier, remove the X and Y scanner cables.
Caution: If you remove the scanner cables, when you replace

the galvanometers, ensure that you reattach each scanner
cable to the correct scanner and that the finger locks grasp the
connector securely. If you install the scanner cables incorrectly,
you can permanently damage the galvanometers.

Document 41195-0510
6. Lift the galvanometers assembly out of the enclosure.
No. Description
1 X Scanner cable
2 Y Scanner cable
Figure 12-129. Removing the Galvanometers Assembly

Document 41195-0510
12.36 Removing the Galvanometers Assembly
12.36.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the galvanometers assembly.


back panel.
back panel.

cards.


Document 41195-0510
3. Disconnect the P1A and P1B cables from the galvanometers
assembly.
1
No. Description
1 Cable P1A
2 Cable P1B
3 Galvanometers
assembly securing
screws (2) 2
4 Laser tool supplied by
Industrial Dynamics/
filtec

Assembly
loosen the two securing screws.

5. To make removal easier, remove the X and Y scanner cables.
Caution: If you remove the scanner cables, when you replace

the galvanometers, ensure that you reattach each scanner
cable to the correct scanner and that the finger locks grasp the
connector securely. If you install the scanner cables incorrectly,
you can permanently damage the galvanometers.
6. Lift the galvanometers assembly out of the enclosure.

Document 41195-0510
12.37 Replacing the Galvanometers Assembly
in the 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.37.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the galvanometers assembly.


back panel.
back panel.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the controller cards.

nometers controller cards.
3. If you haven’t already, remove the galvanometers assembly.
The section Removing the Galvanometers Assembly From a

30-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the
galvanometers.
4. Lower the galvanometers assembly into of the enclosure,

ensuring that you correctly align the galvanometers
assembly with the guide pins in the base of the enclosure.
No. Description
guide pins
Figure 12-131. Aligning the Galvanometers Assembly

Document 41195-0510
Caution: Do not force the alignment. The galvanometers
assembly is keyed to fit one way only. Forcing it into position
can permanently damage the assembly.
5. Attach the X and Y scanner cables.
Caution: Ensure that you reattach each scanner cable to the

correct scanner and that the finger locks grasp the connector
securely. If you install the scanner cables incorrectly, you can
permanently damage the galvanometers.
tighten the two securing screws.

7. Connect the P1A and P1B cables to the galvanometers

assembly.
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Cable P1A
2 Cable P1B
securing screws (2)

Assembly

Document 41195-0510
12.38 Replacing the Galvanometers Assembly
12.38.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the galvanometers assembly.


back panel.
back panel.
2. If you haven’t already, remove the galvanometers controller

cards.

nometers controller cards.
3. If you haven’t already, remove the galvanometers assembly.
The section Removing the Galvanometers Assembly From a

60-Watt Lasetec II tells you how to remove the
galvanometers.

Document 41195-0510
4. Lower the galvanometers assembly into of the enclosure,
ensuring that you correctly align the galvanometers
assembly with the guide pins in the base of the enclosure.
1
No. Description
1 Galvanometers
assembly guide pins
2 Screw holes for
galvanometers
securing screws 2
3 Focal lens
Figure 12-133. Aligning the Galvanometers Assembly
Caution: Do not force the alignment. The galvanometers

assembly is keyed to fit one way only. Forcing it into position
can permanently damage the assembly.
5. Attach the X and Y scanner cables.
Caution: Ensure that you reattach each scanner cable to the

correct scanner and that the finger locks grasp the connector
securely. If you install the scanner cables incorrectly, you can
permanently damage the galvanometers.
tighten the two securing screws.


Document 41195-0510
7. Connect the P1A and P1B cables to the galvanometers
assembly.
3
1
No. Description
1 Cable P1A
2 Cable P1B
3 Galvanometers
assembly securing
screws (2) 2
4 Laser tool supplied by
Industrial Dynamics/
filtec

Assembly

Document 41195-0510
12.39 Removing the Vortex Compressed Air
Cooler From a 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.39.1 Steps
Follow these steps to remove the vortex compressed air cooler.

back panel.
back panel.
2. From the vortex air ring, remove the three retaining screws
and remove the vortex air ring.
Result: The safety shroud comes off with the vortex air ring.
3. From the air manifold, remove the four retaining screws and
remove the air manifold.
No. Description
1 Safety shroud
2 Vortex air ring
1
3 Air manifold
4 Remove the three retaining
screws from the vortex air
ring. The safety shroud
comes off with the vortex
air ring.
5 Remove the four retaining
screws from the air
manifold.
2
3
4
Figure 12-135. Removing the Vortex Air Ring and Air Manifold

Document 41195-0510
4. Remove the three bolts from retaining ring.
1
No. Description
1 Remove the three bolts
from the retaining ring.
Figure 12-136. Removing the Three Bolts From the Retaining

Ring

Document 41195-0510
5. Remove the plexiglas partition securing screw and
disconnect the air hose from the valve and the valve
electrical cable.
No. Description
1 Remove the partition retaining screw.
2 Disconnect the air hose from the valve.
3 Disconnect the valve cable.
Figure 12-137. Removing the Securing Screw, Disconnecting

Hose and Cable
6. Lift the vortex compressed air cooler assembly out of the

print head housing.

Document 41195-0510
7. Remove the bolts that secure the air valve to the vortex
compressed air cooler assembly.
No. Description
1 To remove the air valve,
remove the bolts that
secure the air valve to
the air cooler assembly.
Figure 12-138. Removing the Bolts That Secure the Air Valve

Document 41195-0510
12.40 Replacing the Vortex Compressed Air
Cooler in the 30-Watt Lasetec II
12.40.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the vortex compressed air cooler.

back panel.
back panel.
2. Attach the bolts that secure the air valve to the vortex
compressed air cooler assembly.
No. Description
1 To replace the air valve,
attach the bolts that
secure the air valve to
the air cooler assembly.
Figure 12-139. Attaching the Bolts That Secure the Air Valve
3. Lower the vortex compressed air cooler assembly into the

print head housing.

Document 41195-0510
4. Connect the valve electrical cable and the air hose to the
valve and screw in and tighten the plexiglas partition
securing screw.
1
2
3
No. Description
1 Connect the valve cable.
2 Connect the air hose to the valve.
3 Screw in the partition retaining screw.
Figure 12-140. Connecting the Hose, Cable and Replacing the

Retaining Screw
5. Replace the three bolts in retaining ring.

1
No. Description
1 Replace the three bolts
in the retaining ring.
Figure 12-141. Replacing the Three Bolts in the Retaining Ring

Document 41195-0510
6. Replace the air manifold and screw in the four retaining
screws.
1. Replace the safety shroud and vortex air ring and screw in
the three retaining screws.
No. Description
1 Safety shroud
2 Vortex air ring
1
3 Air manifold
4 Replace the air manifold
and four retaining screws.
5 Replace the vortex air ring
and three retaining screws.
3 5
Figure 12-142. Replacing the Vortex Air Ring and Air Manifold

Document 41195-0510
12.41 Removing, Replacing Focal Length LEDs
Use this table to determine what to do before you remove the

focal length LEDs in your Lasetec II.
To replace LEDs on the... Complete the steps in... And then...
Left (galvanometers Removing the Galvanometer

controller card) side of the Controller Cards From a 30-Watt
Lasetec II Lasetec II
Right (vortex compressed Removing and Replacing the 30-Watt Unscrew the four mounting screws on the
air cooler) side of the Laser Assembly plexiglas partition and remove it.
Lasetec II
2
No. Description
1 Remove the four securing screws.
2 Pull the plexiglas partition
straight upwards and out of the
enclosure.

Document 41195-0510
12.41.2 Steps
Follow these steps to remove and replace the focal length LEDs.

back panel.
back panel.
2. Disconnect the LED cable and loosen the set screw on the
side of the mounting block.
Caution: Do not loosen the screws on the top of the mounting

block as Industrial Dynamics/filtec sets these screws for the
correct focal length.
No. Description
1
1 Right (vortex compressed air cooler)
side LED
2 Left (galvanometers controller card)
side LED
Figure 12-143. Focal Length LED on the Right and the Left
3. Slide the new LED into place, aligning the dowel pin in the
mounting block with the alignment hole in the LED.
4. Reconnect the LED cable and tighten the set screw on the
side of the mounting block.

Document 41195-0510
12.42 Removing, Replacing Focal Length LEDs
Use this table to determine what to do before you remove the

focal length LEDs in your Lasetec II.
To replace LEDs on the... Complete the steps in... And then...
Left (galvanometers Removing the Galvanometer

controller card) side of the Controller Cards From a 60-Watt
Lasetec II Lasetec II
Right (vortex compressed Removing and Replacing the 60-Watt Unscrew the mounting screw on the
air cooler) side of the Laser Assembly plexiglas partition and remove it.
Lasetec II
2
No. Description
1 Remove the securing screw.
2 Pull the plexiglas partition straight
upwards and out of the enclosure.
12.42.2 Steps
Follow these steps to remove and replace the focal length LEDs.

Document 41195-0510
back panel.
2. Loosen the 6-32 by 1/8 inch hex set screw on the side of the
mounting block and disconnect and pull out the LED cable
assembly from its canister.
Caution: Do not loosen the screw on the top of the mounting

block as Industrial Dynamics/filtec sets these screws for the
correct focal length.
No. Description
1 Adjustable focal length LED
block (air exhaust side)
2 Fixed focal length LED block
(galvanometers controller
cards side)
3 LED cable assembly
4 6-32 by 1/8 inch hex set
screw
1
2
Figure 12-144. Focal Length LED on the Right and the Left
3. Slide the new LED cable assembly into place, aligning the
dowel pin in the mounting block with the alignment hole in
the LED.
4. Reconnect the LED cable and tighten the 6-32 by 1/8 inch
hex set screw on the side of the mounting block.

Document 41195-0510
12.43 Replacing the Alignment LED in the
30-Watt Lasetec II
12.43.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the alignment LED.
2. On the metal shroud on the laser assembly, pull the spring

return knob and lift up the shroud.
No. Description

Assembly

Document 41195-0510
3. Disconnect the LED cable and loosen the 3/32 inch set screw
on the side of the LED mount.
No. Description
1 Alignment LED
2 LED cable
1
3 Loosen the LED set
screw. 2
Figure 12-146. Removing the Alignment LED
4. Slide the new LED completely into place, ensuring that you
correctly align the dowel pin in the mounting block with the
alignment hole in the LED.
Caution: Do not force the LED into place. The LED is keyed to
fit one way only. Forcing it into position can permanently
damage the LED.

Document 41195-0510
5. Connect the LED cable and tighten the 3/32 inch set screw
No. Description
1 Alignment LED
2 LED cable
1
3 Tighten the LED set
screw. 2
Figure 12-147. Replacing the Alignment LED
6. Replace the metal shroud and push the spring return knob.
No. Description

Assembly

Document 41195-0510
12.44 Replacing the Alignment LED in the
60-Watt Lasetec II
12.44.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the alignment LED.

back panel.
back panel.
2. On the metal shroud on the laser assembly, pull the spring

return knob and lift up the shroud.
No. Description

Assembly

Document 41195-0510
3. Disconnect the LED cable and loosen the 3/32 inch hex set
screw on the side of the LED mount.
No. Description
2 LED cable
2 Alignment LED
screw.
Figure 12-150. Removing the Alignment LED
4. Slide the new LED completely into place, ensuring that you
correctly align the dowel pin in the mounting block with the
alignment hole in the LED.
Caution: Do not force the LED into place. The LED is keyed to
fit one way only. Forcing it into position can permanently
damage the LED.

Document 41195-0510
5. Connect the LED cable and tighten the 3/32 inch set screw
No. Description
2 LED cable
2 Alignment LED
screw.
Figure 12-151. Replacing the Alignment LED
6. Replace the metal shroud and push the spring return knob.
No. Description

Assembly

Document 41195-0510
12.45 Replacing the Beacon LED
12.45.1 Steps
Follow these steps to replace the beacon LED.
1. Turn the plastic beacon lens counter clockwise.
2. Result: The beacon lens comes loose.
Note: Do not lose the rubber O-ring inside the beacon lens.
No. Description
1 Rubber O-ring
Figure 12-153. Removing the Beacon Lens

Document 41195-0510
3. Twist the LED counter clockwise one-quarter turn.
Figure 12-154. Removing the LED
4. Insert the new LED by aligning tabs on the LED with slots in
the socket, pressing down and twisting it clockwise
one-quarter turn.
5. Replace the O-ring on the socket base.
6. Place the beacon lens on the socket base and turn it

clockwise until snug.

Document 41195-0510
A. Software Change History
To learn more about the change history for the Lasetec II system
software, read the Software Release Memo.
Software Change History A-1

Document 41195-0510
A-2 Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide
Document 41195-0510
Index
Numerics cleaning 10-4

description 3-23
2D Matrix Size field installing 4-16
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-36 Air Knife On Temp field
30-watt Lasetec II Thermal System Parameters dialog box 6-70
components 3-8, 3-9 Air Off Temp field
8 Bit, Even Parity, 1 Stop field Thermal System Parameters dialog box 6-70
Communication Parameters dialog box 6-90 Air On Temp field
8N1 field Thermal System Parameters dialog box 6-70
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12 Air Valve field
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-42
align diode test point 3-13
Align on new PCF field
A Verification Parameters dialog box 6-85
Align on X Y field
About Lasetec II dialog box Alignment Tests dialog box 6-49
diagram 6-95 alignment
Accept [F2] field verifying 6-7
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-34 alignment and focus
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-27 toggling between verifying 6-7
Serial Number Field dialog box 6-29 alignment LED
Standard Text Field dialog box 6-24 replacing 30-watt 12-141, 12-147
User Defined Field dialog box 6-31 replacing 60-watt 12-144
Accept Test field Alignment LED field
Calibrate Encoder dialog box 6-64 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-42
ADC Reads to Avg field Alignment Tests dialog box
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-47 ADC Reads to Avg field 6-47
Profile Laser dialog box 6-51 Align on X Y field 6-49
Verification Parameters dialog box 6-85 diagram 6-46
adjusting code delay 9-11 F1 - Test Verifier field 6-49
adjusting x position 9-11 F2 - Fire field 6-49
Advanced Menu Increment Size field 6-48
diagram 6-11 Laser On Time field 6-48
F1 - Start Coding 6-12 Lasing On Time field 6-47
F1 - Stop Coding 6-12 Lasing Power field 6-47
F2 - Select Product Code 6-12 Ver 1 Peak Status field 6-48
F3 - Enter User Fields 6-12 Ver 2 Peak Status field 6-48
F4 - Reset Serial Fields 6-12 Verifier Select field 6-47
F7 - Product Code Editor 6-12 Verify 1 X Y field 6-48
F8 - Maintenance Menu 6-12 Verify 2 X Y field 6-48
F9 - Setup Menu 6-12 Verify Threshold field 6-47
selections on 6-12 ALT C key 6-14
air controls ALT D key 6-14
installation requirements 4-10 ALT E key 6-14
installing 4-10 ALT F key 6-14
air cooler ALT H key 6-14
removing 30-watt vortex compressed 12-130 ALT I key 6-14
replacing 30-watt vortex compressed 12-134 ALT L key 6-14
air filtration system ALT R key 6-14
Index Index-1
Document 41195-0510
ALT S key 6-14 files 6-22
ALT Z key 6-14 exiting to DOS when updating Lasetec II system
amber beacon 3-21, 3-22 software 6-60, 6-72, 6-88
Angle field ignoring values for other verifier when specify-
Product Code Editor 6-18 ing Calibrated Values 6-52
Aspect field including values for S, V, and E in serial num-
Product Code Editor 6-18 ber product codes 2-10
installing encoder 4-5, 4-7
italicizing characters with Tilt 6-19
B leaving additional six inches of cable 4-20
leaving squeeze fittings loose 4-20
B 9600 field measuring distances between print head and
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12 conveyor 4-3
back panel mounting 30-watt or 60-watt print head 4-6,
closing 4-34 4-8
diagram of 30-watt Lasetec II 4-17 mounting air controls 4-11
diagram of 60-watt Lasetec II 4-18 mounting operator station 4-9
opening 4-19 mounting switch box 4-13
removing 12-4 mounting trigger 4-5
replacing 12-5 mounting trigger to front of print head 4-5
bar code mounting trigger upstream 4-5
adding 8-25 positioning through-beam trigger 4-7
Bar Code Format field pressing ALT E to edit field 6-21
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-34 pressing ALT F to insert field and ALT I to in-
Bar Code Type Field dialog box sert item 6-21
2D Matrix Size field 6-36 removing controller cards to remove cables
Accept [F2] field 6-34 12-107
Bar Code Format field 6-34 routing signal cable 4-20
Bars/Font Char field 6-35 running galvanometer test with shutter
Cancel [ESC] field 6-34 closed 6-56
Clear Data field 6-33 running only one verifier profile at time for
diagram 6-33 Start X Y 6-52
Field Text field 6-36 SanDisk Cruzer USB drive 12-14, 12-21
Inserted Mark field 6-34 selecting Mark Spaces when marking bar code
Stripe Density field 6-34 on dark material 6-34
Stripe X Scale field 6-35 setting correct wattage with Power 6-19
Stripe Y Scale field 6-35 specifying aspect ratio with Aspect 6-18
X Offset field 6-35 specifying BOTH for Verifier Select 6-51
X Trim field 6-35 specifying file name for product code file 8-6
Y Offset field 6-35 specifying maximum wattage for Lasing
Y Trim field 6-35 Power 6-47, 6-51
Barcode field specifying product code description in Product
Product Code Editor 6-21 Code Editor 8-5
Bars/Font Char field specifying size of characters with Size 6-18
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-35 specifying value for ADC Reads to Avg 6-47,
baud rate 5-2 6-51, 6-85
beacon lamps specifying value for Air Off Temp 6-70
inspecting 10-4 specifying value for Air On Temp 6-70
beacons specifying value for Bars/Font Char 6-35
amber 3-21, 3-22 specifying value for Begin Seg Delay 6-77
fault 3-21, 3-22 specifying value for Cooling Threshold 6-51
laser emission 3-21, 3-22 specifying value for End Seg Delay 6-77
laser indicator 1-5 specifying value for Host Port Comm Port
red 3-21, 3-22 6-90
yellow 3-21, 3-22 specifying value for Host Port Comm Spec
beam emitter 6-91
cleaning trigger 10-4 specifying value for Increment Size 6-48
Begin Seg Delay field specifying value for Inter Seg Delay 6-78
Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-77 specifying value for Laser Frequency 6-74
best practice specifying value for Laser On Time 6-48
attaching print head to decrease vibrations specifying value for Lasing On Time 6-47,
4-3 6-51, 6-85
backing up PCF 6-22 specifying value for Lasing Power 6-85
characters that you specify in product code specifying value for Master/Slave Comm Port
Index-2 Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510
6-90 diagram 6-63
specifying value for Power (W) 6-56 Run Test field 6-64
specifying value for Pwr Ramp Off 6-80 Test Package field 6-64
specifying value for Pwr Ramp On 6-80 Tested Enc. Res. field 6-64
specifying value for Pwr Ramp On Dly 6-79 Calibrated Values field
specifying value for Size X 6-55 Profile Laser dialog box 6-52
specifying value for Size Y 6-55 Cancel [ESC] field
specifying value for Step Size 6-52 Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-34
specifying value for Stripe Density 6-34 Date/Time Field dialog box 6-27
specifying value for Stripe X Scale 6-35 Serial Number Field dialog box 6-29, 6-31,
specifying value for Stripe Y Scale 6-35 6-34
specifying value for Trig Blank 6-16 Standard Text Field dialog box 6-24
specifying value for User Entry is ... 6-32 User Defined Field dialog box 6-31, 6-34
specifying value for Vel (mm/s) 6-56 cards
specifying value for Verify 1 X Y 6-48, 6-86 I/O 3-16
specifying value for Verify 2 X Y 6-48, 6-86 PC/104 3-14
specifying value for Verify Threshold 6-47, TX (transmit) 3-12, 3-13
6-85 Caution 1-2
specifying value for X Aperture 6-83 CDRH class IV laser safety regulations 1-3
specifying value for X Aperture Size 6-83 CE mark 1-7
specifying value for X Field Limit 6-83 character segment
specifying value for X Galvo Range 6-83 definition 6-75
specifying value for X Offset 6-79 chiller
specifying value for X Pin Cushion 6-83 installing on 60-watt Lasetec II 4-15
specifying value for X Position 6-17 chiller cooling system
specifying value for X Slope 6-78 description 3-24
specifying value for Y Aperture 6-83 chiller interlock
specifying value for Y Aperture Size 6-83 installing on 60-watt Lasetec II 4-15
specifying value for Y Field Limit 6-83 cleaning air filtration system 10-4
specifying value for Y Galvo Range 6-83 cleaning focal lens 10-3
specifying value for Y Position 6-18 cleaning trigger beam emitter 10-4
time offset 2-4, 2-5 Clear Data field
troubleshooting failure of galvanometer 6-55 Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-33
use pitch method rather than width method Date/Time Field dialog box 6-27
6-64 Serial Number Field dialog box 6-29
using enhanced command messages 5-4 Standard Text Field dialog box 6-24
using F2 - Dynamic Laser Align field on Test User Defined Field dialog box 6-31
Menu 6-45 Clear Last Saved field
using highest quality cable 4-28 Load/Save System Settings dialog box 6-58
using Load Bkup field 6-22 ClockSelect field
using Trig Blank field 6-16 Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-93
when to reduce laser power setting with Laser code delay
Power 6-73 adjusting 9-11
when to use power ramping 6-76 Code Delay field
wiring safety interlocks 4-23 Product Code Editor 6-16
writing down values that you specify for code editing window
Tracking System Parameters 7-17 Main Menu 6-5
bits Code Height field
data 5-2 Product Code Editor 6-15
stop 5-2 Code Width field
blanking Product Code Editor 6-15
adjusting trigger 9-19 codes
BLOCK font 6-17 definition of product 2-2
example of product 2-2
product
C creating 8-2
editing 8-2
cables format 8-3
wiring 4-20 types of product 2-3
calibrate encoder COM1 field
ways to 6-63 LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12
Calibrate Encoder dialog box Comm field
Accept Test field 6-64 Main Menu 6-6
Current Enc. Res. field 6-64 command message
Index Index-3
Document 41195-0510
definition 5-4 diagram 6-71
example 5-4 F1 - Laser Settings field 6-72, 6-88
standard 5-5 F10 - Start Coding field 6-72
command messages F2 - Delay Settings field 6-72
enhanced 5-4, 5-14, 5-15 F3 - Optics Settings field 6-72
00 5-18 F4 - Verifier Settings field 6-72
01 5-18 F9 - Exit to DOS field 6-72
02 5-18 configure
03 5-18 Lasetec II 5-3
05 5-18 ways to 5-3
06 5-18 configuring delay 7-16
3f 5-18 configuring direction 7-16
42 5-17 configuring mode 7-16
determine whether a Lasetec II receives a configuring orientation 7-16
command message 5-17 configuring resolution 7-16
diagram of structure 5-16 conformity
E1 5-17 declaration 1-8
purpose 5-15 Conveyor Speed field
standard 5-4, 5-6 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-67
ACK 5-7 cooler
clear errors 5-13 removing 30-watt vortex compressed air
diagram of structure 5-7 12-130
get current status of Lasetec II 5-13 replacing 30-watt vortex compressed air
NAK 5-8 12-134
purpose 5-6 cooling system
select product code file (PCF) 5-12 chiller 3-24
specify text in user-defined product code Cooling Threshold field
(named) 5-11 Profile Laser dialog box 6-51
specify text in user-defined product code CPU OverTemp Setpoint field
(numbered) 5-10 Thermal System Parameters dialog box 6-69
start marking containers 5-8 current date and time field
stop marking containers 5-9 Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-92
standard (alternative) Current Enc. Res. field
start marking containers 5-8, 5-9 Calibrate Encoder dialog box 6-64
types of 5-4 customer I/O
Communication Parameters dialog box wiring 4-26
8 Bit, Even Parity, 1 Stop field 6-90 customer inputs and outputs
diagram 6-89 FAULT (FAULT NOT) 4-24
Host Port Baud Rate field 6-90 GOOD MK (mark) 4-24
Host Port Comm Port field 6-90 LASER READY 4-24
Host Port Comm Spec field 6-91 REJECT (REJECT NOT) 4-24
Host/Master/Slave Config field 6-89
Master/Slave Baud Rate field 6-90
Master/Slave Comm Port field 6-90
Communications Settings selection D
Host Port application 5-21 DAT field
COMPLEX font 6-17 LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12
compliance data bits 5-2
EMI 1-6 Date & Time Settings dialog box
components ClockSelect field 6-93
30-watt Lasetec II 3-8, 3-9 current date and time field 6-92
compressed air cooler Day field 6-93
removing 30-watt vortex 12-130 diagram 6-92
replacing 30-watt vortex 12-134 Hours field 6-93
Computer Menu Minutes field 6-93
diagram 6-87 Month field 6-93
concepts ScreenSaver field 6-93
Lasetec II 2-1 Seconds field 6-93
configuration file Year field 6-92
editing 12-26 date and time product code field
configuration files creating 8-13
definition 2-15 Date field
diagram 2-15 Main Menu 6-6
Configuration Menu Date/Time Field dialog box

Document 41195-0510
Accept [F2] field 6-27 Laser System Parameters dialog box 6-73
Cancel [ESC] field 6-27 LLINK.EXE main menu 12-11
Clear Data field 6-27 Load/Save System Settings dialog box 6-57
Day Code field 6-26 Main Menu 6-4
diagram 6-25 Maintenance Menu 6-37
Field Text field 6-27 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-82
Hour Code field 6-26 PC Display Zoom Menu 6-9
Min. Code field 6-26 Product Code Editor 6-13
Month Code field 6-26 Profile Laser dialog box 6-50
Sec. Code field 6-26 Serial Number Field dialog box 6-28
Year Code field 6-26 Setup Menu 6-59
Day Code field Standard Text Field dialog box 6-23
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-26 System Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-40
Day field Test Menu 6-44
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-93 Thermal System Parameters dialog box 6-69
DC Power Status field Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-65
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-41 User Defined Field dialog box 6-30
decision tables Verification Parameters dialog box 6-84
performing maintenance 10-2 diffuse-reflective trigger 3-17
removing focal length LEDs on 30-watt 12-137 direction
removing focal length LEDs on 60-watt 12-139 configuring 7-16
declaration of conformity 1-8 Direction field
definitions interrelation with Orientation field 6-67
character segment 6-75 Tracking System Parameters dialog box
command message 5-4 6-65, 6-66
power ramping 6-75 down arrow key (↓) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13
ramping 6-75
segment 6-75
DEL key 6-14
delay E
calculating trigger 7-13 Edit Current Field field
configuring 7-16 Product Code Editor 6-21
delay settings electromagnetic interference
configuring 7-17 compliance 1-6
Delay System Parameters dialog box EMI compliance 1-6
Begin Seg Delay field 6-77 emitter
diagram 6-75 cleaning trigger beam 10-4
End Seg Delay field 6-77 EN50082 1-7
Inter Seg Delay field 6-78 EN55011 1-7
Pwr Ramp Off field 6-80 encoder
Pwr Ramp On Dly field 6-79 calibrating using pitch method 7-8
Pwr Ramp On field 6-80 calibrating using width method 7-10
X Offset field 6-79 description 3-16
X Slope field 6-78 diagram 3-16
delays installing 4-4
guidelines for setting 6-81 installing with conveyor 4-5
setting 6-81 installing with labeler 4-7
Diagnostic Fault field ways to calibrate 6-63
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-43 wiring to print head 4-22
diagrams Encoder Counts field
About Lasetec II dialog box 6-95 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-67
Advanced Menu 6-11 encoder input test point 3-13
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-46 encoder output test point 3-13
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-33 Encoder Res field
Calibrate Encoder dialog box 6-63 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-66
Communication Parameters dialog box 6-89 END key 6-38
Computer Menu 6-87 End Reject Delay field
Configuration Menu 6-71 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-67
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-92 End Seg Delay field
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-25 Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-77
Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-75 End X Y field
Galvo Tests dialog box 6-54 Profile Laser dialog box 6-52
Installation Menu 6-61 enhanced command messages
Languages dialog box 6-94 00 5-18
Index Index-5
Document 41195-0510
01 5-18 F2 - Calibrate Encoder field
02 5-18 Installation Menu 6-62
03 5-18 F2 - Delay Settings field
05 5-18 Configuration Menu 6-72
06 5-18 F2 - Dynamic Laser Align field
3f 5-18 Test Menu 6-45
42 5-17 F2 - Fire field
determine whether a Lasetec II receives a Alignment Tests dialog box 6-49
command message 5-17 F2 - Select Product Code field
E1 5-17 Advanced Menu 6-12
internal representation 5-15 Main Menu 6-7
list of 5-15 F2 - System I/O Display field
purpose 5-4, 5-15 Maintenance Menu dialog box 6-38
structure of 5-16 F2 - Zoom Out Display field
what happens when you issue 5-14 Main Menu 6-10
ENTER key 6-3, 12-13 F3 - Configuration Menu field
error Setup Menu 6-60
what happens when Lasetec II encounters F3 - Enter User Fields field
11-12 Advanced Menu 6-12
error message area Main Menu 6-7
Main Menu 6-5 F3 - Laser Profiler field
error messages 11-3 Test Menu 6-45
clearing 11-12 F3 - Optics Settings field
ESC key 6-3, 6-38 Configuration Menu 6-72
European compliance F4 - Computer Menu field
mark 1-7 Setup Menu 6-60
European Union requirements 1-6 F4 - Misc. Galvo Test field
examples Test Menu 6-45
command message 5-4 F4 - Reset Serial Fields field
EXIT field Advanced Menu 6-12
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12 Main Menu 6-7
Exit LLINK field F4 - Test Menu field
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12 Maintenance Menu dialog box 6-39
external wiring F4 - Tracking Settings field
inspecting 10-5 Installation Menu 6-62
F4 - Verifier Settings field
Configuration Menu 6-72
F F5 - Display Zoom field
Main Menu 6-8
F1 - Diagnostic History field F5 - Restore Default Zoom field
Maintenance Menu dialog box 6-38 PC Display Zoom Menu 6-10
F1 - Installation Menu field F5 - Thermal Settings field
Setup Menu 6-60 Installation Menu 6-62
F1 - Laser Settings field F6 - Password field
Configuration Menu 6-72, 6-88 Maintenance Menu dialog box 6-39
F1 - Start Coding field F7 - Product Code Editor field
Advanced Menu 6-12 Advanced Menu 6-12
Main Menu 6-7, 6-12 F8 - Load/Save Settings field
F1 - Static Laser Align field Maintenance Menu dialog box 6-39
Test Menu 6-45 F8 - Maintenance Menu field
F1 - Stop Coding field Advanced Menu 6-12
Advanced Menu 6-12 F8 - Save Inst. Defaults field
Main Menu 6-7, 6-10 Installation Menu 6-62
F1 - Test Verifier field F8 key 6-14
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-49 F9 - Advanced Features field
F1 - Zoom In Display field Main Menu 6-8
Main Menu 6-10 F9 - Exit to DOS field
PC Display Zoom Menu 6-10 Configuration Menu 6-72
F10 - Start Coding field Setup Menu 6-60
Configuration Menu 6-72 F9 - Setup Menu field
Installation Menu 6-62 Advanced Menu 6-12
Maintenance Menu dialog box 6-39 FAULT (NOT FAULT) 4-24, 4-25
Setup Menu 6-60 fault beacon
Test Menu 6-45 description 3-21

Document 41195-0510
diagram 3-22 F1 - Static Laser Align 6-45
FCC requirements 1-6 F1 - Stop Coding 6-7, 6-10, 6-12
Field field F1 - Test Verifiers 6-49
Product Code Editor 6-22 F1 - Zoom In Display 6-10
Field Name field F10 - Start Coding 6-39, 6-45, 6-60, 6-62, 6-72,
User Defined Field dialog box 6-31 6-88
Field Text field F2 - Calibrate Encoder 6-62
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-36 F2 - Delay Settings 6-72
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-27 F2 - Fire 6-49
Standard Text Field dialog box 6-24 F2 - Select Product Code 6-7, 6-12
User Defined Field dialog box 6-32 F2 - Time Settings 6-88
Field Used field F2 - Zoom Out Display 6-10
Main Menu 6-6 F2- Dynamic Laser Align 6-45
fields F3 - Configuration Menu 6-60
2D Matrix Size 6-36 F3 - Enter User Fields 6-7, 6-12
8 Bit, Even Parity, 1 Stop 6-90 F3 - Laser Profiler 6-45
Accept [F2] 6-24, 6-27, 6-29, 6-31, 6-34 F3 - Optics Settings 6-72
Accept Test 6-64 F4 - Computer Menu 6-60
ADC Reads to Avg 6-47, 6-51, 6-85 F4 - Misc. Galvo Test 6-45
Air Knife On Temp 6-70 F4 - Reset Serial Fields 6-7, 6-12
Air Off Temp 6-70 F4 - Test Menu 6-39
Air On Temp 6-70 F4 - Tracking Settings 6-62
Air Valve 6-42 F4 - Verifier Settings 6-72
Align on new PCF 6-85 F5 - Display Zoom 6-8
Align on X Y 6-49 F5 - Restore Default Zoom 6-10
Alignment LED 6-42 F5 - Thermal Settings 6-62
Angle 6-18 F6 - Password 6-39
Aspect 6-18 F7 - Help, About 6-88
Bar Code Format 6-34 F7 - Product Code Editor 6-12
Bar/Font Char 6-35 F8 - Load/Save Settings 6-39
Barcode 6-21 F8 - Maintenance Menu 6-12
Begin Seg Delay 6-77 F8 - Save Inst. Defaults 6-62
Calibrated Values 6-52 F9 - Advanced Features 6-8
Cancel [ESC] 6-24, 6-27, 6-29, 6-31, 6-34 F9 - Exit to DOS 6-60, 6-72, 6-88
Clear Data 6-24, 6-27, 6-29, 6-31, 6-33 F9 - Setup Menu 6-12
Clear Last Saved 6-58 Field 6-22
ClockSelect 6-93 Field Name 6-31
Code Delay 6-16 Field Text 6-24, 6-27, 6-32, 6-36
Code Height 6-15 Field Used 6-6
Code Width 6-15 Filename 6-6
Comm 6-6 Fixed Text 6-31
Conveyor Speed 6-67 Focus LED’s 6-42
Cooling Threshold 6-51 Host Port Baud Rate 6-90
CPU OverTemp Setpoint 6-69 Host Port Comm Port 6-90
current date and time 6-92 Host Port Comm Spec 6-91
Current Enc. Res. 6-64 Host/Master/Slave Config 6-89
Date 6-6 Hour Code 6-26
Day 6-93 Hours 6-93
Day Code 6-26 Increment Size 6-48
DC Power Status 6-41 Index Reject Delay 6-67
definition 2-2 Index Trig Delay 6-67
Diagnostic Fault 6-43 Input Source 6-32
Direction 6-65 Insert 6-21
Edit Current Field 6-21 Inserted Mark 6-34
Encoder Counts 6-67 Insertion Mode 6-20
Encoder Res 6-66 Inter Seg Delay 6-78
End Reject Delay 6-67 Interlock Status 6-41
End Seg Delay 6-77 Item 6-22
End X Y 6-52 Item Font 6-17
F1 - Comm. Settings 6-88 Laser Fault 6-41
F1 - Diagnostic History 6-38 Laser Frequency 6-74
F1 - Installation Menu 6-60 Laser On Time 6-48
F1 - Laser Settings 6-72 Laser Power 6-73
F1 - Start Coding 6-7, 6-12 Laser Ready 6-43
Index Index-7
Document 41195-0510
Laser Status 6-41 User Entry is ... characters 6-32
Lasing On Time 6-47, 6-51, 6-85 Vel (mm/s) 6-56
Lasing Power 6-47, 6-51, 6-85 Velocity 6-20
Load Bkup 6-22 Ver 1 Peak 6-53
Load Installation Defaults 6-58 Ver 1 Peak Status 6-48
Load PCF 6-21, 6-22 Ver 2 Peak 6-53
Load Settings 6-57 Ver 2 Peak Status 6-48
Mark Count 6-6 Verifier Select 6-47, 6-51, 6-85
Mark Mode 6-6 Verify 1 X Y 6-48, 6-86
Mark Period 6-6 Verify 2 X Y 6-48, 6-86
Master/Slave Baud Rate 6-90 Verify Threshold 6-47, 6-85
Master/Slave Comm Port 6-90 X Aperture 6-83
Min. Code 6-26 X Aperture Size 6-83
Minutes 6-93 X Center 6-56
Month 6-93 X Field Limit 6-83
Month Code 6-26 X Galvo Range 6-83
Ok [F2] 6-22 X Offset 6-35, 6-79
Orientation 6-67 X Position 6-17
Path 6-6 X Seg Delay 6-78
Pattern 6-55 X Trim 6-35
Pause (ms) 6-56 Y Aperture 6-83
Power 6-19 Y Aperture Size 6-83
Power (W) 6-56 Y Center 6-56
Primary Trigger 6-40 Y Field Limit 6-83
product code description 6-15 Y Galvo Range 6-83
Pwr Ramp Off 6-80 Y Offset 6-35
Pwr Ramp On 6-80 Y Position 6-18
Pwr Ramp On Dly 6-79 Y Trim 6-35
Reject 6-43 Year 6-92
Reject Delay 6-67 Year Code 6-26
Run Test 6-56, 6-64 Filename field
Save User Settings 6-57 Main Menu 6-6
ScreenSaver 6-93 filtration system
Sec. Code 6-26 air 3-23
Secondary Trigger 6-41 Fixed Text field
Seconds 6-93 User Defined Field dialog box 6-31
Serial Count 6-29 flow charts
Serial Format 6-29 configuring Lasetec II with system software
Shutter (Delayed) 6-41 7-7
Shutter Control 6-42 creating product codes 8-2
Size 6-18 editing 8-2
Size X 6-55 installing Lasetec II 4-2
Size Y 6-55 troubleshooting 11-2
Start Profile 6-53 focal length LEDs
Start X Y 6-52 removing 30-watt 12-138
Step Size 6-52 removing 60-watt 12-139
Stripe Density 6-34 focal lens
Stripe X Scale 6-35 cleaning 10-3
Stripe Y Scale 6-35 description 3-20
Successful Mark 6-43 diagram 3-21
System Fault Lamp 6-43 focus
System Temp 6-6 verifying 6-7
Test Package 6-64 focus and alignment
Tested Enc. Res. 6-64 toggling between verifying 6-7
Thermal Shutdown 6-41 focus diodes test point 3-13
Thermal Temp 6-70 Focus LED’s field
Tilt 6-19 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-42
Time 6-6 fonts
Tracking 6-6 BLOCK 6-17
Tracking Mode 6-66 COMPLEX 6-17
Trig Blank 6-16 LOGO 6-17
Trigger Delay 6-66 MODERN 6-17
Type 6-22 OCRB3X 6-17
User Data 6-31 OCRSEAGT 6-17

Document 41195-0510
OUTLINE 6-17 purpose 5-19
SCRIPT 6-17 Query selection 5-20
SIMPLEX 6-17 select and use product code file (PCF) 5-24
SIMPLEX NO-TOUCH 6-17 Select Product Code selection 5-20
STANDARD 6-17 Start Coding selection 5-20
STANDARD NO-TOUCH 6-17 start marking containers 5-23
forgotten password 12-25 starting 5-22
function keys Stop Coding selection 5-20
operator station 3-7 User Defined Field Text selection 5-21
Host Port Baud Rate field
Communication Parameters dialog box 6-90
G Host Port Comm Port field
Communication Parameters dialog box 6-90
galvanometer Host Port Comm Spec field
description 3-19 Communication Parameters dialog box 6-91
diagram 3-20 host port system
galvanometer power supply configuration 5-3
description 3-10 Host/Master/Slave Config field
diagram 3-10 Communication Parameters dialog box 6-89
galvanometer step 6-52 Hour Code field
definition 2-18 Date/Time Field dialog box 6-26
galvanometers Hours field
adjusting speed 9-13 Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-93
galvanometers assembly housing
removing 30-watt 12-120 cleaning print head 10-5
removing 60-watt 12-123
replacing 30-watt 12-125
replacing 60-watt 12-127
galvanometers controller cards
I
removing 30-watt 12-105 I/O card
removing 60-watt 12-109 description 3-16
replacing 30-watt 12-113 diagram 3-16
replacing 60-watt 12-116 Increment Size field
galvanometers power supply Alignment Tests dialog box 6-48
removing 30-watt 12-81 Index Rej Delay field
removing 60-watt 12-84 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-67
replacing 30-watt 12-86 Index Trig Delay field
replacing 60-watt 12-89 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-67
Galvo Input Source field
see galvanometer User Defined Field dialog box 6-32
Galvo Tests dialog box Inputs and Outputs dialog box
diagram 6-54 Air Valve field 6-42
Pattern field 6-55 Alignment LED field 6-42
Pause (ms) field 6-56 DC Power Status field 6-41
Power (W) field 6-56 Diagnostic Fault field 6-43
Run Test field 6-56 Focus LED’s field 6-42
Size X field 6-55 Interlock Status field 6-41
Size Y field 6-55 Laser Fault field 6-41
Vel (mm/s) field 6-56 Laser Ready field 6-43
X Center field 6-56 Laser Status field 6-41
Y Center field 6-56 Primary Trigger field 6-40
GOOD MK (mark) 4-24, 4-25 Reject field 6-43
Secondary Trigger field 6-41
Shutter (Delayed) field 6-41
H Shutter Control field 6-42
Successful Mark field 6-43
HOME key 6-38 System Fault Lamp field 6-43
host computer system Thermal Shutdown field 6-41
connecting to Lasetec II 4-28 INS key 6-14
Host Port application 5-19 Insert field
Communication Settings selection 5-21 Product Code Editor 6-21
diagram of main screen 5-19 Inserted Mark field
installing 5-22 Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-34
Message Specification selection 5-21 Insertion Mode field
Index Index-9
Document 41195-0510
Product Code Editor 6-20 operator station 3-7
Installation Menu PC Display Zoom Menu 6-10, 6-14
diagram 6-61 PG DN 6-14, 6-38
F10 - Start Coding field 6-62 PG UP 6-14, 6-38
F2 - Calibrate Encoder field 6-62 Product Code Editor 6-14
F4 - Tracking Settings field 6-62 right arrow (→) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13
F5 - Thermal Settings field 6-62 TAB 6-3, 12-13
F8 - Save Inst. Defaults field 6-62 up arrow (↑) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13
installing Lasetec II
conveyor 4-5
decision table
conveyor 4-4 L
labeler 4-4 labels
encoder 4-4, 4-5, 4-7 warning 1-5
flow chart 4-2 lamps
labeler 4-7 inspecting beacon 10-4
print head 4-4, 4-5, 4-7 languages
requirements 4-3 available on Lasetec II 6-94
trigger 4-4, 4-5, 4-7 Languages dialog box
instruction labels diagram 6-94
inspecting 10-5 laser
Inter Seg Delay field adjusting power 9-16
Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-78 description 3-18
interference diagram 3-2
electromagnetic 1-6 laser assembly
interlock removing 30-watt 12-31
remote 1-4 removing 60-watt 12-40
Interlock Status field replacing 30-watt 12-35
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-41 replacing 60-watt 12-46
interlock test point 3-13 laser emission beacon
Item field description 3-21
Product Code Editor 6-22 diagram 3-22
Item Font field laser enclosure
Product Code Editor 6-17 removing 12-6
items replacing 12-8
definition 2-2 Laser Fault field
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-41
Laser Frequency field
K Laser System Parameters dialog box 6-74
laser indicator beacon 1-5
key switch 1-4 Laser On Time field
keys Alignment Tests dialog box 6-48
ALT C 6-14 laser power button 1-4
ALT D 6-14 Laser Power field
ALT E 6-14 Laser System Parameters dialog box 6-73
ALT F 6-14 laser power supply
ALT H 6-14 description 3-12
ALT I 6-14 diagram 3-12
ALT L 6-14 removing 30-watt 12-73
ALT R 6-14 removing 60-watt 12-75
ALT S 6-14 replacing 30-watt 12-77
ALT Z 6-14 replacing 60-watt 12-79
DEL 6-14 LASER READY 4-24, 4-25
diagnostic history log 6-38 Laser Ready field
down arrow (↓) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-43
END 6-38 Laser Status field
ENTER 6-3, 12-13 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-41
ESC 6-3, 6-38 Laser System Parameters dialog box
F8 6-14 diagram 6-73
HOME 6-38 Laser Frequency field 6-74
INS 6-14 Laser Power field 6-73
Lasetec II system software dialog boxes 6-3 laser tubes
left arrow (←) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13 types 3-18
LLINK.EXE utility 12-13 30-watt 3-19

Document 41195-0510
60-watt 3-19 Maintenance Menu 6-37
PET (polyethylene terephthalate) 3-19 marking engine 3-8, 3-9
Lasetec II marking engine power supply 3-8, 3-9, 3-11
About Lasetec II dialog box 6-95 marking speed specifications 3-3
Advanced Menu 6-11 marking trigger 3-8, 3-9
air specifications 3-3 menu structure 6-2
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-46 operator station 3-4, 3-8, 3-9
back panel diagram 3-7
30-watt 4-17 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-82
60-watt 4-18 PC Display Zoom Menu 6-9
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-33 PC/104 card 3-8, 3-9
Calibrate Encoder dialog box 6-63 power specifications 3-3
Communication Parameters dialog box 6-89 print head
components of 30-watt 3-8, 3-9 diagram 3-4
concepts 2-1 diagram of 30-watt 3-5
configuration files diagram of 60-watt 3-5
definition 2-15 Product Code Editor 6-13
diagram 2-15 Profile Laser dialog box 6-50
Configuration Menu 6-71, 6-87 safety features 1-3
configuring 5-3 Serial Number Field dialog box 6-28
configuring as host port system 5-3 Setup Menu 6-59
configuring as master 5-3 specifications 3-3
configuring as master and host port system Standard Text Field dialog box 6-23
5-3 switch box 3-4, 3-8, 3-9
configuring as slave 5-3 diagram 3-6
configuring as stand-alone 5-3 System Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-40
configuring with system software 7-7 Test Menu 6-44
connecting to host computer system 4-28 Thermal System Parameters dialog box 6-69
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-92 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-65
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-25 trigger 3-17
Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-75 troubleshooting 11-2
encoder 3-8, 3-9 TX card 3-8, 3-9
galvanometer 3-8, 3-9 User Defined Field dialog box 6-30
galvanometer power supply 3-8, 3-9, 3-10 Verification Parameters dialog box 6-84
Galvo Tests dialog box 6-54 wiring to another Lasetec II 4-27
I/O card 3-8, 3-9 Lasetec II laser
Installation Menu 6-61 diagram 3-2
installation requirements 4-3 Lasetec II system software
installing flow chart 4-2 updating 12-13
languages 6-94 updating using compact flash card method
Languages dialog box 6-94 12-19
laser 3-8, 3-9, 3-19 updating using serial port method 12-15
laser power supply 3-8, 3-9 updating using universal serial bus (USB)
Laser System Parameters dialog box 6-73 method 12-21
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-11 LASETEC.CFG file
Load/Save System Settings dialog box 6-57 editing 12-26
Main Menu 6-4 Lasing On Time field
code editing window 6-5 Alignment Tests dialog box 6-47
Comm field 6-6 Profile Laser dialog box 6-51
Date field 6-6 Verification Parameters dialog box 6-85
error message area 6-5 Lasing Power field
Field Used field 6-6 Alignment Tests dialog box 6-47
Filename field 6-6 Profile Laser dialog box 6-51
Mark Count field 6-6 Verification Parameters dialog box 6-85
Mark Mode field 6-6 leading edge
Mark Period field 6-6 definition 2-19
menu area 6-5 LED
parts 6-5 replacing 30-watt alignment 12-141, 12-147
Path field 6-6 replacing 60-watt alignment 12-144
print area box 6-5 LEDs
status area 6-6 removing 30-watt focal length 12-138
System Temp field 6-6 removing 60-watt focal length 12-139
Time field 6-6 left arrow key (←) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13
Tracking field 6-6 lens
Index Index-11
Document 41195-0510
description 3-20 selections on 6-7
diagram 3-21 status area 6-6
liquid crystal display 3-7 System Temp field 6-6
LLINK 2.01 - Copyright (c) 2000-2002 IDC field Time field 6-6
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12 Tracking field 6-6
LLINK.EXE main menu maintenance
8N1 field 12-12 cleaning air filtration system 10-4
B 9600 field 12-12 cleaning focal lens 10-3
COM1 field 12-12 cleaning trigger beam emitter 10-4
DAT field 12-12 inspecting print head 10-3
diagram 12-11 inspecting safety covers 10-3
EXIT field 12-12 when to perform 10-2
Exit LLINK field 12-12 Maintenance Menu
LLINK 2.01 - Copyright (c) 2000-2002 IDC diagram 6-37
field 12-12 Maintenance Menu dialog box
RECEIVE field 12-12 F1 - Diagnostic History field 6-38
SEND field 12-12 F10 - Start Coding field 6-39
VERSION field 12-12 F2 - System I/O Display field 6-38
LLINK.EXE utility 12-10 F4 - Test Menu field 6-39
Load Bkup field F6 - Password field 6-39
Product Code Editor 6-22 F8 - Load/Save Settings field 6-39
Load Installation Defaults field mark
Load/Save System Settings dialog box 6-58 CE 1-7
Load PCF field Mark Count field
Product Code Editor 6-21, 6-22 Main Menu 6-6
Load User Settings field Mark Mode field
Load/Save System Settings dialog box 6-57 Main Menu 6-6
Load/Save System Settings dialog box Mark Period field
Clear Last Saved field 6-58 Main Menu 6-6
diagram 6-57 marking engine
Load Installation Defaults field 6-58 description 3-15
Load User Settings field 6-57 diagram 3-15
Save User Settings field 6-57 removing 30-watt 12-56
LOGO font 6-17 removing 60-watt 12-60
lot number replacing 30-watt 12-92
creating 8-11 replacing 60-watt 12-95
marking engine power supply
description 3-11
M diagram 3-11
removing 30-watt 12-63
Main Menu removing 60-watt 12-65
code editing window 6-5 replacing 30-watt 12-68
Comm field 6-6 replacing 60-watt 12-70
Date field 6-6 marking trigger
diagram 6-4 diagram 3-18
error message area 6-5 master
F1 - Start Coding 6-7, 6-12 configuration 5-3
F1 - Start Coding field 6-7, 6-12 master and host port system configuration 5-3
F1 - Stop Coding 6-7, 6-10 Master/Slave Baud Rate field
F1 - Zoom In Display field 6-10 Communication Parameters dialog box 6-90
F2 - Select Product Code field 6-7 Master/Slave Comm Port field
F3 - Enter User Fields field 6-7 Communication Parameters dialog box 6-90
F4 - Reset Serial Fields field 6-7 menu area
F5 - Display Zoom field 6-8 Main Menu 6-5
F9 - Advanced Features field 6-8 menu structure
Field Used field 6-6 Lasetec II system software 6-2
Filename field 6-6 Message Specification selection
Mark Count field 6-6 Host Port application 5-21
Mark Mode field 6-6 messages
Mark Period field 6-6 alarm 11-3
menu area 6-5 diagnostic 11-3
parts 6-5 Min. Code field
Path field 6-6 Date/Time Field dialog box 6-26
print area box 6-5 Minutes field

Document 41195-0510
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-93 Pattern field
mode Galvo Tests dialog box 6-55
configuring 7-16 Pause (ms) field
MODERN font 6-17 Galvo Tests dialog box 6-56
Month Code field PC Display Zoom Menu
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-26 diagram 6-9
Month field F1 - Zoom In Display field 6-10
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-93 F2 - Zoom Out Display field 6-10
F5 - Restore Default Zoom field 6-10
selections on 6-10
O PC/104 card
description 3-14
OCRB3X font 6-17 removing 30-watt 12-50
OCRSEAGT font 6-17 removing 60-watt 12-53
Ok [F2] field replacing 30-watt 12-99
Product Code Editor 6-22 replacing 60-watt 12-102
open collector outputs PCF
FAULT (NOT FAULT) 4-24, 4-25 see product code files
GOOD MK (mark) 4-24, 4-25 performing maintenance 10-2
LASER READY 4-24, 4-25 PG DN key 6-14, 6-38
operator station PG UP key 6-14, 6-38
diagram 3-7 pitch 6-63
installing 4-9 pitch method
keys 3-7 calibrating encoder 7-8
removing 12-28 port parameters 5-2
replacing 12-28 power
wiring to print head 4-29 wiring to switch box 4-35
Optical System Parameters dialog box Power (W) field
diagram 6-82 Galvo Tests dialog box 6-56
X Aperture field 6-83 power button
X Aperture Size field 6-83 laser 1-4, 3-6
X Field Limit field 6-83 Power field
X Galvo Range field 6-83 Product Code Editor 6-19
X Pin Cushion field 6-83 power ramping
Y Aperture field 6-83 definition 6-75
Y Aperture Size field 6-83 how it works 6-76
Y Field Limit field 6-83 power supplies
Y Galvo Range field 6-83 galvanometer 3-10
orientation laser 3-12
configuring 7-16 marking engine 3-11
Orientation field Primary Trigger field
interrelation with Direction field 6-67 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-40
Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-67 print area box
OUTLINE font 6-17 adjusting items 8-22
adjusting size 8-18, 8-20
Main Menu 6-5
print head
P aligning 7-2
installing 4-4
parameters installing with conveyor 4-5
baud rate 5-2 installing with labeler 4-7
data bits 5-2 wiring to encoder 4-22
parity 5-2 wiring to operator station 4-29
port 5-2 wiring to switch box 4-31
stop bits 5-2 wiring to trigger 4-21
parity 5-2 print head back panel
parts closing 4-34
Main Menu 6-5 opening 4-19
password print head cover
forgotten 12-25 removing 12-3
removing 12-25 replacing 12-5
resetting 12-25 print head housing
setting 7-18 cleaning 10-5
Path field problems
Main Menu 6-6
Index Index-13
Document 41195-0510
troubleshooting 11-14 example 2-2
product focusing 9-4
code 2-2 format 8-3
product code 2-2 serial number 2-3
product code description definition 2-9
creating 8-4 example 2-9
Product Code Editor 6-15 variables 2-10
Product Code Editor text 2-3
Angle field 6-18 definition 2-3
Aspect field 6-18 troubleshooting problems 8-29
Barcode field 6-21 types 2-3
Code Delay field 6-16 user-defined 2-3
Code Height field 6-15 definition 2-10
Code Width field 6-15 example 2-11
diagram 6-13 Profile Laser dialog box
Edit Current Field field 6-21 ADC Reads to Avg field 6-51
Field field 6-22 Calibrated Values field 6-52
Insert field 6-21 Cooling Threshold field 6-51
Insertion Mode field 6-20 diagram 6-50
Item field 6-22 End X Y field 6-52
Item Font field 6-17 Lasing On Time field 6-51
Load Bkup field 6-22 Lasing Power field 6-51
Load PCF field 6-21, 6-22 running this test 9-2
Ok [F2] field 6-22 Start Profile field 6-53
Power field 6-19 Start X Y field 6-52
product code description 6-15 Step Size field 6-52
Size field 6-18 Ver 1 Peak field 6-53
Tilt field 6-19 Ver 2 Peak field 6-53
Trig Blank field 6-16 Verifier Select field 6-51
Type field 6-22 Pw M out test point 3-13
Velocity field 6-20 Pwr Ramp Off field
X Position field 6-17 Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-80
Y Position field 6-18 Pwr Ramp On Dly field
product code fields Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-79
date and time 8-13 Pwr Ramp On field
definition 2-2 Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-80
serial number 8-15
text 8-9
user-defined 8-11
product code files Q
backing up 8-32 quality
creating 8-4 troubleshooting 8-29
definition 2-13 Query selection
diagram 2-13 Host Port application 5-20
loading backed up copy 8-32, 8-33
names
syntax 2-13
saving 8-17, 8-18
product code items
R
definition 2-2 ramping
product codes definition 6-75
adjusting height 9-9 how it works 6-76
aligning 9-4 RECEIVE field
bar code 2-3 LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12
definition 2-11 red beacon 3-21, 3-22
example 2-11 Reject Delay field
types 2-12 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-67
building 8-7 Reject field
creating 8-2 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-43
date and time 2-3 remote interlock 1-4
definition 2-3 removing
elements of 2-4—2-9 back panel 12-4
definition 2-2 laser enclosure 12-6
editing 8-2 print head cover 12-3
removing focal length LEDs on 30-watt

Document 41195-0510
decision table 12-137 F1 - Installation Menu field 6-60
removing focal length LEDs on 60-watt F10 - Start Coding field 6-60
decision table 12-139 F3 - Configuration Menu field 6-60
replacing F4 - Computer Menu field 6-60
back panel 12-5 F9 - Exit to DOS field 6-60
laser enclosure 12-8 shortcuts
print head cover 12-5 About Lasetec II dialog box
requirements Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F4 > F7 6-95
European Union 1-6 Advanced Menu
FCC 1-6 Main Menu > F9 6-11
resetting password 12-25 Alignment Tests dialog box
resolution Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F4 > F1 > Y or N
configuring 7-16 6-46
retro-reflective trigger 3-17 Bar Code Type Field dialog box
right arrow key (→) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13 Main Menu > F9 > F7 Barcode: Yes 6-33
Run Test field Main Menu > F9 > F7 Barcode: Yes Edit
Calibrate Encoder dialog box 6-64 6-33
Galvo Tests dialog box 6-56 Calibrate Encoder dialog box
Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F1 > F2 6-63
Communication Parameters dialog box
S Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F4 > F1 6-89
Computer Menu
safety Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F4 6-87
5-second delay 1-4 Configuration Menu
features 1-3 Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F3 6-71
labels 1-2 Date & Time Settings dialog box
notices 1-2 Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F4 > F2 6-92
regulations 1-3 Date/Time Field dialog box
safety interlocks Main Menu > F9 > F7 Edit Current Field
wiring 4-23 6-25
Save User Settings field Main Menu > F9 > F7 Insert: Field >
Load/Save System Settings dialog box 6-57 Date/Time 6-25
ScreenSaver field Main Menu > F9 > F7 Insert: Item >
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-93 Date/Time 6-25, 6-28
SCRIPT font 6-17 Delay System Parameters dialog box
Sec. Code field Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F3 > F2 6-75
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-26 Galvo Tests dialog box
Secondary Trigger field Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F4 > F4 > Y or N
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-41 6-54
Seconds field Installation Menu
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-93 Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F1 6-61
segment Languages dialog box
definition 6-75 Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F4 > F3 6-94
Select Product Code selection Laser System Parameters dialog box
Host Port application 5-20 Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F3 > F1 6-73
SEND field Load/Save System Settings dialog box
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12 Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F8 6-57
Serial Count field Maintenance Menu
Serial Number Field dialog box 6-29 Main Menu > F9 > F8 6-37
Serial Format field Optical System Parameters dialog box
Serial Number Field dialog box 6-29 Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F3 > F3 6-82
Serial Number Field dialog box PC Display Zoom Menu
Accept [F2] field 6-29 Main Menu > F5 6-9
Cancel [ESC] field 6-29, 6-31, 6-34 Product Code Editor
Clear Data field 6-29 Main Menu > F9 > F7 6-13
diagram 6-28 Profile Laser dialog box
Serial Count field 6-29 Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F4 > F3 6-50
Serial Format field 6-29 Serial Number Field dialog box
serial number product code field 8-15 Main Menu > F9 > F7 Edit Current Field
settings 6-28
configuring delay 7-17 Main Menu > F9 > F7 Insert: Field > Serial
configuring tracking 7-15 Number 6-28
Setup Menu Setup Menu
diagram 6-59 Main Menu > F9 > F9 6-59
Index Index-15
Document 41195-0510
Standard Text Field dialog box creating 8-9
Main Menu > F9 > F7 Edit Current Field Standard Text Field dialog box
6-23 Accept [F2] field 6-24
Main Menu > F9 > F7 Insert: Field > Text Cancel [ESC] field 6-24
Field 6-23 Clear Data field 6-24
Main Menu > F9 > F7 Insert: Item > Text diagram 6-23
Field 6-23 Field Text field 6-24
System Inputs and Outputs dialog box Start Coding selection
Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F2 6-40 Host Port application 5-20
Test Menu Start Profile field
Main Menu > F9 > F8 > F4 6-44 Profile Laser dialog box 6-53
Thermal System Parameters dialog box Start X Y field
Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F1 > F5 6-69 Profile Laser dialog box 6-52
Tracking System Parameters dialog box status area
Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F1 > F4 6-65 Main Menu 6-6
User Defined Field dialog box step
Main Menu > F9 > F7 Edit Current Field definition of galvanometer 2-18
6-30, 6-33 Step Size field
Main Menu > F9 > F7 Insert: Field > User Profile Laser dialog box 6-52
Defined 6-30 steps
Main Menu > F9 > F7 Insert: Item > User adding two-dimensional data matrix bar code
Defined 6-30 8-25
Verification Parameters dialog box adjusting code delay 9-11
Main Menu > F9 > F9 > F3 > F4 6-84 adjusting height of product code 9-9
Shutter (Delayed) field adjusting power of laser 9-16
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-41 adjusting print area box size 8-18, 8-20
Shutter Control field adjusting speed of galvanometers 9-13
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-42 adjusting trigger blanking 9-19
shutter test point 3-13 adjusting x position 9-11
SIMPLEX font 6-17 aligning product code on container 9-4
SIMPLEX NO-TOUCH font 6-17 arranging items in print area box 8-22
Size field backing up product code files 8-32
Product Code Editor 6-18 building product code 8-7
Size X field calculating trigger delay 7-13
Galvo Tests dialog box 6-55 calibrating encoder 7-8, 7-10
Size Y field calibrating the verifiers 9-2
Galvo Tests dialog box 6-55 cleaning air filtration system 10-4
slave cleaning focal lens 10-3
configuration 5-3 cleaning print head housing 10-5
speed cleaning trigger beam emitter 10-4
adjusting galvanometer 9-13 clearing error messages 11-12
stand-alone configuration 5-3 configuring delay 7-16
standard command message configuring delay settings 7-17
what happens when you issue 5-5 configuring direction 7-16
standard command messages configuring mode 7-16
ACK 5-7 configuring orientation 7-16
clear errors 5-13 configuring resolution 7-16
get current status of Lasetec II 5-13 configuring tracking settings 7-15
list of 5-6 creating date and time 8-13
NAK 5-8 creating product code file 8-4
purpose 5-4, 5-6 creating serial number product code field
select product code file (PCF) 5-12 8-15
specify text in user-defined product code creating standard text field 8-9
(named) 5-11 creating user-defined lot number field 8-11
specify text in user-defined product code editing LASETEC.CFG file 12-26
(numbered) 5-10 executing test run 9-7
start marking containers 5-8 focusing product code on container 9-4
start marking containers (alternative) 5-8 galvanometer 6-52
stop marking containers 5-9 inspecting beacon lamps 10-4
stop marking containers (alternative) 5-9 inspecting external wiring 10-5
structure of 5-7 inspecting instruction labels 10-5
STANDARD font 6-17 inspecting print head 10-3
STANDARD NO-TOUCH font 6-17 inspecting safety covers 10-3
standard text field inspecting warning labels 10-5

Document 41195-0510
loading backed up copy of product code file replacing 60-watt laser power supply 12-79
8-32, 8-33 replacing 60-watt marking engine 12-95
print head replacing 60-watt marking engine power
aligning 7-2 supply 12-70
removing 30-watt focal length LEDs 12-138 replacing 60-watt PC/104 card 12-102
removing 30-watt galvanometers assembly replacing 60-watt TX (transmit) card 12-102
12-120 replacing back panel 12-5
removing 30-watt galvanometers controller replacing laser enclosure 12-8
cards 12-105 replacing operator station 12-28
removing 30-watt galvanometers power replacing print head cover 12-5
supply 12-81 saving product code files 8-17, 8-18
removing 30-watt laser assembly 12-31 setting password 7-18
removing 30-watt laser power supply 12-73 stop bits 5-2
removing 30-watt marking engine 12-56 Stop Coding selection
removing 30-watt marking engine power Host Port application 5-20
supply 12-63 Stripe Density field
removing 30-watt PC/104 card 12-50 Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-34
removing 30-watt TX (transmit) card 12-50 Stripe X Scale field
removing 30-watt vortex compressed air Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-35
cooler 12-130 Stripe Y Scale field
removing 60-watt focal length LEDs 12-139 Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-35
removing 60-watt galvanometers assembly Successful Mark field
12-123 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-43
removing 60-watt galvanometers controller switch
cards 12-109 key 1-4
removing 60-watt galvanometers power power 3-6
supply 12-84 system enable key 3-6
removing 60-watt laser assembly 12-40 switch box
removing 60-watt laser power supply 12-75 installation requirements 4-13
removing 60-watt marking engine 12-60 installing 4-13
removing 60-watt marking engine power key switch 3-6
supply 12-65 laser power button 3-6
removing 60-watt PC/104 card 12-53 power switch 3-6
removing 60-watt TX (transmit) card 12-53 wiring to power 4-35
removing back panel 12-4 wiring to print head 4-31
removing laser enclosure 12-6 system enable key switch 1-4
removing operator station 12-28 System Fault Lamp field
removing password 12-25 Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-43
removing print head cover 12-3 System Inputs and Outputs dialog box
replacing 30-watt alignment LED 12-141, diagram 6-40
12-147 system software
replacing 30-watt galvanometers assembly configuring Lasetec II 7-7
12-125 menu structure 6-2
replacing 30-watt galvanometers controller updating 12-10, 12-13
cards 12-113 compact flash card method 12-19
replacing 30-watt galvanometers power serial port method 12-15
supply 12-86 universal serial bus (USB) method 12-21
replacing 30-watt laser assembly 12-35 System Temp field
replacing 30-watt laser power supply 12-77 Main Menu 6-6
replacing 30-watt marking engine 12-92 Thermal System Parameters dialog box 6-70
replacing 30-watt marking engine power systems
supply 12-68 air filtration 3-23
replacing 30-watt PC/104 card 12-99 chiller cooling 3-24
replacing 30-watt TX (transmit) card 12-99
replacing 30-watt vortex compressed air
cooler 12-134
replacing 60-watt alignment LED 12-144 T
replacing 60-watt galvanometers assembly TAB key 6-3, 12-13
12-127 Test Menu
replacing 60-watt galvanometers controller diagram 6-44
cards 12-116 F1 - Static Laser Align field 6-45
replacing 60-watt galvanometers power F10 - Start Coding field 6-45
supply 12-89 F2 - Dynamic Laser Align field 6-45
replacing 60-watt laser assembly 12-46 F3 - Laser Profiler field 6-45
Index Index-17
Document 41195-0510
F4 - Misc. Galvo Test field 6-45 Encoder Res field 6-66
Test Package field End Reject Delay field 6-67
Calibrate Encoder dialog box 6-64 Index Rej Delay field 6-67
test points Index Trig Delay field 6-67
TP1 3-13 Orientation field 6-67
TP11 3-13 Reject Delay field 6-67
TP2 3-13 Tracking Mode field 6-66
TP3 3-13 Trigger Delay field 6-66
TP4 3-13 trailing edge
TP5 3-13 definition 2-19
TP6 3-13 transmit (TX) card 3-13
TP7 3-13 description 3-12
TP8 3-13 Trig Blank field
TP9 3-13 Product Code Editor 6-16
test run trigger
executing 9-7 diagram 3-18, 3-19
Tested Enc. Res. field installing 4-4
Calibrate Encoder dialog box 6-64 installing with conveyor 4-5
text product code field installing with labeler 4-7
creating 8-9 types 3-17
Thermal Shutdown field diffuse-reflective 3-17
Inputs and Outputs dialog box 6-41 retro-reflective 3-17
Thermal System Parameters dialog box through-beam 3-17
Air Knife On Temp field 6-70 wiring to print head 4-21
Air Off Temp field 6-70 trigger beam emitter
Air On Temp field 6-70 cleaning 10-4
CPU OverTemp Setpoint field 6-69 trigger blanking
diagram 6-69 adjusting 9-19
System Temp field 6-70 trigger delay
through-beam trigger 3-17 calculating 7-13
Tilt field Trigger Delay field
Product Code Editor 6-19 Tracking System Parameters dialog box 6-66
Time field trigger test point 3-13
Main Menu 6-6 troubleshooting problems 11-14
toggling between verifying focus and alignment tube
6-7 laser 3-18, 3-19
TP1 trigger test point 3-13 two-dimensional data matrix bar code
TP11 interlock test point 3-13 adding 8-25
TP2 encoder input test point 3-13 TX (transmit) card
TP3 encoder output test point 3-13 description 3-12
TP4 Pw M out test point 3-13 diagram 3-13
TP5 focus diodes test point 3-13 removing 30-watt 12-50
TP6 watch dog T/O test point 3-13 removing 60-watt 12-53
TP7 watch dog CLK test point 3-13 replacing 30-watt 12-99
TP8 align diode test point 3-13 replacing 60-watt 12-102
TP9 shutter test point 3-13 Type field
Tracking field Product Code Editor 6-22
Main Menu 6-6
tracking mode
types 2-16
tracking modes U
dynamic UDLAZ.EXE utility 12-11
definition 2-16 up arrow key (↑) 6-3, 6-10, 6-14, 6-38, 12-13
indexed update Lasetec II system software
definition 2-16 ways to 12-13
static compact flash card method 12-19
definition 2-16 serial port method 12-15
tracking settings universal serial bus (USB) method 12-21
configuring 7-15 User Data field
Tracking System Parameters dialog box User Defined Field dialog box 6-31
Conveyor Speed field 6-67 User Defined Field dialog box
diagram 6-65 Accept [F2] field 6-31
Direction field 6-65 Cancel [ESC] field 6-31, 6-34
Encoder Counts field 6-67 Clear Data field 6-31

Document 41195-0510
diagram 6-30
Field Name field 6-31 W
Field Text field 6-32 Warning 1-2
Fixed Text field 6-31 warning labels 1-5
Input Source field 6-32 inspecting 10-5
User Data field 6-31 watch dog CLK test point 3-13
User Entry is ... characters field 6-32 watch dog T/O test point 3-13
User Defined Field Text selection width 6-63
Host Port application 5-21 width method
User Entry is ... characters field calibrating encoder 7-10
User Defined Field dialog box 6-32 wiring
utilities encoder to print head 4-22
LLINK.EXE 12-10 inspecting external 10-5
UDLAZ.EXE 12-11 Lasetec II to Lasetec II 4-27
safety interlocks 4-23
trigger to print head 4-21
V wiring cables 4-20
wiring customer I/O 4-26
Vel (mm/s) field wiring power to switch box 4-35
Galvo Tests dialog box 6-56 wiring print head to operator station 4-29
Velocity field wiring switch box to print head 4-31
Product Code Editor 6-20
Ver 1 Peak field
Profile Laser dialog box 6-53
Ver 1 Peak Status field X
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-48 X Aperture field
Ver 2 Peak field Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
Profile Laser dialog box 6-53 X Aperture Size field
Ver 2 Peak Status field Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-48 X Center field
Verification Parameters dialog box Galvo Tests dialog box 6-56
ADC Reads to Avg field 6-85 X Field Limit field
Align on new PCF field 6-85 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
diagram 6-84 X Galvo Range field
Lasing On Time field 6-85 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
Lasing Power field 6-85 X Offset field
Verifier Select field 6-85 Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-35
Verify 1 X Y field 6-86 Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-79
Verify 2 X Y field 6-86 X Pin Cushion field
Verify Threshold field 6-85 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
Verifier Select field x position
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-47 adjusting 9-11
Profile Laser dialog box 6-51 X Position field
Verification Parameters dialog box 6-85 Product Code Editor 6-17
verifiers X Slope field
calibrating 9-2 Delay System Parameters dialog box 6-78
Verify 1 X Y field X Trim field
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-48 Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-35
Verification Parameters dialog box 6-86
Verify 2 X Y field
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-48
Verification Parameters dialog box 6-86 Y
Verify Threshold field
Alignment Tests dialog box 6-47 Y Aperture field
Verification Parameters dialog box 6-85 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
verifying alignment 6-7 Y Aperture Size field
verifying focus 6-7 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
VERSION field Y Center field
LLINK.EXE main menu 12-12 Galvo Tests dialog box 6-56
vortex compressed air cooler Y Field Limit field
removing 30-watt 12-130 Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
replacing 30-watt 12-134 Y Galvo Range field
Optical System Parameters dialog box 6-83
Y Offset field
Index Index-19
Document 41195-0510
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-35
Y Position field
Product Code Editor 6-18
Y Trim field
Bar Code Type Field dialog box 6-35
Year Code field
Date/Time Field dialog box 6-26
Year field
Date & Time Settings dialog box 6-92

Document 41195-0510
Documentation Feedback
Help Us Improve
Please help us provide you with better documentation. Submit

comments, suggestions, and corrections to the Technical Publica-
tions Department at Industrial Dynamics/filtec.
Ways to Submit Feedback
You can submit your comments, suggestions, and corrections in

any of the following ways:
Electronic mail filtecpubs@filtec.com
Fax Use the Documentation Feedback Form
Mail Use the Documentation Feedback Form
Thank you!
Technical Publications Department at Industrial Dynamics/filtec
Documentation Feedback Feedback-1

Document 41195-0510
Documentation Feedback Form
Fax to 310-530-1000 Your full name
Mail to Industrial Dynamics/filtec Your telephone

Technical Publications Department
3100 Fujita Street
Torrance, CA 90505 Your email address
Your business’ name

and address
Page numbers about which you are submitting feedback
Provide your comment, suggestion, or correction below and fax or mail this completed form
to the fax number of address above.
Feedback-2 Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

Document 41195-0510

Lasetec II-Service and Installation Guide-English-41195-0510 - CCv0001 PDF

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lasetec II-Service and Installation Guide-English-41195-0510 - CCv0001 PDF

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

Lasetec II Service and Installation

Corporate Headquarters 3100 Fujita Street,

Mailing Address P.O. Box 2945,

Shipping Address 3100 Fujita Street,

Customer Service (800) 733-5173

1. Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

2. Lasetec II Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Table of Contents iii

3. Components of the Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

iv Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

4. Installing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

vi Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

6. Lasetec II System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Table of Contents vii

viii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

x Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

7. Configuring Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

8. Creating and Editing Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

9. Executing Your First Test Run and Making Adjustments . . . . . 9-1

xii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

10. Performing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1

11. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1

Table of Contents xiii

xiv Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

A. Software Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Feedback-1

Help Us Improve . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Feedback-1

xvi Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

1. Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

Figure 1-1. Lasetec II Warning Labels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-5

2. Lasetec II Concepts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

Figure 2-1. Product Code. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-2

3. Components of the Lasetec II. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

Figure 3-1. Beam-Steering Mechanics of the Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-2

List of Figures xvii

4. Installing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

Figure 4-1. Installing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-2

5. How the Lasetec II Communicates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

Figure 5-1. Enhanced Command Message . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .5-16

6. Lasetec II System Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

Figure 6-1. Lasetec II System Software Menu Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2

xviii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

7. Configuring Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

Figure 7-1. System Inputs and Outputs Dialog Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-3

8. Creating and Editing Product Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

Figure 8-1. Creating and Editing a Product Code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-2

List of Figures xix

10. Performing Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .10-1

11. Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .11-1

12. Servicing Your Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-1

Figure 12-1. Back Panel of the 30-Watt Lasetec II . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .12-4

xx Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

List of Figures xxi

xxii Lasetec II Service and Installation Guide

A. Software Change History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1

Documentation Feedback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Feedback-1

List of Figures xxiii

The Lasetec II documentation provides operators, technicians,

• Lasetec II Operation Guide tells line operators how to use and

Version of the Lasetec II System Software That This Guide

This guide describes the two versions of the Lasetec II system

• Standard Lasetec II system software, version 2.63.xx.

This guide describes features that are available only in these